HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series Service Manual ENWW
HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP shared.swissparts.ch - /Manuals/HP/LaserJet/Color Laserjet/
hp_color_laserjet_cm3530_mfp_series_service_manual Multi-functional printer HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP - Service manuals and Schematics, Disassembly / Assembly. Free.
User Manual: HP Laserjet CM3530 shared.swissparts.ch - /Manuals/HP/LaserJet/Mono Laserjet/
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 630
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series Service Manual Theory of operation Removal and replacement Solve problems Parts list Additional product information: www.hp.com/support/cljcm3530mfp www.hp.com/go/usemyMFP HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series Service Manual Copyright and License Trademark Credits © 2008 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. Corel® is a trademark or registered trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Intel® Core™ is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Java™ is a US trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Part number: CC519-91013 Edition 2, 10/2008 Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows®XP are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Windows Vista® is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PANTONE® is Pantone, Inc's checkstandard trademark for color. UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Table of contents 1 Product basics Conventions used in this guide ............................................................................................................ 2 Product comparison ............................................................................................................................. 3 Product features ................................................................................................................................... 4 Product view ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Product front view ................................................................................................................ 7 Product back view ................................................................................................................ 8 Interface ports ...................................................................................................................... 9 Serial number and model number location ........................................................................ 10 2 Control panel Use the control panel ......................................................................................................................... 12 Control-panel layout ........................................................................................................... 12 Home screen ..................................................................................................................... 14 Buttons on the touchscreen ............................................................................................... 15 Control-panel help system ................................................................................................. 15 Navigate the Administration menu ..................................................................................................... 16 Information menu ............................................................................................................................... 17 Default Job Options menu .................................................................................................................. 19 Default Options for Originals .............................................................................................. 19 Image adjustment .............................................................................................................. 20 Default Copy Options ......................................................................................................... 21 Default Fax Options ........................................................................................................... 22 Default E-mail Options ....................................................................................................... 23 Default Send to Folder Options ......................................................................................... 24 Default Print Options .......................................................................................................... 25 Time/Scheduling menu ....................................................................................................................... 26 Management menu ............................................................................................................................ 28 Initial Setup menu ............................................................................................................................... 31 Networking and I/O ............................................................................................................ 31 Fax Setup .......................................................................................................................... 38 E-mail Setup ...................................................................................................................... 41 Send Setup menu .............................................................................................................. 41 Device Behavior menu ....................................................................................................................... 42 ENWW iii Print Quality menu .............................................................................................................................. 46 Troubleshooting menu ........................................................................................................................ 50 Resets menu ...................................................................................................................................... 53 Service menu ..................................................................................................................................... 54 3 Paper and print media Supported paper and print media ....................................................................................................... 56 Supported paper and print media types ............................................................................................. 58 Tray and bin capacity ......................................................................................................................... 60 Custom paper sizes ............................................................................................................................ 61 Load paper and print media ............................................................................................................... 62 Paper orientation for loading trays ..................................................................................... 62 Tray 1 ................................................................................................................ 63 Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 ................................................................................... 65 Load Tray 1 ........................................................................................................................ 66 Print envelopes ................................................................................................. 68 Load Tray 2 ........................................................................................................................ 68 Load the optional 500-sheet paper and heavy media tray (Tray 3) ................................... 70 Load standard-sized paper into Tray 3 ............................................................ 70 Load custom-size paper into Tray 3 .................................................................. 72 Configure trays ................................................................................................................................... 75 Configure a tray when loading paper ................................................................................. 75 Configure a tray to match print job settings ....................................................................... 75 Automatic overhead transparency sensing (auto sense mode) ......................................... 75 Auto-sense settings ........................................................................................... 76 Select the paper by source, type, or size ........................................................................... 76 Source ............................................................................................................... 76 Type and Size ................................................................................................... 76 Choose an output bin ......................................................................................................................... 77 4 Manage and maintain Print information pages ...................................................................................................................... 80 HP Easy Printer Care ......................................................................................................................... 82 Open the HP Easy Printer Care software .......................................................................... 82 HP Easy Printer Care software sections ............................................................................ 82 Embedded Web server ....................................................................................................................... 85 Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection ..................................... 85 Embedded Web server sections ........................................................................................ 86 Use HP Web Jetadmin software ........................................................................................................ 89 Product security features .................................................................................................................... 90 Secure the embedded Web server .................................................................................... 90 HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disks .................................................................... 90 Secure Disk Erase ............................................................................................................. 90 iv ENWW Data affected ..................................................................................................... 90 Additional Information ....................................................................................... 91 Job storage ....................................................................................................... 91 DSS authentication ............................................................................................................ 91 Lock the control-panel menus ............................................................................................ 91 Lock the formatter cage ..................................................................................................... 92 Manage supplies ................................................................................................................................ 93 Print-cartridge storage ....................................................................................................... 93 HP policy on non-HP print cartridges ................................................................................. 93 HP fraud hotline and Web site ........................................................................................... 93 Replace supplies ............................................................................................................... 93 Supplies life ....................................................................................................... 93 Locate supplies ................................................................................................. 94 Supply replacement guidelines ......................................................................... 94 Change print cartridges ..................................................................................... 94 Change the toner collection unit ........................................................................ 98 Install memory ................................................................................................. 100 Install DDR memory DIMMs ........................................................... 100 Enable memory for Windows .......................................................... 104 Install an HP Jetdirect or EIO print server card or EIO hard disk . . . 105 Clean the product ............................................................................................................................. 108 Clean the outside of the product ...................................................................................... 108 Clean the touchscreen ..................................................................................................... 108 Clean the scanner glass .................................................................................................. 108 Clean the document feeder ............................................................................................. 108 Clean the document-feeder backing ............................................................... 109 Clean the document-feeder rollers .................................................................. 110 Clean the fuser ................................................................................................................ 111 Product updates ............................................................................................................................... 112 Determine the current firmware version ........................................................................... 112 Download new firmware from the HP Web site ............................................................... 112 Transfer the new firmware to the product ........................................................................ 112 Use the flash executable file to update the firmware ...................................... 112 Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser ....................................... 113 Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection ........................... 113 Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware ............................................. 114 Use Microsoft Windows commands to upgrade the firmware ......................... 114 5 Theory of operation Basic operation ................................................................................................................................. 116 Sequence of operation ..................................................................................................... 116 Engine-control system ...................................................................................................................... 118 DC controller .................................................................................................................... 119 ENWW v Solenoids ........................................................................................................ 119 Clutches .......................................................................................................... 120 Switches .......................................................................................................... 120 Sensors ........................................................................................................... 121 Motors and fans .............................................................................................. 122 High-voltage power supply .............................................................................................. 123 Low-voltage power supply ............................................................................................... 125 Overcurrent/overvoltage protection ................................................................. 126 Safety .............................................................................................................. 126 Voltage detection ............................................................................................ 126 Sleep (powersave) mode ................................................................................ 126 Low-voltage power supply failure .................................................................... 126 Fuser (fixing) control ........................................................................................................ 127 Fuser (fixing) temperature-control circuit ........................................................ 128 Fuser (fixing) over-temperature protection ...................................................... 128 Fuser (fixing)-failure detection ......................................................................... 129 Laser/scanner system ...................................................................................................................... 131 Image-formation system ................................................................................................................... 133 Image-formation process ................................................................................................. 134 Step 1: Pre-exposure ...................................................................................... 135 Step 2: Primary charging ................................................................................. 135 Step 3: Laser-beam exposure ......................................................................... 136 Step 4: Development ....................................................................................... 136 Step 5: Primary transfer .................................................................................. 136 Step 6: Secondary transfer ............................................................................. 137 Step 7: Separation .......................................................................................... 138 Step 8: Fusing ................................................................................................. 138 Step 9: ITB cleaning ........................................................................................ 139 Step 10: Drum cleaning ................................................................................... 139 Print cartridge .................................................................................................................. 139 Developing-roller engagement and disengagement ........................................................ 141 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit ................................................................................. 142 Primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement ................................ 143 ITB cleaning .................................................................................................... 144 Calibration ........................................................................................................................ 145 Color-misregistration control ........................................................................... 146 Image-stabilization control .............................................................................. 147 Pickup, feed, and delivery system .................................................................................................... 148 Pickup-and-feed unit ........................................................................................................ 151 Cassette pickup ............................................................................................... 151 Cassette-presence detection .......................................................... 153 Cassette lift operation ..................................................................... 153 Cassette paper-presence detection ................................................ 154 Multifeed prevention ....................................................................... 155 vi ENWW Multipurpose tray pickup ................................................................................. 156 Paper feed ....................................................................................................... 157 Skew-feed prevention ..................................................................... 158 OHT detection ................................................................................ 158 Fusing and delivery unit ................................................................................................... 159 Loop control .................................................................................................... 159 Pressure-roller pressurization control ............................................................. 160 Duplexing unit ................................................................................................................. 162 Duplexing reverse and feed control ................................................................ 163 Duplex pickup operation .................................................................................. 163 Jam detection ................................................................................................................................... 164 Optional paper feeder ....................................................................................................................... 166 Paper-feeder pickup and feed operation ......................................................................... 168 Paper-size detection and cassette-presence detection ................................................... 168 Paper-feeder cassette lift operation ................................................................................. 170 Paper-feeder presence detection .................................................................................... 171 Paper-feeder multiple feed prevention ............................................................................. 172 Paper feeder jam detection .............................................................................................. 173 Scanning/image capture system system .......................................................................................... 174 Optical assembly ............................................................................................................. 174 Automatic document feed system .................................................................................... 174 Control panel ................................................................................................... 174 Sensors in the ADF ......................................................................................... 174 ADF paper path ............................................................................................... 175 Stapler ............................................................................................................. 176 6 Removal and replacement Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 178 Removal and replacement strategy ................................................................................................. 178 Electrostatic discharge ..................................................................................................................... 178 Required tools ................................................................................................................................. 179 Before performing service ................................................................................................................ 180 After performing service ................................................................................................................... 181 Post-service test ............................................................................................................................... 182 Print-quality test ............................................................................................................... 182 Copy-quality test .............................................................................................................. 182 DC controller PCA ............................................................................................................................ 183 Parts removal order .......................................................................................................................... 184 Customer self repair (CSR) components ......................................................................................... 186 Print cartridges ................................................................................................................. 186 Stapler cartridge .............................................................................................................. 188 Duplex-reverse guide ....................................................................................................... 189 Toner-collection unit ........................................................................................................ 190 ENWW vii Formatter PCA ................................................................................................................. 192 Memory DIMM ................................................................................................................. 193 Remove the memory DIMM ............................................................................ 193 Enable memory for Windows .......................................................... 194 Hard drive and Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) cable ......................... 195 Remove the hard drive and SATA cable ......................................................... 195 Fax PCA and cable .......................................................................................................... 197 Remove the fax PCA and cable ...................................................................... 197 Tray cassette ................................................................................................................... 199 Fuser ............................................................................................................................... 200 Pickup roller (Tray 2) ....................................................................................................... 201 Pickup and feed rollers (Tray 3) ....................................................................................... 203 Separation roller (Tray 2) ................................................................................................. 204 Secondary transfer roller ................................................................................................. 205 Reinstall the transfer roller .............................................................................. 206 Secondary transfer assembly .......................................................................................... 207 Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly ..................................................... 208 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) ........................................................................................ 209 Front-door assembly ........................................................................................................ 211 Automatic document feeder (ADF) .................................................................................. 212 Calibrate a replacement ADF assembly .......................................................... 214 ADF roller assembly and separation pad ......................................................................... 215 Reinstall the ADF roller assembly ................................................................... 217 Control-panel overlay ....................................................................................................... 218 Control-panel assembly ................................................................................................... 219 Remove the control-panel assembly ............................................................... 219 Right door (optional paper feeder) ................................................................................... 221 External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly ................................................................... 223 Identification and location ................................................................................................ 223 Front-upper cover ............................................................................................................ 225 Right-door assembly ........................................................................................................ 227 Right-rear cover ............................................................................................................... 231 Left cover ......................................................................................................................... 233 Rear-upper cover ............................................................................................................. 236 Rear cover ....................................................................................................................... 238 Remove the rear cover .................................................................................... 238 Right-front cover .............................................................................................................. 239 Remove the right-front cover ........................................................................... 239 Reinstall the power button .............................................................. 241 Scanner assembly ........................................................................................................... 242 Remove the scanner assembly ....................................................................... 242 Delivery cover .................................................................................................................. 245 Remove the delivery cover .............................................................................. 245 Left-upper cover ............................................................................................................... 247 viii ENWW Remove the left-upper cover ........................................................................... 247 Front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover .............................................................. 249 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover ........................... 249 Reinstall the right-side stapler cover .............................................. 256 Right-top cover ................................................................................................................ 258 Remove the right-top cover ............................................................................. 258 Front-top cover ................................................................................................................ 261 Remove the front-top cover ............................................................................. 261 Rear-top cover ................................................................................................................. 262 Remove the rear-top cover ............................................................................. 262 Internal assemblies .......................................................................................................................... 264 Stapler assembly ............................................................................................................. 264 Remove the stapler assembly ......................................................................... 264 Reinstall the stapler assembly ........................................................ 265 Stapler power supply ....................................................................................................... 266 Remove the stapler power supply ................................................................... 266 Interconnect board (ICB) ................................................................................................. 267 Remove the ICB .............................................................................................. 267 Reinstall the ICB ............................................................................. 269 DC controller PCA and tray ............................................................................................. 270 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray ........................................................ 270 Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) ................................................................................... 273 Remove the LVPS ........................................................................................... 273 Scanner-control board (SCB) .......................................................................................... 279 Remove the SCB ............................................................................................ 279 Reinstall the SCB ........................................................................... 283 Pickup roller (Tray 1) ....................................................................................................... 284 Delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor .................................................... 285 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor ................ 285 Toner-collection sensor .................................................................................................. 290 Remove the toner-collection sensor ................................................................ 290 Residual-toner-feed motor ............................................................................................... 292 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor ........................................................... 292 Reinstall the residual-toner collection door ..................................... 296 Registration density (RD) sensor assembly ..................................................................... 297 Remove the RD sensor assembly ................................................................... 297 Power-supply fan and fan duct ........................................................................................ 300 Remove the power-supply fan and fan duct .................................................... 300 Registration assembly ..................................................................................................... 303 Remove the registration assembly .................................................................. 303 High-voltage power supply lower ..................................................................................... 308 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower ................................................ 308 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply lower ............................... 310 Developing-disengagement motor ................................................................................... 311 ENWW ix Remove the developing-disengagement motor .............................................. 311 Pickup motor .................................................................................................................... 313 Remove the pickup motor ............................................................................... 313 Lifter-drive assembly ........................................................................................................ 314 Remove the lifter-drive assembly .................................................................... 314 Cassette-pickup drive assembly ...................................................................................... 316 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly .................................................. 316 Reinstall the cassette-pickup drive assembly ................................. 321 Cassette-pickup assembly ............................................................................................... 323 Remove the cassette-pickup assembly ........................................................... 323 Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) ........................................................................................ 325 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) .................................................... 325 Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) ....................................................................................... 332 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) ................................................... 332 Reinstall the protective glass cleaner (PGC) actuators .................. 336 High-voltage power supply upper .................................................................................... 339 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper ................................................ 339 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply upper ............................... 342 Drum motor 1 ................................................................................................................... 343 Remove the drum motor 1 .............................................................................. 343 Drum motor 2 or drum motor 3 ........................................................................................ 344 Remove the drum motor 2 or drum motor 3 .................................................... 344 Fuser motor ..................................................................................................................... 345 Remove the fuser motor .................................................................................. 345 Main-drive assembly ........................................................................................................ 346 Remove the main-drive assembly ................................................................... 346 Reinstall the main-drive assembly .................................................. 350 Fuser-drive assembly ...................................................................................................... 356 Remove the fuser-drive assembly ................................................................... 357 Reinstall the fuser-drive assembly .................................................. 360 Delivery assembly ............................................................................................................ 361 Remove the delivery assembly ....................................................................... 362 Reinstall the delivery assembly ...................................................... 365 Duplex-drive assembly .................................................................................................... 366 Remove the duplex-drive assembly ................................................................ 367 Optional paper feeder assembly (Tray 3) ........................................................................ 368 Drawer connector ........................................................................................... 368 7 Solve problems Solve problems checklist .................................................................................................................. 370 Menu map ........................................................................................................................................ 372 Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................. 373 Determine the problem source ........................................................................................ 373 x ENWW Pre-troubleshooting checklist .......................................................................... 373 Troubleshooting flowchart ............................................................................... 375 Power subsystem ............................................................................................................ 376 Power-on checks ............................................................................................. 376 Power-on troubleshooting overview ............................................... 376 Tools for troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 378 Individual component diagnostics .................................................................................... 378 LED diagnostics .............................................................................................. 378 Understand lights on the formatter ................................................. 378 Engine diagnostics .......................................................................................... 381 Troubleshooting menu .................................................................... 381 Defeating interlocks ........................................................................ 384 Disable cartridge check .................................................................. 385 Engine-test button .......................................................................... 386 Paper-path test ................................................................................................ 386 Manual sensor test (special-mode test) .......................................................... 387 A TOP (top of page) sensor ............................................................ 389 B and C loop sensors ..................................................................... 390 D fuser (fixing) delivery sensor ....................................................... 391 E duplex re-pickup sensor .............................................................. 392 F output bin full sensor ................................................................... 393 G developing home-position sensor .............................................. 394 H fuser (fixing) pressure-release sensor ....................................... 395 I primary transfer-roller disengagement sensor .............................. 396 K right and front door interlock switches ......................................... 398 L Tray 1 media present sensor ...................................................... 400 M Tray 2 paper out sensor ............................................................. 401 N Tray 2 closed sensor ................................................................... 402 O Tray 2 stack-surface sensor ...................................................... 403 P optional Tray 3-empty sensor ...................................................... 404 Q optional Tray 3 media-feed sensor (Q) ....................................... 405 R optional Tray 3 stack-surface sensor (R) .................................... 406 S, T, and U optional Tray 3 media-size sensors ............................ 407 Paper-path sensors test .................................................................................. 408 Print/Stop test .................................................................................................. 409 Component tests ............................................................................................. 409 Component test (special mode test) ............................................... 409 Diagrams ......................................................................................................................... 411 Formatter PCA ................................................................................................ 411 Location of connectors .................................................................................... 412 DC controller PCA .......................................................................... 412 Paper feeder driver PCA ................................................................ 413 PCAs, motors, fans, switches, solenoids, and clutches .................................. 414 Base product .................................................................................. 414 ENWW xi 1 x 500 paper feeder ...................................................................... 420 Sensors ........................................................................................................... 421 General timing chart ........................................................................................ 423 Circuit diagrams .............................................................................................. 423 Print-quality troubleshooting tools .................................................................................... 427 Repetitive defects ruler ................................................................................... 428 Calibrate the product ....................................................................................... 430 Internal print-quality test pages ........................................................................................ 431 Print-quality-troubleshooting pages ................................................................. 431 Diagnostics page ............................................................................................. 434 Cleaning page ................................................................................................. 435 Configuration pages ........................................................................................ 436 Configuration page ......................................................................... 436 HP embedded Jetdirect page ......................................................... 438 Embedded protocol page ............................................................... 439 Finding important information on the configuration pages .............. 440 Color-band test ................................................................................................ 440 Control-panel messages .................................................................................................................. 441 Event log messages ......................................................................................................................... 468 Print an event log ............................................................................................................. 468 Show an event log ........................................................................................................... 468 Clear the event log ........................................................................................................... 468 Event log message table ................................................................................................. 468 Clear paper jams .............................................................................................................................. 472 Common causes of jams ................................................................................................. 472 Jam locations ................................................................................................................... 473 Clear jams ........................................................................................................................ 473 Clear jams in the right door ............................................................................. 475 Clear jams in the output bin area .................................................................... 479 Clear jams in Tray 1 ........................................................................................ 480 Clear jams in Tray 2 ........................................................................................ 482 Clear jams in the optional 500-sheet paper and heavy media tray (Tray 3) ............................................................................................................ 483 Clear jams in the lower right door (Tray 3) ...................................................... 484 Clear jams in the document feeder ................................................................. 485 Jam recovery ................................................................................................................... 486 Solve paper-handling problems ........................................................................................................ 487 Product feeds multiple sheets .......................................................................................... 487 Product feeds incorrect page size ................................................................................... 487 Product pulls from incorrect tray ...................................................................................... 487 Paper does not feed automatically .................................................................................. 488 Paper does not feed from Tray 2 or 3 .............................................................................. 488 Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed .................................................................. 489 Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product .................................................................. 489 xii ENWW Output is curled or wrinkled ............................................................................................. 490 Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly ................................................................ 490 Use manual print modes .................................................................................................................. 492 Solve image-quality problems .......................................................................................................... 494 Image defects table ......................................................................................................... 494 Solve performance problems ........................................................................................................... 500 Solve connectivity problems ............................................................................................................. 501 Solve direct-connect problems ........................................................................................ 501 Solve network problems .................................................................................................. 501 Service mode functions .................................................................................................................... 503 Service menu ................................................................................................................... 503 Product resets .................................................................................................................. 505 Restore factory settings .................................................................................. 505 Hard disk initialization (optional) ..................................................................... 505 NVRAM initialization ........................................................................................ 506 Restore factory settings (cold reset) .............................................................. 506 Solve fax problems ........................................................................................................................... 507 Solve e-mail problems ...................................................................................................................... 507 Validate the SMTP gateway address ............................................................................... 507 Validate the LDAP gateway address ............................................................................... 507 8 Parts and diagrams Order parts, accessories, and supplies ............................................................................................ 510 Part numbers .................................................................................................................................... 511 Customer self-repair (CSR) components ......................................................................... 511 Accessories and products ................................................................................................ 512 Print cartridges and toner collection unit .......................................................................... 513 Memory ............................................................................................................................ 513 Cables and interfaces ...................................................................................................... 514 Service kits ...................................................................................................................... 515 Service manuals and user documentation ....................................................................... 518 Screws .............................................................................................................................................. 519 How to use the parts lists and diagrams .......................................................................................... 519 ADF and scanner assemblies .......................................................................................................... 520 External covers, panels, and doors .................................................................................................. 522 Right door assembly ......................................................................................................................... 524 Internal components ......................................................................................................................... 526 Internal components (1 of 5) ............................................................................................ 526 Internal components (2 of 5) ............................................................................................ 528 Internal components (3 of 5) ............................................................................................ 530 Internal components (4 of 5) ............................................................................................ 532 Internal components (5 of 5) ............................................................................................ 534 Fuser ................................................................................................................................ 536 ENWW xiii 250-sheet cassette .......................................................................................................... 538 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly ..................................................................... 540 Registration assembly ..................................................................................................... 542 Paper-delivery assembly ................................................................................................. 544 PCAs ................................................................................................................................ 546 Formatter components ..................................................................................................... 548 Accessories ...................................................................................................................................... 550 500-sheet paper feeder ................................................................................................... 550 Paper feeder main body .................................................................................................. 552 Alphabetical parts list ....................................................................................................................... 554 Numerical parts list ........................................................................................................................... 561 Appendix A Service and support Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement .................................................................................... 570 Print cartridge limited warranty statement ........................................................................................ 571 HP Color LaserJet Fuser Kit Limited Warranty Statement ............................................................... 572 End User License Agreement .......................................................................................................... 573 Customer self-repair warranty service .............................................................................................. 575 Customer support ............................................................................................................................. 576 Appendix B Product specifications Physical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 578 Electrical specifications .................................................................................................................... 578 Acoustic specifications ..................................................................................................................... 578 Environmental specifications ............................................................................................................ 579 Appendix C Regulatory information FCC regulations ............................................................................................................................... 582 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................. 583 Safety statements ............................................................................................................................. 584 Laser safety ..................................................................................................................... 584 Canadian DOC regulations .............................................................................................. 584 VCCI statement (Japan) .................................................................................................. 584 Power cord statement (Japan) ......................................................................................... 584 EMC statement (Korea) ................................................................................................... 584 Laser statement for Finland ............................................................................................. 584 Substances Table (China) ............................................................................................... 585 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 587 xiv ENWW List of tables Table 1-1 Table 1-2 Table 2-1 Table 2-2 Table 2-3 Table 2-4 Table 2-5 Table 2-6 Table 2-7 Table 2-8 Table 2-9 Table 2-10 Table 2-11 Table 2-12 Table 2-13 Table 2-14 Table 2-15 Table 2-16 Table 2-17 Table 2-18 Table 3-1 Table 5-1 Table 5-2 Table 5-3 Table 5-4 Table 5-5 Table 5-6 Table 5-7 Table 5-8 Table 5-9 Table 5-10 Table 5-11 Table 5-12 Table 5-13 ENWW Product models .................................................................................................................................. 3 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 4 Information menu ............................................................................................................................. 17 Default Options For Originals menu ................................................................................................. 19 Image Adjustment menu .................................................................................................................. 20 Default Copy Options menu ............................................................................................................. 21 Fax Send menu ................................................................................................................................ 22 Fax Receive menu ........................................................................................................................... 22 Default Print Options menu .............................................................................................................. 25 Time/Scheduling menu .................................................................................................................... 26 Management menu .......................................................................................................................... 28 Networking and I/O ........................................................................................................................ 31 Jetdirect menus .............................................................................................................................. 31 Fax Setup menu ............................................................................................................................. 38 E-mail Setup menu ......................................................................................................................... 41 Send Setup menu .......................................................................................................................... 41 Device Behavior menu ................................................................................................................... 42 Print Quality menu .......................................................................................................................... 46 Troubleshooting menu ................................................................................................................... 50 Resets menu .................................................................................................................................. 53 Supported paper and print media sizes ........................................................................................... 56 Sequence of operation ................................................................................................................... 117 Solenoids ....................................................................................................................................... 119 Switches ......................................................................................................................................... 120 Sensors .......................................................................................................................................... 121 Motors ............................................................................................................................................ 122 Fans ............................................................................................................................................... 123 High-voltage power supply circuits ................................................................................................. 124 Converted DC voltages .................................................................................................................. 125 Fuser (fixing) components .............................................................................................................. 127 Primary-transfer-roller engagement states ................................................................................... 143 Image-stabilization controls .......................................................................................................... 147 Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system ................................................. 148 Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system ................................................. 149 xv Table 5-14 Table 5-15 Table 6-1 Table 6-2 Table 7-1 Table 7-2 Table 7-3 Table 7-4 Table 7-5 Table 7-6 Table 7-7 Table 7-8 Table 7-9 Table 7-10 Table 7-11 Table 7-12 Table 7-13 Table 7-14 Table 8-1 Table 8-2 Table 8-3 Table 8-4 Table 8-5 Table 8-6 Table 8-7 Table 8-8 Table 8-9 Table 8-10 Table 8-11 Table 8-12 Table 8-13 Table 8-14 Table 8-15 Table 8-16 Table 8-17 Table 8-18 Table 8-19 Table 8-20 Table 8-21 Table 8-22 Table 8-23 Table 8-24 Table 8-25 Table 8-26 xvi Jams that the product detects ...................................................................................................... 164 Electrical components for the paper feeder ................................................................................. 167 DC controller connectors ................................................................................................................ 183 External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly; identification and location ...................... 223 Pre-troubleshooting checklist ......................................................................................................... 373 Troubleshooting flowchart .............................................................................................................. 375 Manual sensor diagnostic tests ...................................................................................................... 387 Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests .............................................................................................. 408 Component test details .................................................................................................................. 409 Formatter PCA ............................................................................................................................... 411 DC controller connectors ................................................................................................................ 412 Paper feeder driver PCA connectors ............................................................................................. 413 PCAs, motors, fans, switches, solenoids, and clutches ................................................................. 418 Sensors ........................................................................................................................................ 421 Important information on the configuration pages ........................................................................ 440 Control-panel messages .............................................................................................................. 441 MP modes under the Adjust paper types> sub menu .................................................................. 492 MP modes under the Optimize submenu ..................................................................................... 492 Customer self-repair (CSR) components ....................................................................................... 511 Accessories .................................................................................................................................... 512 Print cartridges and toner collection unit ........................................................................................ 513 Memory .......................................................................................................................................... 513 Cables and interfaces .................................................................................................................... 514 Service kit contents ........................................................................................................................ 515 Service manuals and user documentation ..................................................................................... 518 Common fasteners ........................................................................................................................ 519 ADF/scanner assembly .................................................................................................................. 521 External covers, panels, and doors; ............................................................................................ 523 Right door assembly .................................................................................................................... 525 Internal components (1 of 5) ........................................................................................................ 527 Internal components (2 of 5) ........................................................................................................ 529 Internal components (3 of 5) ........................................................................................................ 531 Internal components (4 of 5) ........................................................................................................ 533 Internal components (5 of 5) ........................................................................................................ 535 Fuser ............................................................................................................................................ 537 250-sheet cassette ....................................................................................................................... 539 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly ................................................................................. 541 Registration assembly .................................................................................................................. 543 Paper-delivery assembly .............................................................................................................. 545 PCAs ............................................................................................................................................ 547 Formatter components ................................................................................................................. 549 500-sheet paper feeder ................................................................................................................ 551 Paper feeder main body ............................................................................................................... 553 Alphabetical parts list ................................................................................................................... 554 ENWW Table 8-27 Table B-1 Table B-2 Table B-3 Table B-4 Table B-5 ENWW Numerical parts list ....................................................................................................................... 561 Product dimensions ....................................................................................................................... 578 Product dimensions, with all doors and trays fully opened ............................................................ 578 Power requirements ....................................................................................................................... 578 Power consumption (average, in watts) ........................................................................................ 578 HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series ....................................................................................... 578 xvii xviii ENWW List of figures Figure 4-1 Figure 4-2 Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2 Figure 5-3 Figure 5-4 Figure 5-5 Figure 5-6 Figure 5-7 Figure 5-8 Figure 5-9 Figure 5-10 Figure 5-11 Figure 5-12 Figure 5-13 Figure 5-14 Figure 5-15 Figure 5-16 Figure 5-17 Figure 5-18 Figure 5-19 Figure 5-20 Figure 5-21 Figure 5-22 Figure 5-23 Figure 5-24 Figure 5-25 Figure 5-26 Figure 5-27 Figure 5-28 Figure 5-29 Figure 5-30 Figure 5-31 Figure 5-32 ENWW Slot for the security cable ................................................................................................................ 92 Supply item locations ...................................................................................................................... 94 Relationship between the main product systems ......................................................................... 116 Engine-control system .................................................................................................................. 118 DC controller block diagram .......................................................................................................... 119 High-voltage power supply circuits ............................................................................................... 123 Low-voltage power-supply circuit .................................................................................................. 125 Fuser (fixing) components ............................................................................................................ 127 Fuser temperature-control circuit .................................................................................................. 128 Laser/scanner system ................................................................................................................... 131 Image-formation system ............................................................................................................... 133 Image-formation process ............................................................................................................ 134 Pre-exposure .............................................................................................................................. 135 Primary charging ......................................................................................................................... 135 Laser-beam exposure ................................................................................................................. 136 Development ............................................................................................................................... 136 Primary transfer .......................................................................................................................... 137 Secondary transfer ...................................................................................................................... 137 Separation ................................................................................................................................... 138 Fusing ......................................................................................................................................... 138 ITB cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 139 Drum cleaning ............................................................................................................................. 139 Print-cartridge system ................................................................................................................. 140 Developing-roller engagement and disengagement control ....................................................... 141 ITB unit ........................................................................................................................................ 142 Three states of primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement ................................... 144 ITB cleaning process .................................................................................................................. 145 Toner patterns for calibration ...................................................................................................... 146 Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system ............................................... 148 Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system ................................................ 149 Three main units of the pickup, feed, and delivery system ......................................................... 150 Pickup and feed unit ................................................................................................................... 151 Cassette-pickup mechanism ....................................................................................................... 152 Cassette presence sensor .......................................................................................................... 153 xix Figure 5-33 Figure 5-34 Figure 5-35 Figure 5-36 Figure 5-37 Figure 5-38 Figure 5-39 Figure 5-40 Figure 5-41 Figure 5-42 Figure 5-43 Figure 5-44 Figure 5-45 Figure 5-46 Figure 5-47 Figure 5-48 Figure 5-49 Figure 5-50 Figure 5-51 Figure 5-52 Figure 6-1 Figure 6-2 Figure 6-3 Figure 6-4 Figure 6-5 Figure 6-6 Figure 6-7 Figure 6-8 Figure 6-9 Figure 6-10 Figure 6-11 Figure 6-12 Figure 6-13 Figure 6-14 Figure 6-15 Figure 6-16 Figure 6-17 Figure 6-18 Figure 6-19 Figure 6-20 Figure 6-21 Figure 6-22 Figure 6-23 Figure 6-24 xx Cassette lift mechanism .............................................................................................................. 154 Paper-level-detection mechanism .............................................................................................. 155 Multifeed prevention .................................................................................................................... 155 Multipurpose tray pickup mechanism .......................................................................................... 156 Paper-feed mechanism ............................................................................................................... 157 Skew-feed prevention ................................................................................................................. 158 Fuser and delivery unit ................................................................................................................ 159 Loop-control mechanism ............................................................................................................. 160 Pressure-roller pressurization control ......................................................................................... 161 Duplexing unit ............................................................................................................................. 162 Jam detection sensors ................................................................................................................ 164 Optional paper feeder ................................................................................................................. 166 Signals for the paper feeder ....................................................................................................... 167 Paper-feeder pickup and feed operation .................................................................................... 168 Paper size detection ................................................................................................................... 169 Paper-feeder cassette lift ........................................................................................................... 171 Paper-feeder multiple feed prevention ........................................................................................ 172 Jam detection .............................................................................................................................. 173 ADF path for single-sided documents ......................................................................................... 175 ADF path for two-sided documents ............................................................................................ 176 Phillips and pozidrive screwdriver comparison ............................................................................. 179 DC controller PCA ......................................................................................................................... 183 Parts removal order (1 of 2) .......................................................................................................... 184 Parts removal order (2 of 2) .......................................................................................................... 185 Remove the print cartridge (1 of 2) ............................................................................................... 186 Remove the print cartridge (2 of 2) ............................................................................................... 187 Remove the stapler cartridge ........................................................................................................ 188 Remove the duplex-reverse guide (1 of 2) ................................................................................... 189 Remove the duplex-reverse guide (2 of 2) ................................................................................... 189 Remove the toner-collection unit (1 of 4) .................................................................................... 190 Remove the toner-collection unit (2 of 4) .................................................................................... 190 Remove the toner-collection unit (3 of 4) .................................................................................... 191 Remove the toner-collection unit (4 of 4) .................................................................................... 191 Remove the formatter ................................................................................................................. 192 Remove the memory DIMM (1 of 2) ............................................................................................ 193 Remove the memory DIMM (2 of 2) ............................................................................................ 194 Remove the hard drive and SATA cable (1 of 3) ........................................................................ 195 Remove the hard drive and SATA cable (2 of 3) ........................................................................ 196 Remove the hard drive and SATA cable (3 of 3) ........................................................................ 196 Remove the fax PCA and cable (1 of 2) ..................................................................................... 197 Remove the fax PCA and cable (2 of 2) ..................................................................................... 198 Remove the tray cassette (1 of 2) ............................................................................................... 199 Remove the tray cassette (2 of 2) ............................................................................................... 199 Remove the fuser (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................... 200 ENWW Figure 6-25 Remove the fuser (2 of 2) ........................................................................................................... 200 Figure 6-26 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 2) (1 of 4) .................................................................................. 201 Figure 6-27 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 2) (2 of 4) .................................................................................. 201 Figure 6-28 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 2) (3 of 4) .................................................................................. 202 Figure 6-29 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 2) (4 of 4) .................................................................................. 202 Figure 6-30 Remove the Pickup and feed rollers (Tray 3) (1 of 2) ................................................................. 203 Figure 6-31 Remove the Pickup and feed rollers (Tray 3) (2 of 2) ................................................................. 203 Figure 6-32 Remove the separation roller (Tray 2) ........................................................................................ 204 Figure 6-33 Remove the transfer roller (1 of 3) .............................................................................................. 205 Figure 6-34 Remove the transfer roller (2 of 3) .............................................................................................. 205 Figure 6-35 Remove the transfer roller (3 of 3) .............................................................................................. 206 Figure 6-36 Reinstall the transfer roller .......................................................................................................... 206 Figure 6-37 Remove the transfer roller (2 of 3) .............................................................................................. 207 Figure 6-38 Remove the secondary transfer assembly (1 of 2) ..................................................................... 207 Figure 6-39 Remove the secondary transfer assembly (2 of 2) ..................................................................... 208 Figure 6-40 Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly ................................................................................. 208 Figure 6-41 Remove the intermediate transfer belt (1 of 3) ........................................................................... 209 Figure 6-42 Remove the intermediate transfer belt (2 of 3) ........................................................................... 209 Figure 6-43 Remove the intermediate transfer belt (3 of 3) ........................................................................... 210 Figure 6-44 Remove the front-door assembly (1 of 2) ................................................................................... 211 Figure 6-45 Remove the front-door assembly (2 of 2) ................................................................................... 211 Figure 6-46 Remove the ADF assembly (1 of 4) ............................................................................................ 212 Figure 6-47 Remove the ADF assembly (2 of 4) ............................................................................................ 212 Figure 6-48 Remove the ADF assembly (3 of 4) ............................................................................................ 213 Figure 6-49 Remove the ADF assembly (4 of 4) ............................................................................................ 213 Figure 6-50 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (1 of 5) ................................................... 215 Figure 6-51 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (2 of 5) ................................................... 215 Figure 6-52 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (3 of 5) ................................................... 216 Figure 6-53 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (4 of 5 ) .................................................. 216 Figure 6-54 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (5 of 5) ................................................... 217 Figure 6-55 Reinstall the ADF roller assembly ............................................................................................... 217 Figure 6-56 Remove the control-panel overlay (1 of 2) .................................................................................. 218 Figure 6-57 Remove the control-panel overlay (2 of 2) .................................................................................. 218 Figure 6-58 Remove the control-panel assembly (1 of 3) .............................................................................. 219 Figure 6-59 Remove the control-panel assembly (2 of 3) .............................................................................. 219 Figure 6-60 Remove the control-panel assembly (3 of 3) .............................................................................. 220 Figure 6-61 Remove the right door; optional paper feeder (1 of 3) ................................................................ 221 Figure 6-62 Remove the right door; optional paper feeder (2 of 3) ................................................................ 221 Figure 6-63 Remove the right door; optional paper feeder (3 of 3) ................................................................ 222 Figure 6-64 External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly; identification and location ................... 223 Figure 6-65 Remove the front-upper cover (1 of 4) ........................................................................................ 225 Figure 6-66 Remove the front-upper cover (2 of 4) ........................................................................................ 225 Figure 6-67 Remove the front-upper cover (3 of 4) ........................................................................................ 226 Figure 6-68 Remove the front-upper cover (4 of 4) ........................................................................................ 226 ENWW xxi Figure 6-69 Figure 6-70 Figure 6-71 Figure 6-72 Figure 6-73 Figure 6-74 Figure 6-75 Figure 6-76 Figure 6-77 Figure 6-78 Figure 6-79 Figure 6-80 Figure 6-81 Figure 6-82 Figure 6-83 Figure 6-84 Figure 6-85 Figure 6-86 Figure 6-87 Figure 6-88 Figure 6-89 Figure 6-90 Figure 6-91 Figure 6-92 Figure 6-93 Figure 6-94 Figure 6-95 Figure 6-96 Figure 6-97 Figure 6-98 Figure 6-99 Figure 6-100 Figure 6-101 Figure 6-102 Figure 6-103 Figure 6-104 Figure 6-105 Figure 6-106 Figure 6-107 Figure 6-108 Figure 6-109 Figure 6-110 Figure 6-111 Figure 6-112 xxii Remove the right-door assembly (1 of 8) ................................................................................... 227 Remove the right-door assembly (2 of 8) ................................................................................... 227 Remove the right-door assembly (3 of 8) ................................................................................... 228 Remove the right-door assembly (4 of 8) ................................................................................... 228 Remove the right-door assembly (5 of 8) ................................................................................... 229 Remove the right-door assembly (6 of 8) ................................................................................... 229 Remove the right-door assembly (7 of 8) ................................................................................... 230 Remove the right-door assembly (8 of 8) ................................................................................... 230 Remove the right-rear cover (1 of 3) ........................................................................................... 231 Remove the right-rear cover (2 of 3) ........................................................................................... 231 Remove the right-rear cover (3 of 3) ........................................................................................... 232 Remove the left cover (1 of 5) ..................................................................................................... 233 Remove the left cover (2 of 5) ..................................................................................................... 233 Remove the left cover (3 of 5) ..................................................................................................... 234 Remove the left cover (4 of 5) ..................................................................................................... 234 Remove the left cover (5 of 5) ..................................................................................................... 235 Remove the rear-upper cover (1 of 4) ........................................................................................ 236 Remove the rear-upper cover (2 of 4) ........................................................................................ 236 Remove the rear-upper cover (3 of 4) ........................................................................................ 237 Remove the rear-upper cover (4 of 4) ........................................................................................ 237 Remove the rear cover (1 of 2) ................................................................................................... 238 Remove the rear cover (2 of 2) ................................................................................................... 238 Remove the right-front cover (1 of 5) .......................................................................................... 239 Remove the right-front cover (2 of 5) .......................................................................................... 239 Remove the right-front cover (3 of 5) .......................................................................................... 240 Remove the right-front cover (4 of 5) .......................................................................................... 240 Remove the right-front cover (5 of 5) .......................................................................................... 241 Reinstall the power button .......................................................................................................... 241 Remove the scanner assembly (1 of 6) ...................................................................................... 242 Remove the scanner assembly (2 of 6) ...................................................................................... 242 Remove the scanner assembly (3 of 6) ...................................................................................... 243 Remove the scanner assembly (4 of 6) .................................................................................... 243 Remove the scanner assembly (5 of 6) .................................................................................... 244 Remove the scanner assembly (6 of 6) .................................................................................... 244 Remove the delivery cover (1 of 3) ........................................................................................... 245 Remove the delivery cover (2 of 3) ........................................................................................... 246 Remove the delivery cover (3 of 3) ........................................................................................... 246 Remove the left-upper cover (1 of 2) ........................................................................................ 247 Remove the left-upper cover (2 of 2) ........................................................................................ 248 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (1 of 13) ...................................... 249 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (2 of 13) ...................................... 250 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (3 of 13) ...................................... 250 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (4 of 13) ...................................... 251 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (5 of 13) ...................................... 251 ENWW Figure 6-113 Figure 6-114 Figure 6-115 Figure 6-116 Figure 6-117 Figure 6-118 Figure 6-119 Figure 6-120 Figure 6-121 Figure 6-122 Figure 6-123 Figure 6-124 Figure 6-125 Figure 6-126 Figure 6-127 Figure 6-128 Figure 6-129 Figure 6-130 Figure 6-131 Figure 6-132 Figure 6-133 Figure 6-134 Figure 6-135 Figure 6-136 Figure 6-137 Figure 6-138 Figure 6-139 Figure 6-140 Figure 6-141 Figure 6-142 Figure 6-143 Figure 6-144 Figure 6-145 Figure 6-146 Figure 6-147 Figure 6-148 Figure 6-149 Figure 6-150 Figure 6-151 Figure 6-152 Figure 6-153 Figure 6-154 Figure 6-155 Figure 6-156 ENWW Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (6 of 13) ...................................... 252 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (7 of 13) ...................................... 252 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (8 of 13) ...................................... 253 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (9 of 13) ...................................... 253 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (10 of 13) .................................... 254 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (11 of 13) .................................... 254 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (12 of 13) .................................... 255 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (13 of 13) .................................... 255 Reinstall the right-side stapler cover (1 of 3) ............................................................................ 256 Reinstall the right-side stapler cover (2 of 3) ............................................................................ 256 Reinstall the right-side stapler cover (3 of 3) ............................................................................ 257 Remove the right-top cover (1 of 5) .......................................................................................... 258 Remove the right-top cover (2 of 5) .......................................................................................... 259 Remove the right-top cover (3 of 5) .......................................................................................... 259 Remove the right-top cover (4 of 5) .......................................................................................... 260 Remove the right-top cover (5 of 5) .......................................................................................... 260 Remove the front-top cover (1 of 2) .......................................................................................... 261 Remove the front-top cover (2 of 2) .......................................................................................... 261 Remove the rear-top cover (1 of 2) ........................................................................................... 262 Remove the rear-top cover (2 of 2) ........................................................................................... 263 Remove the stapler assembly (1 of 2) ...................................................................................... 264 Remove the stapler assembly (2 of 2) ...................................................................................... 265 Reinstall the stapler assembly .................................................................................................. 265 Remove the stapler power supply ............................................................................................ 266 Remove the ICB (1 of 3) ........................................................................................................... 267 Remove the ICB (2 of 3) ........................................................................................................... 268 Remove the ICB (3 of 3) ........................................................................................................... 268 Reinstall the ICB ....................................................................................................................... 269 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (1 of 4) ...................................................................... 270 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (2 of 4) ...................................................................... 271 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (3 of 4) ...................................................................... 271 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (4 of 4) ...................................................................... 272 Remove the LVPS (1 of 10) ...................................................................................................... 273 Remove the LVPS (2 of 10) ...................................................................................................... 274 Remove the LVPS (3 of 10) ...................................................................................................... 274 Remove the LVPS (4 of 10) ...................................................................................................... 275 Remove the (5 of 10) ................................................................................................................ 275 Remove the (6 of 10) ................................................................................................................ 276 Remove the LVPS (7 of 10) ...................................................................................................... 276 Remove the LVPS (8 of 10) ...................................................................................................... 277 Remove the LVPS (9 of 10) ...................................................................................................... 277 Remove the LVPS (10 of 10) .................................................................................................... 278 Remove the SCB (1 of 8) .......................................................................................................... 279 Remove the SCB (2 of 8) .......................................................................................................... 280 xxiii Figure 6-157 Figure 6-158 Figure 6-159 Figure 6-160 Figure 6-161 Figure 6-162 Figure 6-163 Figure 6-164 Figure 6-165 Figure 6-166 Figure 6-167 Figure 6-168 Figure 6-169 Figure 6-170 Figure 6-171 Figure 6-172 Figure 6-173 Figure 6-174 Figure 6-175 Figure 6-176 Figure 6-177 Figure 6-178 Figure 6-179 Figure 6-180 Figure 6-181 Figure 6-182 Figure 6-183 Figure 6-184 Figure 6-185 Figure 6-186 Figure 6-187 Figure 6-188 Figure 6-189 Figure 6-190 Figure 6-191 Figure 6-192 Figure 6-193 Figure 6-194 Figure 6-195 Figure 6-196 Figure 6-197 Figure 6-198 Figure 6-199 Figure 6-200 xxiv Remove the SCB (3 of 8) .......................................................................................................... 280 Remove the SCB (4 of 8) .......................................................................................................... 281 Remove the (5 of 8) .................................................................................................................. 281 Remove the SCB (6 of 8) .......................................................................................................... 282 Remove the SCB (7 of 8) .......................................................................................................... 282 Remove the SCB (8 of 8) .......................................................................................................... 283 Reinstalling the SCB ................................................................................................................. 283 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 1) (1 of 2) ................................................................................ 284 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 1) (2 of 2) ................................................................................ 284 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (1 of 9) ............................. 285 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (2 of 9) ............................. 285 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (3 of 9) ............................. 286 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (4 of 9) ............................. 286 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (5 of 9) ............................. 287 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (6 of 9) ............................. 287 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (7 of 9) ............................. 288 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (8 of 9) ............................. 288 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (9 of 9) ............................. 289 Remove the toner-collection sensor (1 of 4) ............................................................................. 290 Remove the toner-collection sensor (2 of 4) ............................................................................. 290 Remove the toner-collection sensor (3 of 4) ............................................................................. 291 Remove the toner-collection sensor (4 of 4) ............................................................................. 291 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (1 of 7) ......................................................................... 292 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (2 of 7) ......................................................................... 293 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (3 of 7) ......................................................................... 293 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (4 of 7) ......................................................................... 294 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (5 of 7) ......................................................................... 294 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (6 of 7) ......................................................................... 295 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (7 of 7) ......................................................................... 295 Reinstall the residual-toner collection door ............................................................................... 296 Remove the RD sensor assembly (1 of 6) ................................................................................ 297 Remove the RD sensor assembly (2 of 6) ................................................................................ 297 Remove the RD sensor assembly (3 of 6) ................................................................................ 298 Remove the RD sensor assembly (4 of 6) ................................................................................ 298 Remove the RD sensor assembly (5 of 6) ................................................................................ 299 Remove the RD sensor assembly (6 of 6) ................................................................................ 299 Remove the power-supply fan (1 of 4) ...................................................................................... 300 Remove the power-supply fan (2 of 4) ...................................................................................... 301 Remove the power-supply fan (3 of 4) ...................................................................................... 301 Remove the power-supply fan (4 of 4) ...................................................................................... 302 Remove the registration assembly (1 of 8) ............................................................................... 303 Remove the registration assembly (2 of 8) ............................................................................... 304 Remove the registration assembly (3 of 8) ............................................................................... 304 Remove the registration assembly (4 of 8) ............................................................................... 305 ENWW Figure 6-201 Figure 6-202 Figure 6-203 Figure 6-204 Figure 6-205 Figure 6-206 Figure 6-207 Figure 6-208 Figure 6-209 Figure 6-210 Figure 6-211 Figure 6-212 Figure 6-213 Figure 6-214 Figure 6-215 Figure 6-216 Figure 6-217 Figure 6-218 Figure 6-219 Figure 6-220 Figure 6-221 Figure 6-222 Figure 6-223 Figure 6-224 Figure 6-225 Figure 6-226 Figure 6-227 Figure 6-228 Figure 6-229 Figure 6-230 Figure 6-231 Figure 6-232 Figure 6-233 Figure 6-234 Figure 6-235 Figure 6-236 Figure 6-237 Figure 6-238 Figure 6-239 Figure 6-240 Figure 6-241 Figure 6-242 Figure 6-243 Figure 6-244 ENWW Remove the registration assembly (5 of 8) ............................................................................... 305 Remove the registration assembly (6 of 8) ............................................................................... 306 Remove the registration assembly (7 of 8) ............................................................................... 306 Remove the registration assembly (8 of 8) ............................................................................... 307 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (1 of 4) .............................................................. 308 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (2 of 4) .............................................................. 309 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (3 of 4) .............................................................. 309 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (4 of 4) .............................................................. 310 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply lower .......................................................................... 310 Remove the developing-disengagement motor (1 of 2) ............................................................ 311 Remove the developing-disengagement motor (2 of 2) ............................................................ 312 Remove the pickup motor ......................................................................................................... 313 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (1 of 2) ................................................................................. 314 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (2 of 2) ................................................................................. 315 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (1 of 10) ............................................................. 316 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (2 of 10) ............................................................. 317 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (3 of 10) ............................................................. 317 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (4 of 10) ............................................................. 318 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (5 of 10) ............................................................. 318 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (6 of 10) ............................................................. 319 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (7 of 10) ............................................................. 319 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (8 of 10) ............................................................. 320 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (9 of 10) ............................................................. 320 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (10 of 10) ........................................................... 321 Reinstall the cassette-pickup drive assembly (1 of 3) ............................................................... 321 Reinstall the cassette-pickup drive assembly (2 of 3) ............................................................... 322 Reinstall the cassette-pickup drive assembly (3 of 3) ............................................................... 322 Remove the cassette-pickup assembly (1 of 3) ........................................................................ 323 Remove the cassette-pickup assembly (2 of 3) ........................................................................ 324 Remove the cassette-pickup assembly (3 of 3) ........................................................................ 324 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (1 of 12) ............................................................... 325 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (2 of 12) ............................................................... 326 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (3 of 12) ............................................................... 326 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (4 of 12) ............................................................... 327 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (5 of 12) ............................................................... 327 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (6 of 12) ............................................................... 328 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (7 of 12) ............................................................... 328 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (8 of 12) ............................................................... 329 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (9 of 12) ............................................................... 329 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (10 of 12) ............................................................. 330 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (11 of 12) ............................................................. 330 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (12 of 12) ............................................................. 331 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (1 of 7) ................................................................ 332 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (2 of 7) ................................................................ 333 xxv Figure 6-245 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (3 of 7) ................................................................ 333 Figure 6-246 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (4 of 7) ................................................................ 334 Figure 6-247 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (5 of 7) ................................................................ 334 Figure 6-248 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (6 of 7) ................................................................ 335 Figure 6-249 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (7 of 7) ................................................................ 335 Figure 6-250 Reinstall the PGC actuators (1 of 5) ......................................................................................... 336 Figure 6-251 Reinstall the PGC actuators (2 of 5) ......................................................................................... 336 Figure 6-252 Reinstall the PGC actuators (3 of 5) ......................................................................................... 337 Figure 6-253 Reinstall the PGC actuators (4 of 5) ......................................................................................... 337 Figure 6-254 Reinstall the PGC actuators (5 of 5) ......................................................................................... 338 Figure 6-255 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (1 of 5) ............................................................. 339 Figure 6-256 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (2 of 5) ............................................................. 340 Figure 6-257 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (3 of 5) ............................................................. 340 Figure 6-258 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (4 of 5) ............................................................. 341 Figure 6-259 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (5 of 5) ............................................................. 341 Figure 6-260 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply upper ......................................................................... 342 Figure 6-261 Remove the drum motor 1 ........................................................................................................ 343 Figure 6-262 Remove the drum motor 2 or drum motor 3 .............................................................................. 344 Figure 6-263 Remove the fuser motor ........................................................................................................... 345 Figure 6-264 Remove the main-drive assembly (1 of 7) ................................................................................ 346 Figure 6-265 Remove the main-drive assembly (2 of 7) ................................................................................ 347 Figure 6-266 Remove the main-drive assembly (3 of 7) ................................................................................ 347 Figure 6-267 Remove the main-drive assembly (4 of 7) ................................................................................ 348 Figure 6-268 Remove the main-drive assembly (5 of 7) ................................................................................ 348 Figure 6-269 Remove the main-drive assembly (6 of 7) ................................................................................ 349 Figure 6-270 Remove the main-drive assembly (7 of 7) ................................................................................ 349 Figure 6-271 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (1 of 11) .............................................................................. 350 Figure 6-272 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (2 of 11) .............................................................................. 350 Figure 6-273 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (3 of 11) .............................................................................. 351 Figure 6-274 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (4 of 11) .............................................................................. 351 Figure 6-275 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (5 of 11) .............................................................................. 352 Figure 6-276 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (6 of 11) .............................................................................. 352 Figure 6-277 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (7 of 11) .............................................................................. 353 Figure 6-278 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (8 of 11) .............................................................................. 353 Figure 6-279 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (9 of 11) .............................................................................. 354 Figure 6-280 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (10 of 11) ............................................................................ 354 Figure 6-281 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (11 of 11) ............................................................................ 355 Figure 6-282 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (1 of 6) ................................................................................ 357 Figure 6-283 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (2 of 6) ................................................................................ 357 Figure 6-284 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (3 of 6) ................................................................................ 358 Figure 6-285 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (4 of 6) ................................................................................ 358 Figure 6-286 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (5 of 6) ................................................................................ 359 Figure 6-287 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (6 of 6) ................................................................................ 359 Figure 6-288 Reinstall the fuser-drive assembly ............................................................................................ 360 xxvi ENWW Figure 6-289 Remove the delivery assembly (1 of 5) .................................................................................... 362 Figure 6-290 Remove the delivery assembly (2 of 5) .................................................................................... 362 Figure 6-291 Remove the delivery assembly (3 of 5) .................................................................................... 363 Figure 6-292 Remove the delivery assembly (4 of 5) .................................................................................... 363 Figure 6-293 Remove the delivery assembly (5 of 5) .................................................................................... 364 Figure 6-294 Reinstall the delivery assembly (1 of 2) .................................................................................... 365 Figure 6-295 Reinstall the delivery assembly (2 of 2) .................................................................................... 365 Figure 6-296 Remove the duplex-drive assembly (1 of 2) ............................................................................. 367 Figure 6-297 Remove the duplex-drive assembly (2 of 2) ............................................................................. 367 Figure 6-298 Remove the drawer connector; optional paper feeder .............................................................. 368 Figure 7-1 Front-door interlock ....................................................................................................................... 384 Figure 7-2 Right-door interlock ....................................................................................................................... 384 Figure 7-3 Engine-test button ......................................................................................................................... 386 Figure 7-4 Test the TOP sensor ..................................................................................................................... 389 Figure 7-5 Test the loop sensors .................................................................................................................... 390 Figure 7-6 Test the fuser delivery sensor (1 of 2) .......................................................................................... 391 Figure 7-7 Test the fuser (fixing) delivery sensor (2 of 2) ............................................................................... 391 Figure 7-8 Test the duplex re-pickup sensor .................................................................................................. 392 Figure 7-9 Test the output-bin-full sensor ...................................................................................................... 393 Figure 7-10 Test the fuser (fixing) pressure-release sensor (1 of 2) .............................................................. 395 Figure 7-11 Test the fuser (fixing) pressure-release sensor (2 of 2) .............................................................. 395 Figure 7-12 Test the primary transfer-roller disengagement sensor (1 of 2) .................................................. 396 Figure 7-13 Test the primary transfer-roller disengagement sensor (2 of 2) .................................................. 397 Figure 7-14 Test the right- and front-door interlock switches (1 of 4) ............................................................ 398 Figure 7-15 Test the right- and front-door interlock switches (2 of 4) ............................................................ 398 Figure 7-16 Test the right- and front-door interlock switches (3 of 4) ............................................................ 399 Figure 7-17 Test the right- and front-door interlock switches (4 of 4) ............................................................ 399 Figure 7-18 Test the Tray 1 media-present sensor ....................................................................................... 400 Figure 7-19 Test the tray 2 paper-out sensor ................................................................................................ 401 Figure 7-20 Test the Tray 2 closed sensor (1 of 2) ........................................................................................ 402 Figure 7-21 Test the Tray 2 closed sensor (2 of 2) ........................................................................................ 402 Figure 7-22 Test the Tray 2 stack-surface sensor .......................................................................................... 403 Figure 7-23 Test the optional Tray 3-empty sensor ....................................................................................... 404 Figure 7-24 Test the optional Tray 3 media-feed sensor .............................................................................. 405 Figure 7-25 Test the optional Tray 3 stack-surface sensor ........................................................................... 406 Figure 7-26 Test the optional Tray 3 media-size sensors .............................................................................. 407 Figure 7-27 Formatter PCA ............................................................................................................................ 411 Figure 7-28 DC controller PCA ....................................................................................................................... 412 Figure 7-29 Paper feeder driver PCA ............................................................................................................ 413 Figure 7-30 Component locations (1 of 5) ...................................................................................................... 414 Figure 7-31 Component locations (2 of 5) ...................................................................................................... 415 Figure 7-32 Component locations (3 of 5) ...................................................................................................... 415 Figure 7-33 Component locations (4 of 5) ...................................................................................................... 416 Figure 7-34 Component locations (5 of 5) ...................................................................................................... 417 ENWW xxvii Figure 7-35 Figure 7-36 Figure 7-37 Figure 7-38 Figure 7-39 Figure 7-40 Figure 7-41 Figure 7-42 Figure 7-43 Figure 7-44 Figure 7-45 Figure 7-46 Figure 7-47 Figure 7-48 Figure 7-49 Figure 7-50 Figure 8-1 Figure 8-2 Figure 8-3 Figure 8-4 Figure 8-5 Figure 8-6 Figure 8-7 Figure 8-8 Figure 8-9 Figure 8-10 Figure 8-11 Figure 8-12 Figure 8-13 Figure 8-14 Figure 8-15 Figure 8-16 Figure 8-17 xxviii 1 x 500 paper feeder ................................................................................................................... 420 Sensors ...................................................................................................................................... 421 General timing chart .................................................................................................................... 423 General circuit diagram (1 of 2) .................................................................................................. 424 General circuit diagram (2 of 2) .................................................................................................. 425 Product circuit block diagram ...................................................................................................... 425 Paper feeder circuit diagram ....................................................................................................... 426 Repetitive defects ruler ............................................................................................................... 428 Print-quality troubleshooting procedure ...................................................................................... 431 Yellow print-quality troubleshooting page ................................................................................... 432 Yellow comparison page ............................................................................................................. 432 Black print-quality troubleshooting page ..................................................................................... 433 Configuration page ..................................................................................................................... 436 HP embedded Jetdirect page ..................................................................................................... 438 Embedded protocol page ........................................................................................................... 439 Jam locations .............................................................................................................................. 473 ADF/scanner assembly ................................................................................................................. 520 External covers, panels, and doors .............................................................................................. 522 Right door assembly ..................................................................................................................... 524 Internal components (1 of 5) ......................................................................................................... 526 Internal components (2 of 5) ......................................................................................................... 528 Internal components (3 of 5) ......................................................................................................... 530 Internal components (4 of 5) ......................................................................................................... 532 Internal components (5 of 5) ......................................................................................................... 534 Fuser ............................................................................................................................................. 536 250-sheet cassette ...................................................................................................................... 538 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly ................................................................................ 540 Registration assembly ................................................................................................................. 542 Paper-delivery assembly ............................................................................................................. 544 PCAs ........................................................................................................................................... 546 Formatter components ................................................................................................................ 548 500-sheet paper feeder .............................................................................................................. 550 Paper feeder main body ............................................................................................................. 552 ENWW 1 ENWW Product basics ● Conventions used in this guide ● Product comparison ● Product features ● Product view 1 Conventions used in this guide TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts. NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task. CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product. WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product. 2 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW Product comparison Table 1-1 Product models Model Features HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP ● 100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1) ● 250-sheet input tray (Tray 2) ● Automatic duplex printing ● Automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to 50 pages, face-up ● 250-sheet, face-down output bin ● Hi-speed USB 2.0 port ● HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network ● 512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM) ● Hard drive ● 100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1) ● 250-sheet input tray (Tray 2) ● Automatic duplex printing ● Automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to 50 pages, face-up ● 250-sheet, face-down output bin ● Hi-speed USB 2.0 port ● HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network ● 512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM) ● Hard drive ● Analog fax ● Convenience stapler that can staple up to 20 sheets of paper HP Color LaserJet CM3530fs MFP ENWW Product comparison 3 Product features Table 1-2 Features Speed and throughput Resolution Memory User interface Languages and fonts Print cartridges Paper-handling 4 Chapter 1 Product basics ● Print up to 31 pages per minute (ppm) on letter-size paper and 30 ppm on A4-size paper. ● Less than 11 seconds to print the first page ● Recommended maximum monthly print volume of 2,000 to 6,000 pages ● A 515 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor ● Duplex at 75% speed from Tray 2 and 50% speed from Tray 1 ● 600 dots per inch (dpi) with Image Resolution Enhancement technology 3600 for optimum overall imaging ● 1200 x 600 dpi for detailed line work and small text ● 512 MB of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to 1 gigabyte (GB) by using 200pin small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128, 256, or 512 MB of RAM. ● Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) automatically compresses data to use RAM more efficiently. ● HP Easy Select full color control panel ● An embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for networkconnected products) ● HP Easy Printer Care software (a Web-based status and troubleshooting tool) ● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through HP Easy Printer Care software and embedded Web server ● HP Printer Control Language (PCL) 6 ● HP PCL 5 ● HP postscript level 3 emulation ● Printer Management Language ● 80 scalable TrueType PS typefaces ● For information regarding print cartridges, see www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies. ● Authentic HP print cartridge detection ● Automatic toner strip remover ● Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels, envelopes and other paper types. The tray holds up to 100 sheets of paper, 50 transparencies, or 10 envelopes. ● Tray 2: 250-sheet tray. This tray automatically detects common paper sizes. Holds standard and custom-size paper. ● Optional Tray 3: 500-sheet paper and heavy media tray. ● Automatic document feeder (ADF): Holds up to 50 sheets of paper. ● Duplex printing: Provides automatic two-sided printing (printing on both sides of the paper). ENWW Table 1-2 Features (continued) ● ADF duplex scanning: The ADF has an automatic duplexer for scanning two-sided documents. ● Standard output bin: The standard output bin is located beneath the scanner. This bin can hold up to 250 sheets of paper. The product has a sensor that indicates when the bin is full. For information about supported paper sizes, see Supported paper and print media on page 56. For information about supported paper types, see Supported paper and print media types on page 58. Supported operating systems NOTE: IPv4 and IPsec on IPv4 available on all listed Windows operating systems IPv6 and IPsec on IPv6 only supported on Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008. Connectivity Environmental features ENWW ● Windows 2000® ● Windows XP® Home ● Windows XP® Professional ● Windows XP® Professional x64 ● Windows Server 2003® (32/64 bit) ● Windows Vista™ (compatible) ● Windows Vista™ Premium ● Windows Server 2008® (32/64 bit) ● Macintosh OS X V10.3 and later ● Novell 5.1 and later ● Red Hat Linux 7.x and later ● SuSE Linux 8.x and later ● HP-UX 10.20, 11.x, and 11.i ● Solaris 2.5 and later (SPARC systems only) ● IBM AIX 3.2.5 and later (requires software from the NOS vendor) ● MPE-iX ● Citrix MetaFrame Server ● Windows Terminal Services ● Local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45) for the embedded HP Jetdirect print server ● One enhanced input/output (EIO) slot ● USB 2.0 connection ● Host USB port for third-party solutions ● A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) connection (AUX) for connecting other devices ● Optional analog fax card (included with the HP Color LaserJet CM3530fs MFP) ● Optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) ● Sleep setting saves energy. ● High content of recyclable components and materials. ● Instant-on technology Product features 5 Table 1-2 Features (continued) Security features Copying and sending 6 Chapter 1 Product basics ● Energy Star® compliance (except in EMEA) ● Blue Angel certification (EMEA) ● Cartridge and toner collection unit recycling with HP Planet Partners ● Automatic color sensing ● Secure Disk Erase ● Security lock (optional) ● Job storage ● User PIN authentication for stored jobs ● Digital Send Software (DSS) authentication ● IPsec security ● Support for HP High Performance hard disks ● Automatic color sensing for copies ● Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats ● Job-interrupt feature ● Multiple pages per sheet ● Control panel animations (for example, jam recovery) ● Scan and send to e-mail ◦ Local address book for e-mail and fax ◦ LDAP addressing ● Send to folder ● Automatic duplex (two-sided) scanning ENWW Product view Product front view 1 2 3 15 4 14 5 13 6 7 12 8 9 11 10 ENWW 1 Color control panel 2 Document-feeder top-cover (lift open to clear jams) 3 Automatic document-feeder (ADF) 4 Document-feeder output bin 5 Scanner 6 Convenience stapler (only for the HP Color LaserJet CM3530fs MFP) 7 Right-side door (access for clearing jams) 8 Tray 1 (pull the handle to open the tray) 9 Lower-right door (access for clearing jams) 10 On/off button 11 Optional Tray 3 12 Tray 2 13 Front door (access to print cartridges and toner collection unit) 14 Standard output bin 15 Hardware integration port Product view 7 Product back view 2 1 3 4 8 1 Connector for the ADF 2 Interface ports 3 Power connection 4 Slot for a cable-type security lock Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW Interface ports 1 2 3 4 8 5 7 ENWW 6 1 EIO interface expansion slot 2 Host USB port (for third-party solutions) 3 Formatter connectivity LED (lit when the formatter is properly seated) 4 Heartbeat LED (blinks when the formatter is working correctly) 5 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port 6 RJ-45 network port (includes HP Jetdirect LEDs) 7 Foreign-interface harness (for connecting third-party solutions) 8 Fax connection (only for the HP Color LaserJet CM3530fs MFP) Product view 9 Serial number and model number location 10 Model name Model number HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP CC519A HP Color LaserJet CM3530fs MFP CC520A Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW 2 ENWW Control panel ● Use the control panel ● Navigate the Administration menu ● Information menu ● Default Job Options menu ● Time/Scheduling menu ● Management menu ● Initial Setup menu ● Device Behavior menu ● Print Quality menu ● Troubleshooting menu ● Resets menu ● Service menu 11 Use the control panel The control panel has a VGA touchscreen that provides access to all product functions. Use the buttons and numeric keypad to control jobs and the product status. The LEDs indicate overall product status. Control-panel layout The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric keypad, and three light-emitting diode (LED) status lights. 1 3 2 4 5 6 hp 7 8 13 12 12 11 9 10 1 Hardware integration port Area for adding third-party security devices 2 Touchscreen graphical display Use the touchscreen to open and set up all product functions. 3 Brightness-adjustment button Use this button to increase or decrease the brightness of the touchscreen display. 4 Numeric keypad Use this area to specify the number of copies and other numeric values. 5 Sleep button If the product is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically enters a sleep mode. To place the product into sleep mode or to reactivate the product, press the Sleep button. 6 Reset button Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values. 7 Stop button Stops the active job and opens the Job Status screen. 8 Start button Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, starts a fax job, or continues a job that has been interrupted. 9 # button Use this button to indicate a required pause for a fax number. 10 Attention light The Attention light indicates that the product has a condition that requires intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message on the touchscreen. 11 Data light The Data light indicates that the product is receiving data. Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW ENWW 12 Ready light The Ready light indicates that the product is ready to begin processing any job. 13 Clear button Return values to their defaults. Use the control panel 13 Home screen The home screen provides access to the product features, and it indicates the current status of the product. NOTE: Depending on how the product has been configured, the features that appear on the home screen can vary. 2 3 4 5 HP LaserJet 6 1 DDMMYYYY 00.00 AM 9 1 14 Features 8 7 Depending on how the product is configured, the features that appear in this area can include any of the following items: ● Copy ● Fax ● E-mail ● Secondary E-Mail ● Job Status ● Network Folder ● Job Storage ● Workflow ● Supplies Status ● Administration 2 Product status line The status line provides information about the overall product status. Various buttons appear in this area, depending on the current status. For a description of each button that can appear in the status line, see Buttons on the touchscreen on page 15. 3 Copy type Shows whether copies are color. 4 Copy count The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the product is set to make. 5 Help button Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system. 6 Scroll bar Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features. 7 Sign Out Touch Sign Out to sign out of the product if you have signed in for access to restricted features. After you sign out, the product restores all options to the default settings. 8 Network Address Touch Network Address to find information about the network connection. 9 Date and time The current date and time appear here. You can select the format that the product uses to show the date and time, for example 12-hour format or 24-hour format. Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Buttons on the touchscreen The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the product status. Various buttons can appear in this area. The following table describes each button. Home button. Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen. Start button. Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using. NOTE: The name of this button changes for each feature. For example, in the Copy feature, the button is named Start Copy. Stop button. If the product is processing a print or fax job, the Stop button appears instead of the Start button. Touch the Stop button to halt the current job. The product prompts you to cancel the job or to resume it. Error button. The error button appears whenever the product has an error that requires attention before it can continue. Touch the error button to see a message that describes the error. The message also has instructions for solving the problem. Warning button. The warning button appears when the product has a problem but can continue functioning. Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem. The message also has instructions for solving the problem. Help button. Touch the help button to open the built-in online Help system. For more information, see Control-panel help system on page 15. Control-panel help system The product has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen. For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You can browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu. For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the options for that screen. or warning button to open a message If the product alerts you of an error or warning, touch the error that describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem. ENWW Use the control panel 15 Navigate the Administration menu From the Home screen, touch Administration to open the menu structure. You might need to scroll to the bottom of the Home screen to see this feature. The Administration menu has several sub-menus, which are listed on the left side of the screen. Touch the name of a menu to expand the structure. A plus sign (+) next to a menu name means that it contains sub-menus. Continue opening the structure until you reach the option that you want to configure. To return to the previous level, touch Back. To exit the Administration menu, touch the Home button in the upper-left corner of the screen. The product has built-in Help that explains each of the features that are available through the menus. Help is available for many menus on the right-hand side of the touchscreen. Or, to open the global Help system, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen. The tables in the sections that follow indicate the overall structure of each menu under the Administration menu. 16 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Information menu Administration > Information Use this menu to print information pages and reports that are stored internally on the product. Table 2-1 Information menu Menu item Sub-menu item Configuration/Status Pages Fax Reports Values Description Administration Menu Map Print Shows the basic structure of the Administration menu and current administration settings. Configuration Page Print A set of configuration pages that show the current product settings. Supplies Status Page Print Shows the status of supplies such as cartridges, maintenance kits, and staples. Usage Page Print Shows information about the number of pages that have been printed on each paper type and size. Color Usage Job Log Print A directory page that contains job-by-job color usage information. Page content includes the user name, application name, and number of black-only pages and color pages. File Directory Print A directory page that contains information for any mass-storage devices, such as flash drives, memory cards, or hard disks, that are installed in this product. Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this product. Print A detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent or received. Fax Call Report Sub-menu item Fax Call Report Thumbnail on Report Yes Choose whether or not to include a thumbnail of the first page of the fax on the call report. No (default) When to Print Report Never auto print Print after any fax job Print after fax send jobs Print after any fax error (default) Print after send errors only Print after receive errors only ENWW Billing Codes Report Print A list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing faxes. This report shows how many sent faxes were billed to each code. Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to this product. Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this product. Information menu 17 Table 2-1 Information menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sample Pages/Fonts 18 Values Description Demonstration Page Print Printout of a page highlighting the print capabilities of the product. RGB Samples Print Printout of color samples for different RGB values. The samples act as a guide for color matching. CMYK Samples Print Printout of color samples for different CMYK values. The samples act as a guide for color matching. PCL Font List Print A list of printer control language (PCL) fonts that are currently available on the product. PS Font List Print A list of PostScript (PS) fonts that are currently available on the product. Chapter 2 Control panel Sub-menu item ENWW Default Job Options menu Administration > Default Job Options Use this menu to define the default job options for each function. These are used if the user does not specify other options when creating the job. Default Options for Originals Administration > Default Job Options > Default Options For Originals Table 2-2 Default Options For Originals menu Menu item Values Description Paper Size Select a paper size from the list. Select the paper size that is most often used for copy or scan originals. Number of Sides 1 Select whether copy or scan originals are most often single-sided or double-sided. 2 Orientation Portrait Landscape Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust Text Printed Picture Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select Landscape if the long edge is at the top. Optimize the output for a particular type of original: text, pictures, or a mixture of both. If you select Manually Adjust, specify the mix of text and pictures that is used most often. Photograph ENWW Default Job Options menu 19 Image adjustment Administration > Default Job Options > Image Adjustment Table 2-3 Image Adjustment menu Menu item Values Description Darkness Select a value. Select the level of density (darkness) for the output. Background Cleanup Adjust the value within the range. Increase the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color. Sharpness Adjust the value within the range. Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image. 20 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Default Copy Options Administration > Default Job Options > Default Copy Options Table 2-4 Default Copy Options menu Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Number of Copies Type the number of copies. The factory default setting is 1. Set the default number of copies for a copy job. Number of Sides 1 Set the default number of sides for copies. 2 Color/Black Auto Detect Choose whether the default copy mode is color, black, or automatically detected, based on the original. Color Black (default) Collate Edge-To-Edge Off Set up the option for collating sets of copies. On (default) If On is selected, the product prints a complete copy of the print job before starting on the next copy. Otherwise, the product prints the first page of all copies before printing the second page, and so on. Normal (recommended) (default) If the original document is printed close to the edges, use the Edge-To-Edge feature to avoid shadows along the edges. Combine this feature with the Reduce/ Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page appears on the copies. Edge-To-Edge Output Auto Include Margins Off (default) This feature automatically reduces the image size during scanning so the margins are included. On ENWW Default Job Options menu 21 Default Fax Options Administration > Default Job Options > Default Fax Options NOTE: This menu is available only for the HP Color LaserJet CM3530fs MFP. Table 2-5 Fax Send menu Menu item Sub-menu item Resolution Values Description Standard (100x200dpi) (default) Set the resolution for sent documents. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file size is smaller. Fine (200x200dpi) Superfine (300x300dpi) Fax Header Prepend (default) Select the position of the fax header on the page. Overlay Select Prepend to print the fax header above the fax content and move the fax content down on the page. Select Overlay to print the fax header over the top of the fax contents without moving the contents down. Using this option could prevent a single-page fax from flowing onto another page. Table 2-6 Fax Receive menu Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Fax Forwarding Fax Forwarding Off (default) To forward received faxes to another fax device, select Fax Forwarding and Custom. Then type the number of the other fax device into the Fax Forwarding Number field. When you select the Fax Forwarding menu item for the first time, you are prompted to set up a PIN. Type that PIN every time you use this menu. This PIN is also used to access the Fax Printing menu. Custom Stamp Received Faxes Change PIN Use this option to change the PIN for the Fax Forwarding menu. Enabled Add the date, time, senders phone number, and page number to each page of the faxes that this product receives. Disabled (default) Fit to Page Enabled (default) Disabled Fax Paper Tray 22 Select from the list of trays. The default setting is Automatic. Chapter 2 Control panel Shrink faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4-size so that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. If it this feature set to Disabled, faxes larger than Letter or A4 will flow across multiple pages. Select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to use for incoming faxes. ENWW Default E-mail Options Administration > Default Job Options > Default E-mail Options Menu item Values Description Document File Type PDF (default) Select the file format for the e-mail. JPEG TIFF M-TIFF Output Quality High (large file) Selecting higher quality for output increases the size of the output file. Medium (default) Low (small file) Resolution 300 DPI Select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller files. 200 DPI 150 DPI (default) 75 DPI Color/Black Color scan (default) Specify whether the e-mail will be in black or in color. Black/white scan TIFF Version TIFF 6.0 (default) Specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files. TIFF (Post 6.0) ENWW Default Job Options menu 23 Default Send to Folder Options Administration > Default Job Options > Default Send To Folder Options Menu item Values Description Color/Black Color scan Specify whether the file will be in black or in color. Black/white scan (default) Document File Type PDF (default) Select the file format for the file. M-TIFF TIFF JPEG TIFF Version TIFF 6.0 (default) Specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files. TIFF (Post 6.0) Output Quality High (large file) Selecting higher quality for output increases the size of the output file. Medium (default) Low (small file) Resolution 75 DPI Select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller files. 150 DPI (default) 200 DPI 300 DPI 400 DPI 600 DPI 24 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Default Print Options Administration > Default Job Options > Default Print Options Table 2-7 Default Print Options menu Menu item Values Description Copies Per Job Type a value. Set the default number of copies for print jobs. Default Paper Size (List of supported sizes) Select a paper size. Millimeters Configure the default paper size that is used when the user selects Custom as the paper size for a print job. Default Custom Paper Size Sub-menu item Unit of measure Inches Print Sides X Dimension Configure the width measurement for the Default Custom Paper Size. Y Dimension Configure the height measurement for the Default Custom Paper Size. 1-sided Select whether print jobs are single-sided or doublesided by default. 2-sided 2-Sided Format Long Edge (Default) Use this feature to configure the default style for 2sided print jobs. Short Edge If Long Edge is selected and the job has a portrait orientation, the job will result in a book style. If the job is landscape, a calendar style (flipping up the pages) will result. If Short Edge is selected and the job has a portrait orientation, the job will result in a calendar style. If the job is landscape, a booklet style will result. ENWW Default Job Options menu 25 Time/Scheduling menu Administration > Time/Scheduling Use this menu to set options for setting the time and for setting the product to enter and exit sleep mode. NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default. Table 2-8 Time/Scheduling menu Menu item Sub-menu item Date/Time Date Format Sub-menu item Values Description YYYY/MMM/DD (default) Use this feature to set the current date and time, and to set the date format and time format that are used to time-stamp outgoing faxes. MMM/DD/YYYY DD/MMM/YYYY Date Month Day Year Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) (default) 24 hour Time Hour Minute AM PM Time Zone Select a time zone from the list. Adjust for Daylight Savings Select the time zone where the product is located. Enabled Disabled Sleep Delay 1 Minute 15 Minutes Use this feature to select the time interval that the product should remain inactive before entering Sleep Mode. 20 minutes 30 minutes (default) 45 minutes 1 hour (60 minutes) 90 minutes 2 hours 4 Hours Wake Time 26 Monday Off (default) Tuesday Custom Chapter 2 Control panel Select Custom to set a wake time for each day of the week. The product exits sleep mode according to this schedule. Using a sleep schedule helps conserve energy and ENWW Table 2-8 Time/Scheduling menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Wednesday Description prepares the product for use so that users do not have to wait for it to warm up. Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Sleep Time Monday Off (default) Tuesday Custom Wednesday Thursday Friday Use this feature to set a sleep time for each day of the week for periods when the product will not likely be in use (for example, at a certain time each evening). Setting a sleep time makes the product automatically go into a low-power mode. Select a day and then select Custom to set up a custom sleep time schedule. Saturday Sunday Fax Printing Fax Printing Mode Store all received faxes If you have concerns about the security of private faxes, use this feature to store faxes rather than having them automatically print by creating a printing schedule. When you select this menu item for the first time, you are prompted to set up a PIN. Type that PIN every time you use this menu. Print all received faxes (default) Select Print all received faxes to print all incoming received faxes at the time they are received. Use Fax Printing Schedule Change PIN ENWW Create Fax Printing Schedule Select Use Fax Printing Schedule to get to the Create Fax Printing Schedule menu options that allow you to set up a schedule for printing received faxes. Select Change PIN to change the PIN number that users must provide to print faxes. Time/Scheduling menu 27 Management menu Administration > Management Use this menu to set up global product-management options. NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default. Table 2-9 Management menu Menu item Sub-menu item Network Address Button Display Values Description Use this feature to display the Network Address button on the Home screen. Hide (default) Stored Job Management Quick Copy Job Storage Limit Select the maximum number of jobs to store Quick Copy Job Held Timeout Off (default) Use this menu to view and manage any jobs that are stored on the product. 1 Hour 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week Stored Jobs List Order Alphabetical Chronological Sleep mode Disable Use this feature to customize the sleep mode settings for this product. Use Sleep Delay (default) Select Use Sleep Delay to set the product to enter sleep mode after the delay that is specified in the Time/ Scheduling menu. Manage Supplies Replace Supplies Sets the product behavior for when a supply item is low. The product displays an "Order supplies" message when a supply item is running low and a "Replace supplies" message when a supply item has reached its estimated end of life. To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing a supply item when the "Replace supplies" message is displayed. The supply does not have to be replaced at this point unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. Printing beyond this point is possible using Override at out 1 or Override at out 2. The Override options allow the product to continue using a supply item that has reached its estimated end of life. 28 Chapter 2 Control panel Stop at low Choose Stop at low to stop printing when a supply reaches a low condition. Stop at out (default) Choose Stop at out to stop printing when the estimated end of life has been reached for a supply. Printing beyond this point is possible using Override at out 1 or Override at out 2. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. ENWW Table 2-9 Management menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Override at out 1 Choose Override at out 1 to allow the product to continue printing when supply items, other than the toner collection unit, have reached the end of their estimated life. Using this option will eventually result in unacceptable print quality. Consider having a replacement cartridge available for when the print quality becomes unacceptable. Override at out 2 Choose Override at out 2 to allow the product to continue printing when any color supply is past the end of its estimated capacity, including the toner collection unit. This option is not recommended because of the risk of overfilling the toner collection unit, which could result in the need to service the product. Information about the remaining toner is not available when printing in Override mode. Once an HP supply has reached the end of its estimated life, HP's Premium Protection Warranty on that supply has ended. For Warranty information, see Print cartridge limited warranty statement on page 571. The Override options can be enabled or disabled at any time, and they do not have to be re-enabled for each supply item. The product automatically continues printing when a supply item reaches the end of its estimated life. The message “Replace supply Override in use” displays on the control panel while a supply is used in Override mode. When the supply item is replaced with a new supply, Override is de-activated until another supply item reaches the end of its estimated life. Page Limit Range of 0 to 100000 Supply Low/Order Threshold Select a value in the range. The default is 5%. Use this menu to carry out administrative supply management tasks such as changing the threshold when supplies should be ordered. Color Supply Out Stop (default) This menu sets the product behavior when a color supply has reached its estimated end of life. When Auto-continue black is selected, the product will continue printing using black toner only. Auto-continue black Restrict Color Use This menu displays if you select Yes, Use Override for either override option. Select the number of pages the product continues to print while in override mode. The default is 1500. Color printing access Enable Color (default) Color If Allowed Disable Color Color copying access Enable Color (default) This item allows the administrator to disable or restrict color printing. To use the Color If Allowed setting, set up user permissions and/or application permissions in the embedded Web server, HP Easy Printer Care software, or Web Jetadmin. This item allows the administrator to disable or restrict color copying. Disable Color Color/Black Mix Auto (default) Mostly color pages This item controls how the engine switches from color mode to monochrome mode for maximum performance and print cartridge life. Mostly black pages ENWW Management menu 29 Table 2-9 Management menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Select Auto to reset the product to the factory default setting. Select Mostly color pages if nearly all your print jobs are color with high page coverage. Select Mostly black pages if you print mostly monochrome jobs or a combination of color and monochrome jobs. 30 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Initial Setup menu Administration > Initial Setup NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default. Networking and I/O Administration > Initial Setup > Networking and I/O Table 2-10 Networking and I/O Menu item Sub-menu item I/O Timeout Parallel Input NOTE: This item appears only if an EIO accessory is installed. High Speed Values Description Select a value in the range. The factory default setting is 15 seconds. I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job fails. If the stream of data that the product receives for a print job gets interrupted, this setting indicates how long the product will wait before it reports that the job has failed. No Use the High Speed setting to configure the speed that the parallel port uses to communicate with the host. Yes (default) Advanced Functions Enabled (default) Use the Advanced Functions setting to enable or disable bidirectional parallel communication. Disabled Embedded Jetdirect See Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus on page 31 for the list of options. EIOJetdirect Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus Menu item Sub-menu item TCP/IP Enable Sub-menu item Values and Description Off: Disable the TCP/IP protocol. On (default): Enable the TCP/IP protocol. Host Name IPV4 Settings An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to identify the product. This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address. Config Method Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server. Bootp: Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic configuration from a BootP server. DHCP: Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4 server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, DHCP Release and DHCP Renew menus are available to set DHCP lease options. Auto IP: Use automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned automatically. ENWW Initial Setup menu 31 Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values and Description Manual: Use the Manual Settings menu to configure TCP/IPv4 parameters. Default IP Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or DHCP). Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set. Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect products. DHCP Release This menu appears if Config Method was set to DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists. No (default): The current DHCP lease is saved. Yes: The current DHCP lease and the leased IP address are released. DHCP Renew This menu appears if Config Method was set to DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists. No (default): The print server does not request to renew the DHCP lease. Yes: The print server requests to renew the current DHCP lease. Manual Settings (Available only if Config Method is set to Manual) Configure parameters directly from the printer control panel: IP Address: The unique IP address of the printer (n.n.n.n), where n is a value from 0 to 255. Subnet Mask: The subnet mask for the printer (m.m.m.m), where m is a value from 0 to 255. Syslog Server: The IP address of the syslog server used to receive and log syslog messages. Default Gateway: The IP address of the gateway or router used for communications with other networks. Idle Timeout: The time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout). IPV6 Settings Primary DNS Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary DNS Server. Secondary DNS Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary Domain Name System (DNS) Server. Enable Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server. Off: IPv6 is disabled. On (default): IPv6 is enabled. 32 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values and Description Address Manual Settings: Use this item to manually set IPv6 addresses on the print server. Enable: Select this item and choose On to enable manual configuration, or Off to disable manual configuration. Address: Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal syntax. DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified: The stateful auto-configuration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHCPv6 server. Router Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server. Always: Whether or not a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server. Proxy Server Primary DNS Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary DNS server that the print server should use. Secondary DNS Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a secondary DNS server that the print server should use. Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the product. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security, for those clients. To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to 255 octets. For some networks, you may need to contact your Independent Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address. IPX/SPX Proxy Port Type the port number used by the proxy server for client support. The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535. Idle Timeout This is the time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed. The default is 270 seconds. To disable the timeout, specify 0. Enable Off: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol. On (default): Enable the IPX/SPX protocol. Frame Type Selects the frame-type setting for your network. Auto: Automatically sets and limits the frame type to the first one detected. EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP: Frametype selections for Ethernet networks. ENWW Initial Setup menu 33 Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item AppleTalk Enable Sub-menu item Values and Description Off: Disable the AppleTalk protocol. On (default): Enable the AppleTalk protocol. DLC/LLC Enable Off: Disable the DLC/LLC protocol. On (default): Enable the DLC/LLC protocol. Security Print Sec Page Yes (default): Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server. No: A security settings page is not printed. Secure Web For configuration management, specify whether the embedded Web server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS. HTTPS Required (default): For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The print server will appear as a secure site. HTTPS Optional: Access using either HTTP or HTTPS is permitted. IPSec Specify the IPSec status on the print server. Keep: IPSec status remains the same as currently configured. Disable: IPSec operation on the print server is disabled. Reset Security Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults. No: The current security settings are maintained. Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults. Diagnostics Embedded Tests This menu provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems. Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product. Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server. After you select and enable a test and set the execution time, you must select Execute to initiate the test. Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs continuously until either the product is turned off, or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed. LAN HW Test CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase your TCP/IP configuration. This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware. There are no external transmissions on your network. Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it. 34 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values and Description HTTP Test This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the product, and tests the embedded Web server. Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it. SNMP Test This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the product. Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it. Data Path Test This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation product. It sends a predefined PS file to the product, However, the test is paperless; the file will not print. Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it. Select All Tests Use this item to select all available embedded tests. Select Yes to choose all tests. Select No to select individual tests. Execution Time [H] Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that an embedded test will be run. You can select a value from 1 to 60 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or the product is turned off. Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path tests is printed after the tests have completed. Execute No: Do not initiate the selected tests. Yes: Initiate the selected tests. Ping Test ENWW This test is used to check network communications. This test sends link-level packets to a remote network host, then waits for an appropriate response. To run a ping test, set the following items: Dest Type Specify whether the target product is an IPv4 or IPv6 node. Dest IPv4 Type the IPv4 address. Dest IPv6 Type the IPv6 address. Packet Size Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the maximum is 2048. Timeout Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host. The default is 1 and the maximum is 100. Count Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test. Select a value from 1 to 100. To configure the test to run continuously, select 0. Print Results If the ping test was not set for continuous operation, you can choose to print the test results. Select Yes to print results. If you select No (default), results are not printed. Initial Setup menu 35 Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values and Description Execute Specify whether to initiate the ping test. Select Yes to initiate the test, or No to not run the test. Ping Results Link Speed Use this item to view the ping test status and results using the control panel display. You can select the following items: Packets Sent Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. Packets Received Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. Percent Lost Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. RTT Min Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. RTT Max Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. RTT Average Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. Ping In Progress Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes indicates a test in progress, and No indicates that a test completed or was not run. Refresh When viewing the ping test results, this item updates the ping test data with current results. Select Yes to update the data, or No to maintain the existing data. However, a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu. The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the product and installed print server. Select one of the following link configuration settings: CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network communications with the print server and network product might be lost. Auto (default): The print server uses auto-negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails, either 100TX Half or 10T Half is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A 1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.) 10T Half: 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation. 10T Full: 10 Mbps, Full-duplex operation. 100TX Half: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation. 100TX Full: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation. 36 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values and Description 100TX Auto: Limits auto-negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps. 1000TX Full: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation. Print Protocols ENWW Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration of the following protocols: IPX/SPX, Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC. Initial Setup menu 37 Fax Setup Administration > Initial Setup > Fax Setup NOTE: This menu is available only for the HP Color LaserJet CM3530fs MFP. Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Fax Setup Wizard Required Settings Description Use this wizard to set up options for sending faxes if the analog fax accessory is installed. Country/Region (Countries/regions listed) Configure the settings that are legally required for outgoing faxes. Disabled Use this feature to enable or disable PC Fax Send. PC Fax Send enables users to send faxes through the product from their computers if they have the Send Fax driver installed on their PC. Date/Time Fax Header Information Telephone Number Company Name PC Fax Send Enabled (default) 38 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Fax Send Settings Fax Dial Volume Sub-menu item Values Description Off Use this feature to set the volume of the tones that you hear while the product dials the fax number. Low (default) High Error Correction Mode Enabled (default) Disabled JBIG Compression Enabled (default) Disabled When Error Correction Mode is enabled and an error occurs during fax transmission, the product sends or receives the error portion again. JBIG compression reduces fax-transmission time, which can result in lower phone charges. However, using JBIG compression sometimes causes compatibility problems with older fax machines. If this occurs, turn off JBIG compression. Maximum Baud Rate Select a value from the list. The default is 33.6K. Use this feature to set the maximum baud rate for receiving faxes. This can be used as a diagnostic tool for troubleshooting fax problems. TCF T.30 Delay Timer Default (default) This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP technical support agent. Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide. Custom TCF Extend Default (default) Custom Dialing Mode Tone (default) This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP technical support agent. Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide. Select whether the product should use tone or pulse dialing. Pulse Redial On Busy The range is between Type the number of times the product should 0 and 9. The factory attempt to redial if the line is busy. default is 3 times. Redial On No Answer Never (default) Once Twice ENWW Use this feature to specify the number of times the product should attempt to dial if the recipient fax number does not answer. NOTE: Twice is available in locations other than the United States and Canada. Initial Setup menu 39 Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Redial Interval The range is between 1 and 5 minutes. The factory default is 5 minutes. Use this feature to specify the number of minutes between dialing attempts if the recipient number is busy or not answering. Detect Dial Tone Enabled Use this feature to specify whether the product should check for a dial tone before sending a fax. Disabled (default) Dialing Prefix Off (default) Custom Billing Codes Off (default) Custom Use this feature to specify a prefix number that must be dialed when sending faxes from the product. When billing codes are enabled, a prompt appears that asks the user to enter the billing code for an outgoing fax. The range is between 1 and 16 digits. The default is 1 digit. Fax Receive Settings Rings To Answer The range varies by location. The factory default is 2 rings. Use this feature to specify the number of rings that must occur before the fax modem answers. Ring Interval Default (default) This setting is used to adjust for some PBX ring signals. Change this setting only when directed by an HP technical support agent. Custom Ring Frequency Default (default) Ringer Volume Custom This setting should be left at the default value and only changed when directed by an HP technical support agent. Adjustment procedures associated with this setting are beyond the scope of this guide. Off Set the volume for the fax ring-tone. Low (default) High Blocked Fax Numbers Add Blocked Numbers Type the fax number to add. Remove Blocked Numbers Select a fax number to remove. Clear All Blocked Numbers No (default) Use this feature to add or delete numbers from the blocked fax list. The blocked fax list can contain up to 30 numbers. When the product receives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. It also logs the blocked fax in the activity log along with job-accounting information. Yes 40 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW E-mail Setup Administration > Initial Setup > E-mail Setup Use this menu to enable the e-mail feature and to configure basic e-mail settings. NOTE: To configure advanced e-mail settings, use the embedded Web server. For more information, see Embedded Web server on page 85. Table 2-13 E-mail Setup menu Menu item Values E-mail Setup Wizard Address Validation Description Use this wizard to set up basic options for the e-mail feature. On (default) Off This option enables the product to check e-mail syntax when you type an e-mail address. Valid e-mail addresses require the "@" sign and a ".". Find Send Gateways Find Search the network for SMTP gateways that the product can use to send e-mail. SMTP Gateway Enter a value. Specify the IP address of the SMTP gateway that is used to send email from the product. Test Send Gateway Test Test the configured SMTP gateway to see if it is functional. Send Setup menu Administration > Initial Setup > Send Setup Table 2-14 Send Setup menu Menu item Values Description Replicate MFP Enter a value (IP Address). Copy the local Send settings from one product to another. Allow Transfer to New DSS Off Use this feature to allow the transfer of the product from one HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server to another. On (default) HP DSS is a software package that handles digital sending tasks such as faxing, e-mail, and sending a scanned document to a network folder. Allow Use of Digital Send Service Off This feature allows you to configure the product for use with an HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server. On (default) Fax Number Confirmation Disable (default) When fax number confirmation is enabled, you are prompted to enter the fax number twice to verify that it has been typed correctly. Enable Fax Number Speed Dial Matching Disable (default) Enable ENWW If set to Enable, a screen is displayed if the fax numbers entered match a speed dial that is configured to that number. The numbers do not have to match as a group; the number must match individually. That is, if one of the fax numbers matches speed dial 2 and speed dial 6, then the screen is displayed for that fax number. When you touch Yes on the dialog, then the fax is sent or the fax number is added to the distribution list. Initial Setup menu 41 Device Behavior menu Administration > Device Behavior Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Language Select the language from the list. Select a different language for control-panel messages. When you select a new language, the keyboard layout might also change. Keyboard Layout Select the keyboard layout from the list Select a keyboard layout regardless of the Language setting. Select Default if you want the keyboard layout to change when the Language setting changes. This is the default setting. Keyboard Layout Button Display Hide Key Press Sound On (default) Off Inactivity Timeout Warning/Error Behavior Clearable Warnings When displayed, you can use this option to select an alternate keyboard layout. The keyboard returns to the default layout after the product returns to the Ready state or if you press the Reset button. Use this feature to specify whether you hear a sound when you touch the screen or press buttons on the control panel. Type a value between 10 and 300 seconds. The factory default is 60 seconds. Specify the amount of time that elapses between any activity on the control panel and the product resetting to the default settings. On Set the amount of time that a clearable warning appears on the control panel. Job (default) Continuable Events Auto continue (10 seconds) (default) Configure the product behavior when the product encounters certain errors. Touch OK to continue Jam Recovery Auto (default) Configure how the product handles pages that are lost during a jam. Off On 42 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Tray Behavior Use Requested Tray Sub-menu item Values Description Exclusively (default) Control how the product handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray. First Manually Feed Prompt Always (default) Unless Loaded PS Defer Media Enabled (default) Specify how a prompt should appear when the type or size for a job does not match the specified tray and the product pulls from the multipurpose tray instead. Select either the PostScript (PS) or HP paper-handling model. Disabled Use Another Tray Enabled (default) Disabled Alternative Letterhead Mode On Off (default) Size/Type Prompt Display (default) Do not display Duplex Blank Pages Auto (default) Turn on or off the control-panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty. Use this feature so that you can load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way for all print or copy jobs, whether you are printing or copying to one side of the sheet or to both sides of the sheet. Control whether the tray configuration message appears whenever a tray is opened or closed. Control how the product handles two-sided jobs (duplexing). Yes General Copy Behavior Hold off print job On Prevents print jobs from beginning to print while a walk-up user is setting up a job. Off Hold off time Scan Ahead Prevents non-copy print jobs from starting for a specified time after a copy job is completely printed. Enabled (default) Disabled Auto Print Interrupt Enabled Disabled (default) Turn on no-wait scanning. With Scan Ahead enabled, the pages in the original document are scanned to disk and held until the product becomes available. When this feature is enabled, copy jobs can interrupt print jobs that are set to print multiple copies. The copy job is inserted into the print queue at the end of one copy of the print job. After the copy job is complete, the product continues printing the remaining copies of the print job. Copy Interrupt Enabled Disabled (default) Alternative Letterhead Mode Off (default) On ENWW When this feature is enabled, a copy job that is currently printing can be interrupted when a new copy job is started. You are prompted to confirm that you want to interrupt the current job. This option allows loading of letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for all copy jobs, whether copying to one side of the paper or to both sides of the paper. Device Behavior menu 43 Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item General Printing Behavior Override A4/Letter Sub-menu item Values Description No When this feature is enabled, the job prints on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper is loaded in the product (or prints on A4 paper when a letter-size job is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded). This option also overrides A3 with ledger-size paper and ledger with A3-size paper. Yes (default) Manual Feed Enabled Disabled (default) Courier Font Regular (default) When this feature is enabled, the user can select manual feed from the control panel as the paper source for a job. Select which version of the Courier font you want to use. Dark Wide A4 Enabled Disabled (default) Print PS Errors Enabled Disabled (default) Print PDF Errors Enabled Change the printable area of A4-size paper. If you enable this option, eighty 10-pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper. Select whether a PostScript (PS) error page is printed when the product encounters a PS error. Select whether a PDF error page is printed when the product encounters a PDF error. Disabled (default) Personality Auto (default) Select the printer language that the product should use. PCL PDF PS 44 Chapter 2 Control panel Normally, you should not change the language. If you change the setting to a specific language, the product does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the product. ENWW Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description PCL Form Length Type a value between 5 and 128 lines. The factory default is 60 lines. PCL is a set of printer commands that Hewlett-Packard developed to provide access to printer features. Orientation Portrait (default) Select the orientation that is most often used for print jobs. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or Landscape if the long edge is at the top. Landscape Font Source Select the source from the list. Select the font source for the user-soft default font. Font Number Type the font number. The range is between 0 and 102. The factory default is 0. Specify the font number for the user soft default font by using the source that is specified in the Font Source menu item. The product assigns a number to each font and lists it on the PCL font list (available from the Administration menu). Font Pitch Type a value between 0.44 and 99.99. The factory default is 10.00. If Font Source and Font Number indicate a contour font, use this feature to select a default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font). Font Point Size Type a value between 4.00 and 999.75. The factory default is 12.00. If Font Source and Font Number indicate a contour font, use this feature to select a default point size (for a proportional-spaced font). Symbol Set PC-8 (default) Select any one of several available symbol sets from the control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. (50 additional symbol sets from which to choose) Append CR to LF No (default) Yes Suppress Blank Pages No (default) Yes Media Source Mapping Standard (default) Classic ENWW Configure whether a carriage return (CR) is appended to each line feed (LF) encountered in backwards-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). This option is for users who are generating their own PCL, which could include extra form feeds that cause blank pages to be printed. When Yes is selected, form feeds are ignored if the page is blank. Select and maintain input trays by number when you are not using the printer driver, or when the software program has no option for tray selection. Device Behavior menu 45 Print Quality menu Administration > Print Quality Table 2-16 Print Quality menu Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Adjust Color Highlights Cyan Density. Magenta Density. Yellow Density. Black Density Adjust the darkness or lightness of highlights on a printed page. Lower values represent lighter highlights on a printed page, and higher values represent darker highlights on a printed page. +5 to –5. Default is 0. Midtones Cyan Density. Magenta Density. Yellow Density. Black Density Adjust the darkness or lightness of midtones on a printed page. Lower values represent lighter midtones on a printed page, and higher values represent darker midtones on a printed page. +5 to –5. Default is 0. Shadows Cyan Density. Magenta Density. Yellow Density. Black Density Adjust the darkness or lightness of shadows on a printed page. Lower values represent lighter shadows on a printed page, and higher values represent darker shadows on a printed page. +5 to –5. Default is 0. Set Registration Restore Color Values Restore Sets all the density values back to the factory default settings. Test Page Print Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back. Print a test page for setting the registration. Source All trays Select the source input tray for printing the Set Registration page. Tray : (choose a tray) Adjust Tray Shift from -20 to 20 along the X or Y axes. 0 is the default. Perform the alignment procedure for each tray. When it creates an image, the product scans across the page from side to side as the sheet feeds from top to bottom into the product. The scan direction is referred to as X. X1 is the scan direction for the first side of a 2-sided page. X2 is the scan direction for the second side of a 2-sided page. The feed direction is referred to as Y. Print Modes Auto Sense Mode Configure which mode is associated with which paper type. Restore Modes Restore Return all print-mode settings to the factory-default settings. Tray 1 Sensing Full Sensing (default) Sets the sensing option for Tray 1 for paper types when using Auto Sense Mode. Transparency Only When Full Sensing is selected, the product senses every page and switches modes accordingly. The product recognizes overhead transparency and nonoverhead transparency types. 46 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2-16 Print Quality menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description When Transparency Only is selected, the product senses only the first page and recognizes only overhead transparency types. Optimize Background Normal (default) Adjust this setting if you are having problems with an overall gray background on pages. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Registration Normal (default) Adjust this setting if you are having problems with color misregistration. Alternate Transfer Control Normal (default) Adjust this setting if you are having problems with faint images repeated on the page. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Tray 1 Normal (default) Alternate Environment Normal (default) Select the Alternate setting if you are having problems with marks on the back side of the paper when printing from Tray 1. This increases the frequency of the cleaning cycle. Adjust this setting if you are having problems printing in low temperature and low humidity environments. Low Temp Line Voltage Normal (default) Low Voltage Tracking Control On (default) Adjust this setting if the product is operating in a lowvoltage environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image. Do not adjust this setting unless an HP-authorized support person recommends it. Off Uniformity Control Normal (default) Adjust this setting if printed images have a mottled appearance. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Normal Paper Standard (default) Adjust this setting if you are printing on normal-weight paper that is very smooth. Smooth Heavy Paper Standard (default) Adjust this setting if you are printing on heavy-weight paper that is very smooth. Smooth Envelope Mode Normal (default) Adjust this setting if envelopes are partially sealed after printing. Reduced Temp Resistance Mode Normal (default) Up Adjust this setting if you are in a low-humidity environment and you are having problems with loose toner particles after printing. Down ENWW Print Quality menu 47 Table 2-16 Print Quality menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Humidity Mode Normal (default) Adjust this setting if you are in a high-humidity environment and you are having problems with light density in the printed image. High Pre-rotation Off (default) On Fuser Temp Normal (default) Up Down Paper Curl Normal (default) Adjust this setting if you are having problems with horizontal streaks on printed pages. Using this feature increases the warm-up time for the product. Adjust this setting upward if toner is not fusing well. Adjust it downward if you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on the next page. Adjust this setting if paper is curling in a hightemperature and high-humidity environment. Reduced Resolution Restore Optimize Return all the settings in the Optimize menu to the factory-default values. Image REt 3600 Select Image REt 3600 to produce fast, high-quality printing that is appropriate for most print jobs 1200x600dpi Select 1200x600dpi to produce the highest-quality printing available, but it may slow print speed. This setting may be useful for jobs that contain very thin lines or fine graphics. Color REt Enabled (default) Disabled Calibration/Cleaning Auto Cleaning Enabled Disabled (default) Cleaning Interval 1000 (default) 2000 Enable or disable Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which produces print output with smooth angles, curves, and edges. When auto-cleaning is on, the product prints a cleaning page when the page count reaches the value that is set in Cleaning Interval. Use this feature to set the interval when the cleaning page is printed. The interval is measured by the number of pages printed. 5000 10000 20000 Auto Cleaning Size Letter Use this feature to select the size of paper used for the cleaning page. A4 48 Process Cleaning Page Process Use this feature to create and process a cleaning page for cleaning excess toner off the pressure roller in the fuser. The process takes up to 2.5 minutes. Quick Calibration Calibrate Performs partial product calibrations. Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Table 2-16 Print Quality menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Full Calibration Calibrate Performs all product calibrations. Delay Calibration at Wake/Power On No This menu controls the timing of the calibration when the printer wakes up or is turned on. Yes (default) ● Select No to have the printer calibrate immediately when it wakes up or is turned on. The product will not print any jobs until it finishes calibrating. ● Select Yes to enable a product that is asleep to accept print jobs before it calibrates. The product only accepts new jobs for a short time. It may start calibrating before it has printed all the jobs it has received. NOTE: For the best results, allow the product to calibrate before printing. Print jobs performed before calibration may not be of the highest quality. ENWW Print Quality menu 49 Troubleshooting menu Administration > Troubleshooting NOTE: Many of the menu items under the Troubleshooting menu are for advanced troubleshooting purposes. Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description Event Log Print This shows the event codes and their corresponding engine cycles on the controlpanel display. Calibrate Scanner Calibrate Use this feature to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for ADF and flatbed scans. You might need to calibrate the scanner if it is not capturing the correct sections of scanned documents. PQ Troubleshooting Fax T.30 Trace Print Print various diagnostic pages that help solve print-quality problems. T.30 Report Print When to Print Report Never auto print (default) Print or configure the fax T.30 trace report. T. 30 is the standard that specifies handshaking, protocols, and error correction between fax machines. Print after any fax job Print after fax send jobs Print after any fax error Print after send errors only Print after receive errors only Fax Transmit Signal Loss A value between 0 and 30. The default is 0. Set loss levels to compensate for phone-line signal loss. Do not modify this setting unless requested to do so by an HP service representative because it could cause the fax to stop functioning. Fax V.34 Normal (default) Disable V.34 mode if several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it. Off Fax Speaker Mode Normal (default) Diagnostic Diagnostic Page Disable Cartridge Check 50 Chapter 2 Control panel Print A technician can use this feature technician to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations. Print a diagnostic page that includes color swatches and the EP parameters table. Use this item to enter a mode where a cartridge (or color pair of cartridge and drum) can be removed to determine which particular ENWW Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item Values Description color is the source of a problem. In this mode, all consumable-related errors are ignored. Paper Path Sensors Paper Path Test Initiate a test of the paper-path sensors. Test Page Print Generate a test page for testing the paperhandling features. Define the path for the test in order to test specific paper paths. Source All trays Specify whether the test page is printed from all trays or from a specific tray. Tray 1 Tray 2 (Additional trays are shown, if applicable.) Duplex Off (default) Select whether the duplexer should be included in the test. On Copies Range: 1-500, Default is 1. Manual Sensor Test Component Test Select how many pages should be sent from the specified source as part of the test. This item performs tests to determine whether the paper-path sensors are operating correctly. A list of available components appears. Repeat Exercise individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start the test, select one of the components. The test runs the number of times specified in the Repeat option. You might be prompted to remove parts from the product during the test. Press the Stop button to abort the test. Once (default) Determines the number of times the test runs. Continuous Print/Stop Test Color Band Test Continuous value from 0 to 60,000 milliseconds. Default: 0 Isolate faults by stopping the product during the print cycle and observing where in the process the image degrades. To run the test, specify a stop time. The next job that is sent to the product stops at the specified time in the process. Test Page Print Prints a page that helps identify arcing in the high-voltage power supplies. Copies Continuous value from 1 to 30. Specify the number of copies to print for the Color Band test. Default: 1 Scanner Tests ENWW A list of available scanner tests appears. A service technician can use this menu item to diagnose potential problems with the product scanner. Troubleshooting menu 51 Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued) Menu item Sub-menu item Control Panel LEDs Display Sub-menu item Values Description Verify that the components of the control panel are functioning correctly. Buttons Touchscreen 52 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW Resets menu Administration > Resets Table 2-18 Resets menu Menu item Values Description Clear Local Address Book Clear Use this feature to clear all addresses from the address books that are stored on the product. Clear Fax Activity Log Yes Use this feature to clear all events from the Fax Activity Log. No (default) Restore Factory Telecom Setting Restore Use this option to restore the following settings to their factory default settings: Transmit Signal Loss, V34, Maximum Baud Rate, Speaker Mode. Restore Factory Settings Restore Use this feature to restore all product settings to their factory defaults. Reset Supplies New Fuser Kit (Yes/No) Notify the product that a new fuser kit has been installed. ENWW Resets menu 53 Service menu Administration > Service The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel. For inforamtion about the Service menu, see Service mode functions on page 503. 54 Chapter 2 Control panel ENWW 3 ENWW Paper and print media ● Supported paper and print media ● Supported paper and print media types ● Tray and bin capacity ● Custom paper sizes ● Load paper and print media ● Configure trays ● Choose an output bin 55 Supported paper and print media This product supports a number of paper sizes, and it adapts to various media. NOTE: To obtain best results, select the correct paper size and type in the printer driver before printing. Table 3-1 Supported paper and print media sizes Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 (optional) Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in) Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in) RA4 215 x 305 mm (8.5 x 12.0 in) A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in) B5 (JIS) 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in) B6 (JIS) 128 x 182 mm (5.04 x 7.17 in) Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 in) Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in) 5x7 127 x 178 mm (5 x 7 in) 5x8 127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 in) A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 in) Postcard (JIS) 100 x 148 mm (3.9 x 5.8 in) Double Postcard (JIS) 148 x 200 mm (5.8 x 7.9 in) 16K 56 Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW Table 3-1 Supported paper and print media sizes (continued) Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 (optional) 184 x 260 mm (7.2 x 10.2 in) 16K 195 x 270 mm (7.7 x 10.6 in) 16K 197 x 273 mm (7.8 x 10.8 in) 8.5 x 13 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in) Envelope Commercial #10 105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 in) Envelope #9 100 mm x 226 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in) Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in) Envelope C5 ISO 162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in) Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 in) Envelope DL ISO 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in) Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in) Custom 98.4 x 148 mm to 216 x 356 mm (3.9 x 5.8 in to 8.5 x 14 in) Custom 148 x 210 mm to 216 x 297 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in to 8.5 x 11.69 in) Custom 148 x 210 mm to 216 x 356 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in to 8.5 x 14 in) ENWW Supported paper and print media 57 Supported paper and print media types For a complete list of specific HP-brand paper that this product supports, go to www.hp.com/support/ cljcm3530mfp. Paper type Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 (optional) Plain Paper Light 60–74 g/m2 Midweight (96–110 g/m2) Heavy (111–130 g/m2) Extra Heavy (131–175 g/m2) Color Transparency Labels Letterhead Preprinted Prepunched Colored Rough Bond Recycled Envelope Cardstock Mid-weight glossy (96–110 g/m2) Heavy glossy (111–130 g/m2) Extra-heavy glossy (131–175 g/m2) Card glossy (176–220 g/m2) Opaque film HP Tough Paper HP Soft Gloss (120 g/m2) 58 Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW Paper type Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 (optional) HP Glossy (130 g/m2) HP Glossy (160 g/m2) HP Glossy (220 g/m2) ENWW Supported paper and print media types 59 Tray and bin capacity Tray or bin Paper type Specifications Quantity Tray 1 Paper Range: Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.39 in) 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 220 g/m2 (59 lb) bond Equivalent to 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond Envelopes Less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 90 g/m2 (24 lb) bond Up to 10 envelopes Labels Maximum 0.102 mm (0.004 in) thick Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.39 in) Transparencies Minimum 0.102 mm (0.004 in) thick Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.39 in) Up to 50 sheets Glossy paper Range: 96 g/m2 (26 lb) bond to 220 g/m2 (59 lb) bond Tray 2 Paper Range: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 220 g/m2 (59 lb) bond Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.39 in) Up to 50 sheets Maximum stack height: 25 mm (0.98 in) Equivalent to 250 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond Maximum stack height for A6 paper: 15 mm (0.59 in) Transparencies Minimum 0.102 mm (0.004 in) thick Maximum stack height: 25 mm (0.98 in) Glossy paper Range: Maximum stack height: 25 mm (0.98 in) 96 g/m2 (26 lb) bond to 220 g/m2 (59 lb) bond Tray 3 (optional) Paper Range: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 220 g/m2 (59 lb) bond Equivalent to 500 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond Maximum stack height: 56 mm (2.2 in) Transparencies Minimum 0.102 mm (0.004 in) thick Maximum stack height: 56 mm (2.2 in) Glossy paper Range: Maximum stack height: 56 mm (2.2 in) 96 g/m2 (26 lb) bond to 220 g/m2 (59 lb) bond Output bin 60 Paper Chapter 3 Paper and print media Up to 250 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond ENWW Custom paper sizes This product supports a variety of custom paper sizes. Supported custom sizes are sizes that are within the minimum- and maximum-size guidelines for the product but are not listed in the supported paper sizes table. When using a supported custom size, specify the custom size in the print driver, and load the paper in a tray that supports custom sizes. ENWW Custom paper sizes 61 Load paper and print media You can load different media in the trays and then request media by type or size by using the control panel. Paper orientation for loading trays If you are using paper that requires a specific orientation, load it according to the information in the following tables. NOTE: The Alternative Letterhead Mode setting affects the way you load letterhead or preprinted paper. This setting is turned off by default. For more information, see Device Behavior menu on page 42. 62 Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW Tray 1 Paper type Preprinted or letterhead Image orientation Portrait Duplex mode 1-sided printing 2-sided printing Landscape 1-sided printing 2-sided printing Prepunched ENWW Portrait or landscape 1- or 2-sided printing How to load paper How to load paper Alternative Letterhead Mode = Off Alternative Letterhead Mode = On Face down Face up Top edge leading into the product Bottom edge leading into the product Face up Face up Bottom edge leading into the product Bottom edge leading into the product Face down Face up Top edge toward the back of the product Top edge toward the back of the product Face up Face up Top edge toward the back of the product Top edge toward the back of the product Holes toward the back of the product Not applicable Load paper and print media 63 Paper type Envelopes 64 Image orientation Duplex mode How to load paper How to load paper Alternative Letterhead Mode = Off Alternative Letterhead Mode = On Long edge of the 1-sided printing envelope feeding into the product Face down Not applicable Short edge of the 1-sided printing envelope feeding into the product Face down Chapter 3 Paper and print media Top edge leading into the product Not applicable Top edge toward the back of the product ENWW Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 Paper type Preprinted or letterhead Image orientation Portrait Duplex mode 1-sided printing 2-sided printing Landscape 1-sided printing 2-sided printing Prepunched ENWW Portrait or landscape 1- or 2-sided printing How to load paper How to load paper Alternative Letterhead Mode = Off Alternative Letterhead Mode = On Face up Face down Top edge at the right side of the tray Top edge at the left side of the tray Face down Face down Top edge at the left side of the tray Top edge at the left side of the tray Face up Face down Top edge toward the back of the product Top edge toward the back of the product Face down Face down Top edge toward the back of the product Top edge toward the back of the product Holes toward the back of the product Not applicable Load paper and print media 65 Paper type Image orientation Duplex mode How to load paper How to load paper Alternative Letterhead Mode = Off Alternative Letterhead Mode = On Load Tray 1 TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-loadtray1. CAUTION: To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing. 66 1. Open Tray 1. 2. Fold out the tray extension to support the paper and set the side guides to the correct width. Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW ENWW 3. Load paper in the tray face down and the short, top edge going into the product first. 4. Make sure the stack fits under the tabs on the guides and does not exceed the load-level indicators. 5. Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend it. Load paper and print media 67 Print envelopes If your software does not automatically format an envelope, specify Landscape for page orientation in your software program or printer driver. Use the following guidelines to set margins for return and destination addresses on Commercial #10 or DL envelopes: Address type Left margin Top margin Return 15 mm (0.6 in) 15 mm (0.6 in) Destination 102 mm (4 in) 51 mm (2 in) For envelopes of other sizes, adjust the margin settings accordingly. Load Tray 2 This tray holds up to 250 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. If the paper is heavier, the tray does not hold as many sheets. Do not overfill the tray. CAUTION: Do not print envelopes, labels, postcards, or unsupported sizes of paper from the Tray 2. Print these types of paper only from Tray 1. TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-loadtray2. 1. Slide open the tray. NOTE: Do not open the tray while it is in use. 68 Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW 2. Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guides to the size of the paper being used. 3. Load paper into the tray face up. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it. NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overfill the tray. Be sure the top of the stack is below the tray full indicator. NOTE: If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an error message might appear during printing or the paper might jam. 4. ENWW Slide the tray into the product. Load paper and print media 69 5. The control panel shows the tray’s paper type and size. If the configuration is not correct, follow the instructions on the control panel to change the size or type. HP LaserJet DDMMYYYY 00.00 AM Load the optional 500-sheet paper and heavy media tray (Tray 3) Tray 3 holds up to 500 sheets of standard paper. The product automatically detects the following standard sizes of paper in Tray 3: Letter, Legal, Executive, A4, A5, and B5 (JIS). CAUTION: Do not print envelopes or unsupported sizes of paper from Tray 3. Print these types of paper only from Tray 1. Load standard-sized paper into Tray 3 TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-loadtray3. 1. Slide open the tray. NOTE: Do not open the tray while it is in use. 70 Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW 2. Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches and sliding the guides to the size of the paper being used. 3. Load paper into the tray face up. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it. NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overfill the tray. Be sure the top of the stack is below the tray full indicator. NOTE: If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an error message might appear during printing or the paper might jam. 4. ENWW Slide the tray into the product. Load paper and print media 71 5. The control panel shows the tray’s paper type and size. If the configuration is not correct, follow the instructions on the control panel to change the size or type. HP LaserJet DDMMYYYY 00.00 AM Load custom-size paper into Tray 3 To use custom media, change the size setting on the control panel to Custom and set the unit of measure, X Dimension and Y Dimension. 72 1. Slide open the tray. 2. Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches and sliding the guides to the size of the paper being used. Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW ENWW 3. Load paper into the tray face up. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it. 4. Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the paper type and size. Load paper and print media 73 5. The control panel prompts you to set the paper size and type. Select the Custom setting, and then configure the X and Y dimensions of the custom paper size. HP LaserJet DDMMYYYY 00.00 AM NOTE: See the label in the paper tray, or the following illustration, to determine the X and Y dimensions. Y X 74 Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW Configure trays The product automatically prompts you to configure a tray for type and size in the following situations: ● When you load paper into the tray ● When you specify a particular tray or media type for a print job through the printer driver or a software program and the tray is not configured to match the print-job’s settings The following message appears on the control panel: Tray [type] [size] To change size or type, touch “Modify”. To accept, touch “OK”. NOTE: The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and Tray 1 is configured for Any Custom and Any Type. NOTE: If you have used other HP LaserJet product models, you might be accustomed to configuring Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. For this product, setting Tray 1 size to Any Custom is equivalent to First mode. Setting size for Tray 1 to a setting other than Any Custom is equivalent to Cassette mode. Configure a tray when loading paper 1. Load paper in the tray. Close the tray if you are using Tray 2 or 3. 2. The tray configuration message appears. 3. Touch OK to accept the detected size and type, or touch Modify to choose a different paper size or type. 4. Select the correct size and type and then touch OK. Configure a tray to match print job settings 1. In the software program, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type. 2. Send the job to the product. If the tray needs to be configured, the tray configuration message appears. 3. Load the tray with the specified type and size of paper, and then close the tray. 4. Touch OK to accept the detected size and type, or touch Modify to choose a different paper size or type. 5. Select the correct size and type and then touch OK. Automatic overhead transparency sensing (auto sense mode) The automatic media type sensor functions only when that tray is configured to the Any Type setting. Configuring a tray to any other type, such as Bond or Glossy, deactivates the media sensor in that tray. The product can automatically classify paper types into one of two categories: ● Non-transparency ● Transparency For more control, a specific type must be selected in the job or configured in a tray. ENWW Configure trays 75 Auto-sense settings Full sensing (Tray 1 only) ● The product distinguishes between transparencies (Transparency mode) and paper (Normal mode). ● Each time the product prints a page, it senses transparencies or non-transparencies. ● This is the slowest mode. Transparency only ● The product distinguishes between transparencies (Transparency mode) and paper (Normal mode). ● The product assumes that the second and all subsequent pages are of the same media type as the first page. ● This is the fastest mode and is useful for high-volume printing in Normal mode. For more information about setting these options, see Print Quality menu on page 46. Select the paper by source, type, or size In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull media when you send a print job. Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or Print Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. Unless you change these settings, the product automatically selects a tray using the default settings. Source To print by Source select a specific tray for the product to pull from. If you select a tray that is configured for a type or size that does not match your print job, the product prompts you to load the tray with the type or size of print media for your print job before printing it. When you load the tray, the product begins printing. Type and Size Printing by Type or Size means that you want the product to pull from the tray that is loaded with the correct type and size of media. Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking out trays and helps protect special media from accidental use. For example, if a tray is configured for letterhead and you select plain paper, the product will not pull the letterhead from that tray. Instead, it will pull from a tray that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain paper on the product control panel. Selecting media by Type and Size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper, glossy paper, and transparencies. Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by Type for special print media, such as labels or transparencies. Print by Size for envelopes, if possible. 76 ● To print by Type or Size, select the Type or Size from the Page Setup dialog box, the Print dialog box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the software program. ● If you often print on a certain type or size of media, configure a tray for that type or size. Then, when you select that type or size as you print a job, the product automatically pulls media from the tray that is configured for that type or size. Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW Choose an output bin The product has an ADF output bin and the standard output bin for printed pages. 2 1 1 Standard output bin 2 ADF output bin (for copy originals) When you scan or copy documents by using the ADF, the originals are automatically delivered to the ADF output bin. When you send print jobs to the product from a computer, the output is to the standard output bin. ENWW Choose an output bin 77 78 Chapter 3 Paper and print media ENWW 4 ENWW Manage and maintain ● Print information pages ● HP Easy Printer Care ● Embedded Web server ● Use HP Web Jetadmin software ● Product security features ● Manage supplies ● Clean the product ● Product updates 79 Print information pages Information pages provide details about the product and its current configuration. The following table provides the instructions for printing the information pages. Page description How to print the page from the product control panel Administration Menu Map 1. At the product control panel, touch the down arrow until the Administration menu displays. Shows the control-panel menus and available settings. 2. Touch the Administration menu to open it. 3. Touch the Information menu to open it. 4. Touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu to open it. 5. Touch the Administration Menu Map option, and then touch the Print button. The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the product. For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values, see Control panel on page 11. Configuration Page 1. At the product control panel, touch the down arrow until the Administration menu displays. Shows product settings and installed accessories. 2. Touch the Administration menu to open it. 3. Touch the Information menu to open it. 4. Touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu to open it. 5. Touch the Configuration Page option, and then touch the Print button. NOTE: If the product contains an HP Jetdirect print server or an optional hard disk drive, additional configuration pages print that provide information about those devices. Supplies Status Page 1. At the product control panel, touch the down arrow until the Administration menu displays. 2. Touch the Administration menu to open it. 3. Touch the Information menu to open it. 4. Touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu to open it. 5. Touch the Supplies Status Page option, and then touch the Print button. Shows print-cartridge toner levels. NOTE: If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page might not show the remaining life for those supplies. Usage Page Shows a page count for each size of paper printed, the number of one-sided (simplexed) or two-sided (duplexed) pages, and the average percentage of coverage. 80 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain 1. At the product control panel, touch the down arrow until the Administration menu displays. 2. Touch the Administration menu to open it. 3. Touch the Information menu to open it. 4. Touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu to open it. 5. Touch the Usage Page option, and then touch the Print button. ENWW Page description How to print the page from the product control panel Color Usage Job Log 1. At the product control panel, touch the down arrow until the Administration menu displays. Shows job-by-job color usage information. 2. Touch the Administration menu to open it. 3. Touch the Information menu to open it. 4. Touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu to open it. 5. Touch the Color Usage Job Log option, and then touch the Print button. 1. At the product control panel, touch the down arrow until the Administration menu displays. 2. Touch the Administration menu to open it. 3. Touch the Information menu to open it. 4. Touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu to open it. 5. Touch the down arrow until the File Directory option displays. 6. Touch the File Directory option, and then touch the Print button. Fax Reports 1. At the product control panel, touch the down arrow until the Administration menu displays. Five reports show fax activity, fax calls, billing codes, blocked fax numbers, and speed-dial numbers. 2. Touch the Administration menu to open it. 3. Touch the Information menu to open it. 4. Touch the Fax Reports menu to open it. 5. Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report: File Directory Contains information for any mass storage devices, such as flash drives, memory cards, or hard disks, that are installed in the product. NOTE: Fax reports are available only on product models that have fax capabilities. 6. ◦ Fax Activity Log ◦ Fax Call Report ◦ Billing Codes Report ◦ Blocked Fax List ◦ Speed Dial List Touch thePrint button. For more information, see the fax guide that came with the product. Sample Pages/Fonts 1. At the product control panel, touch the down arrow until the Administration menu displays. Shows which fonts are installed in the product. 2. Touch the Administration menu to open it. 3. Touch the Information menu to open it. 4. Touch Sample Pages/Fonts. 5. Touch the down arrow to scroll to the PCL Font List or PS Font List option. 6. Touch the PCL Font List or PS Font List option, and then touch thePrint button. NOTE: DIMM. ENWW The font lists also show which fonts reside on a hard disk accessory or Print information pages 81 HP Easy Printer Care Open the HP Easy Printer Care software Use one of the following methods to open the HP Easy Printer Care software: ● On the Start menu, select Programs, select Hewlett-Packard, select HP Easy Printer Care, and then click Start HP Easy Printer Care. ● In the Windows system tray (in the lower-right corner of the desktop), double-click the HP Easy Printer Care icon. ● Double-click the desktop icon. HP Easy Printer Care software sections HP Easy Printer Care software can provide information about multiple HP products that are on your network as well as any products that are directly connected to your computer. Some of the items that are in the following table might not be available for every product. The Help button (?) in the upper-right corner of each page provides more detailed information about the options on that page. Section Options Device List tab ● When you open the software, this is the first page that appears. NOTE: The product information appears either in list form or as icons, depending on the setting for the View as option. NOTE: To return to this page from any tab, click My HP Printers in the left side of the window. ● The information on this tab includes current alerts for the product. ● If you click a product in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care opens the Overview tab for that product. Compatible Printers Provides a list of all the HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software. Find Other Printers window Add more products to the My HP Printers list Click the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list to open the Find Other Printers window. The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects other network printers so that you can add them to the My HP Printers list and then monitor those products from your computer. Overview tab ● Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as when a print cartridge has reached is estimated end of life. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh button in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status. ● Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the estimated life remaining in the print cartridge and the status of the paper that is loaded in each tray. ● Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about product supplies, ordering information, and recycling information. Contains basic status information for the product 82 Devices list: Shows the products that you can select. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW Section Options Support tab ● Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as a print cartridge that is at its estimated end of life. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh button in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status. ● Device Management section: Provides links to information about HP Easy Printer Care, to advanced product settings, and to product usage reports. ● Troubleshooting and Help: Provides links to tools that you can use to resolve problems, to online product support information, and to online HP experts. Settings tab ● About: Provides general information about this tab. Configure product settings, adjust printquality settings, and find information about specific product features ● General: Provides information about the product, such as the model number, serial number, and the settings for date and time, if they are available. ● Information Pages: Provides links to print the information pages that are available for the product. ● Capabilities: Provides information about product features, such as duplexing, the available memory, and the available printing personalities. Click Change to adjust the settings. ● Print Quality: Provides information about print-quality settings. Click Change to adjust the settings. ● Trays / Paper: Provides information about the trays and how they are configured. Click Change to adjust the settings. ● Restore Defaults: Provides a way to restore the product settings to the factory defaults. Click Restore to restore the settings to the defaults. Provides links to support information NOTE: This tab is not available for some products. HP Proactive Support NOTE: This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs. Supplies Ordering button When enabled, HP Proactive Support routinely scans your printing system to identify potential problems. Click the more info link to configure how frequently the scans occur. This page also provides information about available updates for product software, firmware, and HP printer drivers. You can accept or decline each recommended update. ● Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each product. To order a certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list. You can sort the list by product, or by the supplies that need to be ordered the soonest. The list contains supplies information for every product that is in the My HP Printers list. ● Shop Online for Supplies button: Opens the HP SureSupply Web site in a new browser window. If you have checked the Order check box for any items, the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site, where you will receive information on options for purchasing your selected supplies. ● Print Shopping List button: Prints the information for the supplies that have the Order check box selected. Click the Supplies Ordering button on any tab to open the Supplies Ordering window, which provides access to online supplies ordering. NOTE: This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs. ENWW HP Easy Printer Care 83 Section Options Alert Settings link Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings window, in which you can configure alerts for each product. NOTE: This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs. Color Access Control ● Alerting is on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature. ● Printer Alerts: Select the option to receive alerts for critical errors only, or for any error. ● Job Alerts: For products that support it, you can receive alerts for specific print jobs. Use this feature to permit or restrict color printing. NOTE: This item is available only for HP color products that support Color Access Control. NOTE: This item is available from the Overview and Support tabs. 84 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW Embedded Web server Use the embedded Web server to view product and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the product control panel. The following are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server: NOTE: When the printer is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care to view the printer status. ● View product status information. ● Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray. ● Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones. ● View and change tray configurations. ● View and change the product control-panel menu configuration. ● View and print internal pages. ● Receive notification of product and supplies events. ● View and change network configuration. To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or Netscape 6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The embedded Web server works when the product is connected to an IPbased network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based product connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server. When the product is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available. NOTE: For complete information about using the embedded Web server, see the Embedded Web Server User Guide, which is on the product Administrator CD. Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection 1. In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the product IP address or host name in the address/URL field. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration page. See Print information pages on page 80. NOTE: After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future. 2. The embedded Web server has four tabs that contain settings and information about the product: the Information tab, the Settings tab, the Networking tab, and the Digital Sending tab. Click the tab that you want to view. See Embedded Web server sections on page 86 for more information about each tab. ENWW Embedded Web server 85 Embedded Web server sections Tab or section Options Information tab ● Device Status: Shows the product status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change Settings. ● Configuration Page: Shows the information found on the configuration page. ● Supplies Status: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% indicating that a supply has reached its estimated end of life. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new supplies, click Shop for Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window. ● Event Log: Shows a list of all product events and errors. ● Usage Page: Shows a summary of the number of pages the product has printed, grouped by size and type. ● Diagnostics Page: Allows you to name the product, show the company name, assign an asset number to the product, and name the primary contact who manages the product. An HP-authorized support person might ask for this information. ● Device Information: Shows the product network name, address, and model information. To customize these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab. ● Control Panel: Shows messages from the control panel, such as Ready or Sleep mode on. ● Color Usage Job Log: Shows the total pages printed, the number of pages printed in color, and the number of pages printed in black only. ● Print: Allows you to send print-ready jobs to the product. Settings tab ● Configure Device: Allows you to configure product default settings. This page contains the traditional menus found on the control-panel display. Provides the ability to configure the product from your computer ● Tray Sizes/Types: Shows the size and type of paper and print media allowed for each input tray. ● E-mail Server: Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up email alerts. ● Alerts: Network only. Allows you to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various product and supplies events. ● AutoSend: Allows you to configure the product to send automated e-mails regarding product configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses. ● Security: Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server. ● Authentication Manager: Allows you to determine which product functions will require a user to provide log-in information in order to use those functions. ● LDAP Authentication: Allows you to configure a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server to limit product access to certain users. The LDAP server will require a user to provide log-in information in order to gain access to the product. ● Kerberos Authentication: Allows you to configure a Kerberos network authentication protocol, which provides strong authentication for client/server applications by using secret-key cryptography. Provides product, status, and configuration information 86 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW Tab or section Options ● Device PIN: Allows you to configure the PIN numbers that are required to access various product functions. Use the Authentication Manager page to select Group 1 PIN or Group 2 PIN for the various functions. For example, you could configure the Copy option to require Group 1 PIN and configure the Send to E-mail option to require Group 2 PIN. ● User PIN: Allows you to add, edit, or delete individual users who are allowed to use various product functions such as copy, fax, and digital sending. ● Edit Other Links: Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site. This link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages. ● Device Information: Allows you to name the product and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the product. ● Language: Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information. ● Date & Time: Allows time synchronization with a network time server. ● Sleep Schedule: Allows you to set or edit a wake time, sleep time, and sleep delay for the product. ● Restrict Color: Allows you to permit or restrict color printing. You can specify permissions for individual users or for jobs that are sent from specific software programs. ● Home Screen Setup: Allows you to configure which features display on the Home screen and the order in which they display. NOTE: The Settings tab can be password-protected. If this product is on a network, always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this tab. Digital Sending tab Use the pages on the Digital Sending tab to configure the digital-sending features. NOTE: If the product is configured to use the optional HP Digital Sending Software, the options on these tabs are not available. Instead, all digital-sending configuration is performed by using the HP Digital Sending Software. ENWW ● General. Set up contact information for the system administrator. ● Send to Folder. Allows you to enable, disable, and configure the Send to Folder capabilities on the product. It is also used to link the product to individual folder destinations that exist in the network. As a first step, you must create and configure destination folders. These destination folders need to be operational before using this page to add the destinations to the product. ● E-mail Settings. Configure the e-mail settings for digital sending. You can specify the SMTP server, the default "From" address, and the default subject. You can also set the maximum file size that is allowed for attachments. ● E-mail Address Book. The E-mail Address Book page enables you to add e-mail addresses into the product one at a time, and to edit e-mail addresses that have already been saved in the product. You can also use the Import/Export tab to load a large list of frequently-used e-mail addresses on to the product all at once, rather than adding them one at a time. ● LDAP Settings. Allows you to configure the e-mail addresses where scanned documents can be sent. ● Import/Export. Use this tab to import or export .CSV files containing e-mail addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so that they can be accessed on this product. You can also export e-mail, fax, or user records from the product into a file Embedded Web server 87 Tab or section Options on your computer. You can then use this file as a data backup, or you can use it to import the records onto another HP product. Fax tab ● Log. View the digital-sending activity log for the product. The log contains digitalsending job information, including any errors that occur. ● Preferences. Configure digital-sending defaults such as the default page-size and the default settings-reset delay. You can also configure these settings by using the product control-panel menus. The Fax tab contains options to configure and use the fax capabilities of the product. For additional information about fax functions, see the Fax User Guide. NOTE: This tab is available only for the HP Color LaserJet CM3530fs MFP. Networking tab Provides the ability to change network settings from your computer ● Use the Fax Settings screen to configure the send-to-fax features for the product. ● The Fax Address Book page enables you to add fax numbers into the product one at a time, and to edit fax numbers that have already been saved in the product. You can also use the Import/Export feature on the Digital Sending tab to load a large list of frequently-used fax numbers on to the product all at once, rather than adding them one at a time. ● Use the Fax Speed Dials screen to add, edit, or delete fax speed dial entries to and from the product. You can use fax speed dials to store frequently used fax numbers or lists of up to 100 fax numbers. Up to 100 speed dial entries can be configured. Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the product when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the product is directly connected to a computer, or if the product is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server. NOTE: The Networking tab can be password-protected. Other Links ● hp instant support: Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions to product problems. Contains links that connect you to the Internet ● Shop for Supplies: Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site, where you will receive information on options for purchasing original HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper. ● Product Support: Connects to the support site for the product, from which you can search for help regarding various topics. ● Show Me How: Connects to information that demonstrates specific tasks for the product. NOTE: You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it. 88 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW Use HP Web Jetadmin software HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. Management is proactive, allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected. Download this free, enhancedmanagement software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin. Device plug-ins can be installed into HP Web Jetadmin to provide support for specific product features. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically connect to the HP Web site and install the latest device plug-ins for your product. NOTE: Browsers must be Java™-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported. ENWW Use HP Web Jetadmin software 89 Product security features Secure the embedded Web server Assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot change the product settings. 1. Open the embedded Web server. See Embedded Web server on page 85. 2. Click the Settings tab. 3. On the left side of the window, click the Security menu. 4. Click the Device Security Settings button. 5. In the Device Password area, type the password next to New Password, and type it again next to Verify Password. 6. Click Apply. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place. HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disks This product supports an optional encrypted hard disk that you can install in the EIO accessory slot. This hard disk provides hardware-based encryption so you can securely store sensitive print, copy, and scan data without impacting product performance. This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and has versatile time-saving features and robust functionality. For information about ordering these accessories see Part numbers on page 511. Secure Disk Erase To protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the product hard drive, use the Secure Disk Erase feature in the HP Web Jetadmin software. This feature can securely erase print jobs from the hard drive. Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security: ● Non-Secure Fast Erase. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is removed, but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent data-storage operations. This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode. ● Secure Fast Erase. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is overwritten. Secure Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the clearing of disk media. ● Secure Sanitizing Erase. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data is repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk media. Data affected Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are created during the print process, stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based fonts, disk-based macros (forms), address books, and HP and third-party applications. 90 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW NOTE: Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the Retrieve Job menu on the product after the appropriate erase mode has been set. This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) that is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does not affect data that is stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact data that is stored on the flash-based system boot RAM. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the product cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed. Additional Information For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer or go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin. Job storage To securely print a private job, use the personal job feature. The job can only be printed when the correct PIN is entered at the control panel. DSS authentication Optional Digital Sending Software (DSS) for the product is available for purchase separately. The software provides an advanced sending program that contains an authentication process. This process requires users to type a user identification and a password before they can use any of the DSS features that require authentication. Lock the control-panel menus To prevent someone from changing the product configuration, you can lock the control-panel menus. This prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server. You can use HP Web Jetadmin to lock the control-panel menus on several products simultaneously. Browse to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin to access white papers discussing security features, such as control-panel lock, that allow you to secure the product against unwanted access. ENWW 1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program. 2. Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the DEVICE LISTS folder. 3. Select the product. 4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Configure. 5. Select Security from the Configuration Categories list. 6. Type a Device Password. 7. In the Control Panel Access section, select Maximum Lock. This prevents unauthorized users from gaining access to configuration settings. Product security features 91 Lock the formatter cage The formatter cage, on the back of the product, has a slot that you can use to attach a security cable. Locking the formatter cage prevents someone from removing valuable components from the formatter. Figure 4-1 Slot for the security cable 92 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW Manage supplies Use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results. Print-cartridge storage Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. HP policy on non-HP print cartridges Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or remanufactured. NOTE: Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty and service agreements. To install a new HP print cartridge, see Change print cartridges on page 94. To recycle the used cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new cartridge. For more information about recycling, see the product user guide. HP fraud hotline and Web site Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) or go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem. Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following: ● You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge. ● The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the orange pull tab is missing, or the packaging differs from HP packaging). Replace supplies When you use genuine HP supplies, the product automatically notifies you when supplies are reaching their estimated end of life. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need to be replaced. For more information about ordering supplies, see Order parts, accessories, and supplies on page 510 Supplies life For information regarding specific product yield, see www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies. To order supplies, see Parts and diagrams on page 509. ENWW Manage supplies 93 Locate supplies Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles. The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item. Figure 4-2 Supply item locations 2 3 1 1 Toner collection unit 2 Print cartridges 3 Fuser Supply replacement guidelines To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the product. ● Allow sufficient space in the front and on the right side of the product for removing supplies. ● The product should be located on a flat, sturdy surface. For instructions on installing supplies, see the label on each supply item or see www.hp.com/go/ learnaboutsupplies. Change print cartridges When a print cartridge approaches the end of its estimated useful life, the control panel displays a message recommending that you order a replacement. The product can continue to print using the current print cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge, unless you have selected the option to override the message by using the Replace Supplies menu. For more information about the Replace Supplies menu, see Management menu on page 28. The product uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M), cyan (C), and yellow (Y). You can replace a print cartridge when the control panel displays a Replace Cartridge message. The control panel display also indicates the color of the cartridge that has reached the end 94 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW of its estimated useful life (if a genuine HP cartridge is currently installed). Replacement instructions are provided on the label on the print cartridge. CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. NOTE: Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print-cartridge box. See the product user guide. TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfpreplace-print-cartridges. Replace print cartridges ENWW 1. Open the front door. Make sure that the door is completely open. 2. Grasp the handle of the used print cartridge and pull out to remove. 3. Store the used print cartridge in a protective bag. Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print-cartridge box. Manage supplies 95 4. Remove the new print cartridge from its protective bag. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the memory tag on the print cartridge. 5. 96 Grasp both sides of the print cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the print cartridge. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW 6. Remove the orange protective cover from the print cartridge. CAUTION: Avoid prolonged exposure to light. CAUTION: Do not touch the green roller. Doing so can damage the cartridge. ENWW 7. Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks into place. 8. Close the front door. Manage supplies 97 Change the toner collection unit Replace the toner collection unit when the control panel prompts you. NOTE: The toner collection unit is designed for a single use. Do not attempt to empty the toner collection unit and reuse it. Doing so could lead to toner being spilled inside the product, which could result in reduced print quality. After use, return the toner collection unit to HP’s Planet Partners program for recycling. TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfpreplace-toner-collection-unit. Replace the toner collection unit 98 1. Open the front door. Make sure that the door is completely open. 2. Grasp the blue label at the top of the toner collection unit and remove it from the product. Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW ENWW 3. Place the attached blue cap over the blue opening at the top of the unit. 4. Remove the new toner collection unit from its packaging. 5. Insert the bottom of the new unit into the product first and then push the top of the unit until it clicks into place. Manage supplies 99 6. Close the front door. NOTE: If the toner collection unit is not installed correctly, the front door does not close completely. To recycle the used toner collection unit, follow the instructions included with the new toner collection unit. Install memory You can install more memory for the product. CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the product. Install DDR memory DIMMs 1. Turn the product off. 100 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW 2. Disconnect all power and interface cables. NOTE: This illustration might not show all the cables. ENWW 3. Locate the thumb screws on the formatter board in the rear of the product. 4. Unscrew the thumb screws and then pull the formatter board from the product. Place the formatter board on a clean, flat, grounded surface. Manage supplies 101 Release bracket that holds the hard drive, and swing it open. 6. To replace a DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM slot, lift the DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out. O XI XO IX O IX O XI XO O IX O IX O IX O IX O XI XO IX O IX O XI XO O XI XO O XI XO O XI XO IX O IX O XI XO IX O IX O IX O IX O IX O IX 5. O OXO XOX XOX O OXO XOX XOX O OXO XOX XOX XO XO XO XO XO O OXO XOX XO XOX XO XO XO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXOXOXOXO XOXOXOXOXOXO XOXOXOXO XO XO XO XOXOXO XO XO XO XO XO XO XOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO 7. Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom edge of the DIMM. 8. Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the metal contacts are not visible. XOX OXO XOX O O OXO XOX XOX OXO XOX O OXO XOX O XO XOX XO XO XO XO XO XOX XO XO XO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XO XOXOXO XO XO XO XOXOXOXO XOXOXO XO XO XO XO XO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXOXOXOXO XOXOXOXOXOXO XOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO 102 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW 9. Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM. XI OX IO XI OX IO XI XO XI OX IO XI OX IX O OX IO XI XO XI OX IO OX IX O XI OX IO XI XO XI OX IO XO XO XO XO XO XO OX IX O XI OX IO XI XO OX IX O XO XO XO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XO XOXOXO XO XO XO XOXOXOXO XOXOXO XO XO XO XO XO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXOXOXOXO XOXOXOXOXOXO XOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO XOXOXO NOTE: If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure the notch on the bottom of the DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure you are using the correct type of DIMM. 10. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into the product. NOTE: To prevent damage to the formatter board, ensure the formatter board is aligned in the tracks at the top and the bottom of the opening. 11. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the product on. ENWW Manage supplies 103 Enable memory for Windows 1. Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 (using the default Start menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. -orWindows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 (using the Classic Start menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. -orWindows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware and Sound click Printer. 2. Right-click the driver icon, and then select Properties. 3. Click the Device Settings tab. 4. Expand the area for Installable Options. 5. Next to Printer Memory, select the total amount of memory that is installed. 6. Click OK. 104 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW Install an HP Jetdirect or EIO print server card or EIO hard disk This product is equipped with an external I/O (EIO) slot. You can install an additional HP Jetdirect print server card or external EIO hard drive in the available EIO slot. NOTE: This example shows installing an HP Jetdirect print server card. ENWW 1. Turn the product off. 2. Disconnect all power and interface cables. Manage supplies 105 3. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and the cover again. They can be discarded. 4. Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot. 5. Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card. 106 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW 6. Reconnect the power cable and remaining interface cables, and turn the product on. 7. Print a configuration page. An HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print. If it does not print, turn the product off, and then uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot. 8. ENWW Perform one of these steps: ● Choose the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions. ● Reinstall the software, choosing the network installation this time. Manage supplies 107 Clean the product To maintain print quality, clean the product thoroughly every time you replace the print cartridge and whenever print-quality problems occur. WARNING! Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the product. It can be hot. CAUTION: To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the product except as directed. Clean the outside of the product ● Clean the outside of the product if it is visibly marked. ● Use a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water, or water and a mild detergent. Clean the touchscreen Clean the touchscreen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the touchscreen gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth. CAUTION: Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touchscreen. Do not pour or spray water directly onto the touchscreen. Clean the scanner glass ● Clean the scanner glass only if dirt is visible, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality, such as streaking. ● Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner glass. CAUTION: Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the scanner glass. Do not press hard on the glass surface. (You could break the glass). Clean the document feeder Ink and corrrection fluid can leave residue on the narrow glass strip to the left of the large scanner glass. If you are having problems with streaks on copies, clean the narrow glass strip. 108 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW Clean the document-feeder backing ENWW 1. Open the scanner lid. 2. Locate the white, vinyl document-feeder backing. 3. Clean the document-feeder backing by wiping it with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Use an ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the components. 4. Close the scanner lid. Clean the product 109 Clean the document-feeder rollers You should clean the rollers in the document feeder if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show marks as they exit the document feeder. CAUTION: Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals, and you notice dust on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the product. 1. Pull the release lever to open the document-feeder cover. 2. Locate the rollers. 3. Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth. CAUTION: Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the product. 4. Locate the separation pad. 110 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW 5. Wipe the pad with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth. 6. Close the document-feeder cover. Clean the fuser Run the product cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and paper particles that can sometimes accumulate. Accumulation of toner and particles can cause specks to appear on the front or back side of your print jobs. HP recommends that you use the cleaning page when there is a print quality issue. A Cleaning message appears on the product control panel display while the cleaning is taking place. In order for the cleaning page to work correctly, print the page on copier-grade paper (not bond, heavy, or rough paper). Create and use the cleaning page ENWW 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Print Quality 3. Touch Calibration/cleaning. 4. Touch Process cleaning page. Clean the product 111 Product updates This product has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use this information to upgrade the product firmware. Determine the current firmware version 1. At the product control panel, touch the down arrow until the Administration menu displays. 2. Touch the Administration menu to open it. 3. Touch the Information menu to open it. 4. Touch the Configuration Page option, and then touch the Print button. The firmware datecode is listed on the Configuration page in the section called Device Information. The firmware datecode has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X. ● The first string of numbers is the date, where YYYY represents the year, MM represents the month, and DD represents the date. For example, a firmware datecode that begins with 20061125 represents November 25, 2006. ● The second string of numbers is the firmware version number, in decimal format. Download new firmware from the HP Web site To find the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/ cljcm3530mfp_firmware. This page provides instructions for downloading the new firmware version. Transfer the new firmware to the product NOTE: The product can receive an .RFU file update when it is in a "ready" state. The following conditions can affect the time required to transfer the file. ● The speed of the host computer that is sending the update. ● Any jobs that are ahead of the .RFU job in the queue are completed before the update is processed. ● If the process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded, you must send the firmware file again. ● If power is lost during the firmware update, the update is interrupted and the message Resend upgrade appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. In this case, you must send the upgrade by using the USB port. NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults. Use the flash executable file to update the firmware This product has flash-based memory, so you can use the flash firmware executable (.EXE) file to upgrade the firmware. Download this file from www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp_firmware. 112 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW NOTE: To use this method, connect the product directly to your computer through a USB cable, and install the printer driver for this product on your computer. 1. Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address. 2. Find the .EXE file on your computer, and double-click it to open the file. 3. From the Select Printer to Update drop-down list, select this product. Click the Start button to begin the update process. CAUTION: Do not turn the product off or try to send a print job during this process. 4. When the process is complete, a smiling face icon displays in the dialog box. Click the Exit button to close the dialog box. 5. Turn the product off and then on. 6. Print another configuration page and verify that the new firmware datecode is listed. Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser 1. Make sure the Internet browser you are using is configured for viewing folders from FTP sites. These instructions are for Microsoft Internet Explorer. a. Open the browser and click Tools, and then click Internet Options. b. Click the Advanced tab. c. Select the box labeled Enable folder view for FTP sites. d. Click OK. 2. Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address. 3. Open a browser window. 4. In the address line of the browser, type ftp://, where is the address of the product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp:// 192.168.0.90. 5. Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product. 6. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT icon in the browser window. NOTE: The product turns off and then on automatically to activate the update. When the update process is complete, a Ready message displays on the product control panel. Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection 1. Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page that prints when you print the configuration page. NOTE: Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that the product is not in Sleep mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display. ENWW 2. Click Start, click Run, and then type cmd to open the command window. 3. Type: ftp . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp 192.168.0.90. Product updates 113 4. Go to the folder where the firmware file is stored. 5. Press Enter on the keyboard. 6. When prompted for the user name, press Enter. 7. When prompted for the password, press Enter. 8. Type bin at the command prompt. 9. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window. 10. Type put and then the file name. For example, if the file name is cljcm3530.rfu, type put cljcm3530.rfu. 11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer. NOTE: The product automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade. 12. At the command prompt, type: bye to exit the ftp command. 13. At the command prompt, type: exit to return to the Windows interface. Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware To learn how to use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the product firmware, go to www.hp.com/go/ webjetadmin Use Microsoft Windows commands to upgrade the firmware To update the firmware by using a network connection, follow these instructions. 1. Click Start, click Run, and then type cmd to open the command window. 2. Type the following: copy /B \\ \ , where is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and is the product share name. For example: C:\>copy /b C:\cljcm3530.rfu \\YOUR_SERVER \YOUR_COMPUTER. NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type: C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\cljcm3530.rfu" \\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER. 3. Press Enter on the keyboard. The control panel shows a message that indicates the progress of the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the Ready message. The message One File Copied appears on the computer screen. 114 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain ENWW 5 ENWW Theory of operation ● Basic operation ● Engine-control system ● Laser/scanner system ● Image-formation system ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system ● Jam detection ● Optional paper feeder ● Scanning/image capture system system 115 Basic operation The product routes all high-level processes through the formatter, which stores font information, processes the print image, and communicates with the host computer. The basic product operation comprises the following systems: ● The engine-control system, which includes the power supply and the DC controller printed circuit assembly (PCA) ● The laser/scanner system, which forms the latent image on the photosensitive drum ● The image-formation system, which transfers a toner image onto the paper ● The media feed system, which uses a system of rollers and belts to transport the paper through the product ● Option (optional paper feeder) Figure 5-1 Relationship between the main product systems Laser/scanner system Image-formation system Engine control system Media-feed system Option Sequence of operation The DC controller PCA controls the operating sequence, as described in the following table. NOTE: The terms fusing and fixing are synonymous. 116 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Table 5-1 Sequence of operation Period Duration Waiting From the time the power is turned on, the ● door is closed, or when the product exits Sleep mode until the product is ready for ● printing Standby Initial rotation Printing Last rotation ENWW From the end of the waiting sequence or the last rotation until the formatter receives a print command or until the product is turned off From the time the formatter receives a print command until the paper enters the paper path From the time the first sheet of paper enters the paper path until the last sheet has passed through the fuser From the time the last sheet of paper exits the fuser until the motors stop rotating Description Heats the fuser sleeve Pressurizes the fuser pressure roller ● Detects the print cartridges ● Detects the home position for the primary transfer roller and the developing unit ● Cleans the secondary transfer roller ● The product is in the READY state. ● The product enters Sleep mode after the specified length of time. ● The product calibrates if it is time for an automatic calibration. ● Activates the high-voltage power supply ● Prepares each laser/scanner unit ● Warms the fuser to the correct temperature ● Forms the image on the photosensitive drums ● Transfers the toner to the paper ● Fuses the toner image onto the paper ● Performs calibration after a specified number of pages ● Moves the last printed sheet into the output bin ● Stops each laser/scanner unit ● Discharges the bias from the highvoltage power supply Basic operation 117 Engine-control system The engine-control system receives commands from the formatter and interacts with the other main systems to coordinate all product functions. The engine-control system consists of the following components: ● DC controller ● High-voltage power supply ● Low-voltage power supply Figure 5-2 Engine-control system Laser/scanner system Image-formation system Media-feed system Option 118 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW DC controller The DC controller controls the operational sequence of the printer. Figure 5-3 DC controller block diagram Fuser Laser/scanner Solenoids Table 5-2 Solenoids ENWW Component abbreviation Component name SL1 Primary transfer roller disengagement solenoid SL2 Duplex reverse solenoid SL3 Multipurpose-tray pickup solenoid SL4 Cassette pickup solenoid Engine-control system 119 Clutches Component abbreviation Component name CL1 Duplex re-pickup clutch Switches Table 5-3 Switches Component abbreviation Component name SW1, SW2 5V interlock switch SW3 24V interlock switch SW4 Power switch Test print switch 120 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Sensors Table 5-4 Sensors Component abbreviation Component name SR1 Drum home position sensor 1 SR2 Drum home position sensor 2 SR3 Drum home position sensor 3 SR5 Fuser (fixing) delivery sensor SR6 Delivery tray media full sensor SR7 Fuser (fixing) pressure release sensor SR8 TOP (top of page) sensor SR9 Cassette-media-stack surface sensor SR11 Developing home position sensor SR13 Cassette presence sensor SR14 Loop sensor 1 SR15 Loop sensor 2 SR17 Primary-transfer-roller disengagement sensor SR20 Cassette-media presence sensor SR21 MP-tray-media-presence sensor SR22 Duplex re-pickup sensor OHT sensor (in) OHT sensor (out) RD sensor (front) RD sensor (rear) Environmental sensor (temperature and humidity) Yellow toner-level sensor Magenta toner-level sensor Cyan toner-level sensor Black toner-level sensor Toner collection-box-full sensor Fuser (fixing) home-position sensor ENWW Engine-control system 121 Motors and fans The product has 11 motors and three fans. The motors drive the components in the paper-feed and image-formation systems. The fan motors cool the inside of the product. Table 5-5 Motors Abbreviation Name Purpose Type Failure detection M2 Fuser (fixing) motor Drives the Fuser (fixing) roller, the delivery roller, and the Fuser (fixing) pressure roller DC motor Yes M3 Drum motor 1 Drives the photosensitive drum (yellow/magenta), developing unit (yellow), and primary charging roller (yellow/ magenta) DC motor Yes M4 Drum motor 2 Drives the photosensitive drum (cyan), developing unit (magenta/cyan), and primary charging roller (cyan) DC motor Yes M5 Drum motor 3 Drives the photosensitive drum (black), developing unit (black), and ITB drive roller, and secondary transfer roller DC motor Yes M7 Lifter motor Drives the lifter for the cassette DC motor Yes M8 Cyan/black scanner motor Drives the scanner mirror in the cyan/black laser scanner DC motor Yes M9 Yellow/magenta scanner motor Drives the scanner mirror in the yellow/ magenta laser scanner DC motor Yes M10 Developing disengagement motor Drives the developing unit disengagement Stepping motor No M11 Duplex reverse motor Drives the duplex reverse roller and duplex feed roller Stepping motor No M12 Residual toner-feed motor Drives the residual toner feed screw DC motor Yes M13 Pickup motor Drives the cassette pickup roller, MP tray pickup roller, feed roller, registration roller, and re-pickup roller Stepping motor No 122 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Table 5-6 Fans Abbreviation Name Cooling area Type Speed FM1 Power supply fan Around the power supply unit Intake Full/half FM2 Cartridge fan Around the cartridges Intake Full/half FM3 Delivery fan Around the delivery unit Intake Full/half High-voltage power supply The high-voltage power supply delivers the high-voltage biases to the following components used to transfer toner during the image-formation process: ● Primary-charging roller (in the cartridge) ● Developing roller (in the cartridge) ● Primary-transfer roller ● Secondary-transfer roller Figure 5-4 High-voltage power supply circuits Y M C K The high-voltage power supply contains several separate circuits. ENWW Engine-control system 123 Table 5-7 High-voltage power supply circuits Circuit Description Primary-charging-bias generation DC negative bias is applied to the surface of the photosensitive drum to prepare it for image formation. Developing-bias generation DC negative bias adheres the toner to each photosensitive drum during the imageformation process. Primary-transfer-bias generation DC positive bias transfers the latent toner image from each photosensitive drum onto the ITB. Secondary-transfer-bias generation Two DC biases, one positive and one negative, transfer the toner from the ITB onto the paper. 124 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Low-voltage power supply The low-voltage power-supply circuit converts the AC power from the wall receptacle into the DC voltage that the product components use. The product has two low-voltage power-supplies for 110 Volt or 220 Volt input. Figure 5-5 Low-voltage power-supply circuit Fuser control circuit The low-voltage power supply converts the AC power into three DC voltages, which it then subdivides, as described in the following table. Table 5-8 Converted DC voltages ENWW Main DC voltage Sub-voltage Behavior +24 V +24VA Constantly supplied Engine-control system 125 Table 5-8 Converted DC voltages (continued) Main DC voltage Sub-voltage Behavior +24VB Interrupted when the front door or right door open Stopped during Sleep (powersave) mode +5 V +3.3 V +5VA Constantly supplied +5VC Interrupted when the front door or right door open 3.3V Constantly supplied 3.3VS Stopped during Sleep (powersave) mode Overcurrent/overvoltage protection The low-voltage power supply stops supplying the DC voltage to the product components whenever it detects excessive current or abnormal voltage from the power source. Safety For personal safety, the low-voltage power supply interrupts power to the fuser, the high-voltage power supply, and the motors when the front door or right door open. Voltage detection The printer detects the power supply voltage that is connected to the printer. The DC controller monitors the input voltage from the power source so it can control the voltage to the fuser. Sleep (powersave) mode Sleep mode conserves energy by stopping the power to several components when the product is idle. If the DC controller detects voltage that is too high when the product is in Sleep mode, it determines that the low-voltage power supply has failed, and it notifies the formatter. Low-voltage power supply failure The DC controller determines a low-voltage power supply failure and notifies the formatter when the low-voltage power supply does not supply +24 V. 126 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Fuser (fixing) control The fuser-control circuit controls the fuser temperature. The product uses an on-demand fusing method. Figure 5-6 Fuser (fixing) components FUSER HEATING CONTROL signal Fuser control circuit FUSER TEMPERATURE signal Fuser heater safety circuit Fuser sleeve Table 5-9 Fuser (fixing) components Type of component Abbreviation Name Function Heaters H1 Fuser heater Heats the fuser sleeve. Thermistors TH1 Main thermistor Each thermistor detects the center temperature of the fuser sleeve. TH2 Sub thermistor Each thermistor detects the side temperature of the fuser heater. For the fuser heater Controls the fuser-roller main heater (Contact type) TH3 Thermoswitches TP1 (Non-contact type) ENWW Engine-control system 127 Fuser (fixing) temperature-control circuit The temperatures of the two rollers in the fuser fluctuate according to the stage of the printing process. The DC controller sends commands to the fuser-control circuit to adjust temperatures. Figure 5-7 Fuser temperature-control circuit Fuser Fuser sleeve unit Fuser heater control circuit Fuser heater safety circuit Fuser Fuser heater safety circuit Fuser control circuit 128 Chapter 5 Theory of operation Fuser ENWW Fuser (fixing) over-temperature protection To protect the fuser from excessive temperatures, the product has four layers of protective functions. If one function fails, the subsequent functions should detect the problem. ● ● DC controller: When a thermistor or thermopile detects a temperature above a certain threshold, the DC controller interrupts power to the specific heater. Following are the thresholds for each component: ◦ TH1: 230° C (446° F) or higher ◦ TH2: 285° C (545° F) or higher ◦ TH3: 285° C (545° F) or higher Fuser (fixing)-heater safety circuit: If the DC controller fails to interrupt the power to the heaters at the prescribed temperatures, the fuser-heater safety circuit deactivates the triac-drive circuit and releases the relay, which causes the heaters to stop at slightly higher temperature thresholds. ◦ TH2: 290° C (554° F) or higher ◦ TH3: 290° C (554° F) or higher ● Current-detection protection circuit: If current flowing in each triac exceeds a specific value, the current-detection protection circuit deactivates the triac-drive circuit and releases the relay, which interrupts the power supply to the heaters. ● Thermoswitch: If the temperature in the heaters is abnormally high, and the temperature in the thermoswitches exceeds a specified value, the contact to the thermoswitch breaks. Breaking this contact deactivates the triac-drive circuit and releases the relay, which interrupts the power supply to the heaters. Following are the thresholds for each thermoswitch: ◦ TP1: 270° C (518° F) or higher NOTE: When the thermoswitches reach this temperature, the temperature on the fuser rollers is about 320° C (608° F). Fuser (fixing)-failure detection When the DC controller detects any of the following conditions, it determines that the fuser has failed. The DC controller then interrupts power to the fuser heaters and notifies the formatter. ● ● Abnormally high temperatures: Temperatures are too high for any of the following components, at any time: ◦ TH1: 230° C (446° F) or higher ◦ TH2: 285° C (545° F) or higher ◦ TH3: 285° C (545° F) or higher Abnormally low temperatures: Temperatures are too low at any of the following components after the product has initialized. ◦ TH1: 120° C (248° F) or lower ◦ TP2 or TP3: 100° C (212° F) or lower Or, the temperature drops in either of the thermopiles (TP1 and TP2) by 30° C (86° F) or more within a specified length of time. ENWW Engine-control system 129 ● Abnormal temperature rise: The DC controller determines an abnormal temperature rise if the detected temperature of TH1 does not rise 2° C within a specified time period after the fuser (fixing) motor is turned on, or if the detected temperature of the thermistors does not rise to a specified temperature for a specified time after the fuser (fixing) motor is turned on. ● Thermistor open: The DC controller determines a thermistor open if: ● ● ◦ The detected temperature of TH1 is kept at 12° C (53° F) or lower for a specified time after the fuser (fixing) motor is turned on. ◦ The detected temperature of TH2 is kept at 4° C (39° F) or lower for a specified time. ◦ The detected temperature of TH3 is kept at 4° C (39° F) or lower for a specified time. Drive-circuit failure: The DC controller determines a drive-circuit failure: ◦ If the detected power supply frequency is out of a specified range when the printer is turned on or during the standby period ◦ If the current detection circuit detects an out of specified current value Fuser (fixing) discrepancy: The DC controller determines a fuser type mismatch when it detects an unexpected fuser (fixing) unit presence signal. The product has two fusers for 110 V or 220 V input power. 130 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Laser/scanner system The laser/scanner system forms the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drums according to the VIDEO signals sent from the formatter. The product has two laser/scanners: one for yellow and magenta and the other for cyan and black. The formatter sends the DC controller instructions for the image of the page to be printed. The DC controller signals the lasers to emit light, and the laser beams pass through lenses and onto the scanner mirror, which rotates at a constant speed. The mirror reflects the beam onto the photosensitive drum in the pattern necessary for the image, exposing the surface of the drum so it can receive toner. Figure 5-8 Laser/scanner system ENWW Laser/scanner system 131 The DC controller determines that a laser/scanner has failed when any of the following conditions occurs: ● Laser failure: The detected laser intensity does not match a specified value when the product initializes. ● Beam-detect (BD) failure: The BD interval is outside a specified range during printing. ● Scanner-motor failure: The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation speed within a certain time after it begins rotating. 132 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Image-formation system The image-formation system creates the printed image on the paper. The system consists of the laser/ scanners, print cartridges, imaging drums, ITB, and fuser. Figure 5-9 Image-formation system Fuser Y M C K Laser/scanner Laser/scanner ENWW Image-formation system 133 Image-formation process The image-formation system consists of ten steps divided into six functional blocks. Figure 5-10 Image-formation process Fusing Fuser Y M C K Functional block Steps Description Latent image formation 1. Pre-exposure An invisible latent image forms on the surface of the photosensitive drums. 2. Primary charging 3. Laser-beam exposure Development 4. Development Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drums. Transfer 5. Primary transfer The toner image transfers to the ITB and subsequently to the paper. 6. Secondary transfer 7. Separation Fusing 8. Fusing The toner fuses to the paper to make a permanent image. ITB cleaning 9. ITB cleaning Residual toner is removed from the ITB. Drum cleaning 10. Drum cleaning Residual toner is removed from the photosensitive drums. 134 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Step 1: Pre-exposure Light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove any residual electrical charges from the drum surface. Figure 5-11 Pre-exposure Step 2: Primary charging The primary-charging roller contacts the photosensitive drum and charges the drum with negative potential. Figure 5-12 Primary charging ENWW Image-formation system 135 Step 3: Laser-beam exposure The laser beam strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum in the areas where the image will form. The negative charge neutralizes in those areas, which are then ready to accept toner. Figure 5-13 Laser-beam exposure Step 4: Development Toner acquires a negative charge as the developing cylinder contacts the developing blade. Because the negatively charged surface of the photosensitive drums have been neutralized where they have been struck by the laser beam, the toner adheres to those areas on the drums. The latent image becomes visible on the surface of each drum. Figure 5-14 Development Step 5: Primary transfer The positively charged primary-transfer rollers contact the ITB, giving the ITB a positive charge. The ITB attracts the negatively charged toner from the surface of each photosensitive drum, and the 136 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW complete toner image transfers onto the ITB, beginning with yellow, followed by magenta, cyan, and black. Figure 5-15 Primary transfer Step 6: Secondary transfer The paper acquires a positive charge from the secondary-transfer roller, and so it attracts the negatively charged toner from the surface of the ITB. The complete toner image transfers onto the paper. Figure 5-16 Secondary transfer ENWW Image-formation system 137 Step 7: Separation The stiffness of the paper causes it to separate from the ITB as the ITB bends. The static-charge eliminator removes excess charge from the paper to ensure that the toner fuses correctly. Figure 5-17 Separation Step 8: Fusing To create the permanent image, the paper passes through heated, pressurized rollers to melt the toner onto the page. Figure 5-18 Fusing Fuser sleeve Fuser heater 138 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Step 9: ITB cleaning The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the ITB. The residual toner feed screw deposits residual toner in the toner collection box. Figure 5-19 ITB cleaning Step 10: Drum cleaning Inside the print cartridge, the cleaning blade removes residual toner from the surface of the drum to prepare it for the next image. The waste toner falls into the hopper in the print cartridge. Figure 5-20 Drum cleaning Print cartridge The product has four print cartridges, one for each color. Each print cartridge contains a reservoir of toner and the following components: ENWW ● Photosensitive drum ● Developing roller ● Primary-charging roller Image-formation system 139 The DC controller rotates the drum motor to drive the photosensitive drum, developing roller, and the primary-charging roller. Figure 5-21 Print-cartridge system The DC controller rotates the drum motor to drive the photosensitive drum, developing unit, and primary charging roller. The memory tag is a non-volatile memory chip that stores information about the usage for the print cartridge. 140 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller notifies the formatter of an error if any of the following conditions exist: ● The memory tag fails to either read to or write from the DC controller ● The RD sensors detect a missing or incorrectly installed print cartridge. ● The accumulated print time reaches a specified time period or the cartridge runs out of toner. ● The toner level in any of the print cartridges drops below a certain level Developing-roller engagement and disengagement The product can print in full-color mode or in black-only mode. To print in black-only mode, the product disengages the developing rollers in the cyan, magenta, and yellow print cartridges. This maximizes the life of the cartridges. Figure 5-22 Developing-roller engagement and disengagement control Four developing units engaged Y Y M M C C K K Only the Bk developing unit engaged Y Y M M C C K K Four developing units disengaged Y Y M M C C K K The DC controller rotates the developing disengagement motor and changes the direction of the cam according to the instructions from the formatter for each print job. ENWW Image-formation system 141 When the product is turned on and at the end of each print job, all four of the developing rollers disengage from the photosensitive drums. If the next print job is full-color mode, each of the developing rollers engage. If the next print job is black-only mode, only the black developing roller engages. If the DC controller does not detect any output from the developing home-position sensor, it determines that the developing-disengagement motor has failed. Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit The ITB unit accepts the toner images from the photosensitive drums and transfers the completed image to the paper. The ITB unit has these main components: ● ITB ● ITB drive roller ● ITB-driven roller ● Primary-transfer rollers ● ITB cleaner The ITB motor drives the ITB drive roller, which rotates the ITB. The motion of the ITB causes the primary transfer rollers to rotate. The ITB cleaner cleans the ITB surface. Figure 5-23 ITB unit Y 142 Chapter 5 Theory of operation M C K ENWW Primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement Depending on the requirements of the print job, the primary-transfer rollers engage with the ITB so it can receive toner from the photosensitive drums. Table 5-10 Primary-transfer-roller engagement states All rollers disengaged The home position for the ITB unit All rollers engaged The state for a full-color print job Black roller engaged The state for a black-only print job The primary-transfer-roller disengagement motor rotates or reverses to place the primary-transfer-roller disengagement cam into one of three positions. The cam causes the transfer-roller slide plate to move to the right or left. This movement causes the primary-transfer rollers to move up to engage the ITB with the photosensitive drum or down to disengage it. If the DC controller does not receive the expected signal from the ITB home-position sensor when the primary-transfer-roller engages or disengages, but the primary-transfer-roller disengagement motor is ENWW Image-formation system 143 rotating, the DC controller determines that the primary-transfer-disengagement mechanism has failed, and notifies the formatter. FUSER MOTOR CONTROL Figure 5-24 Three states of primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement Four colors are disengaged Fuser motor Y Y M M C C Four colors are engaged K K Y Y M M C C K Only black is engaged K Y Y M M C C K K ITB cleaning The cleaning blade in the ITB cleaner scrapes the residual toner off the ITB surface. The drum motor (M5) drives the residual toner feed screw. The screw feeds the residual toner to the residual toner feed unit. The residual toner feed motor (M12) drives the residual toner feed screw. The residual toner feed 144 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW screw deposits the residual toner in the toner collection box. The DC control detects whether the toner collection box is full, using the toner collection-box-full sensor, and then notifies the formatter. Figure 5-25 ITB cleaning process Calibration The product calibrates itself to maintain excellent print quality. Calibration corrects color-misregistration and color-density variation. ENWW Image-formation system 145 During calibration, the product places a specific pattern of toner on the surface of the ITB. Sensors at the end of the ITB read the toner pattern to determine if adjustments are necessary. Figure 5-26 Toner patterns for calibration Color-misregistration control Internal variations in the laser/scanners can cause the toner images to become misaligned. The colormisregistration control corrects the following problems: ● Horizontal scanning start position ● Horizontal scanning magnification ● Vertical scanning start position The calibration occurs when any of the following occurs: ● A cartridge is replaced ● The temperature of the sub thermistor is 50 C (122 F) or lower when the product recovers from sleep mode after a specific number of pages print. ● A specified number of pages have printed. ● The formatter sends a command. ● The user requests a calibration by using the control-panel menus. If data from the color-misregistration and image-density sensors is outside a specified range when the product is turned on or when it is beginning the calibration sequence, the DC controller determines that these sensors have failed, and it notifies the formatter. 146 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Image-stabilization control Environmental changes or deterioration of the photosensitive drums and toner can cause variations in the image density. The image-stabilization control reduces these fluctuations. Table 5-11 Image-stabilization controls Environment change control The DC controller monitors environmental information from internal temperature and humidity sensors. The DC controller adjusts the high-voltage bias to accommodate environmental changes. This control occurs under the following circumstances: ● The product is turned on. ● The print cartridge is replaced. ● A change in environmental conditions occurs. The DC controller notifies the formatter when it encounters a communication error with the environmental sensor. Image density control (DMAX) Image halftone control (DHALF) This control corrects variations in image density related to deterioration of the photosensitive drum or the toner. The DC controller adjusts the high-voltage biases to correct the problem under the following conditions: ● The sub thermistor detects a temperature that is too low when the product is turned on. ● A print cartridge is replaced. ● A specified number of pages print after replacing the print cartridge. ● A specified number of pages have printed. ● The formatter sends a command ● The product recovers from sleep mode ● After a specific period of the completion of a print operation ● The environment is relatively charged. The formatter performs this control to calibrate the halftone, based on the halftonedensity measurements, under the following conditions: ● The formatter sends a command. ● DMAX is completed. The DC controller determines a RD sensor failure and notifies the formatter if it detects an out-ofspecified-data value from the RD sensor when the product is turned on or when the color misregistration control starts. ENWW Image-formation system 147 Pickup, feed, and delivery system The pickup, feed, and delivery system uses a series of rollers to move the paper through the product. Figure 5-27 Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system Y M C K Table 5-12 Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system Abbreviation Component SR5 Fuser (fixing) delivery sensor SR6 Delivery tray media full sensor SR7 Fuser (fixing) pressure release sensor SR8 TOP (top of page) sensor SR9 Cassette-media stack-surface sensor SR13 Cassette presence sensor SR14 Loop sensor 1 SR15 Loop sensor 2 SR20 Cassette media-presence sensor 148 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Table 5-12 Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system (continued) Abbreviation Component SR21 MP tray media-presence sensor SR22 Duplex re-pickup sensor (duplex models only) Figure 5-28 Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system Y M C K Table 5-13 Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system ENWW Abbreviation Component M2 Fuser (fixing) motor M5 Drum motor 3 M7 Lifter motor M11 Duplex reverse motor (duplex models only) M13 Pickup motor CL1 Duplex re-pickup clutch (duplex models only) Pickup, feed, and delivery system 149 Table 5-13 Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system (continued) Abbreviation Component SL2 Duplex reverse solenoid (duplex models only) SL3 Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid SL4 Cassette pickup solenoid Figure 5-29 Three main units of the pickup, feed, and delivery system Fuser/delivery block Duplex block Y M C K 150 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Pickup-and-feed unit The pickup-and-feed unit picks an individual sheet of paper from the multipurpose tray or the cassettes, carries it through the secondary-transfer unit, and feeds it into the fuser. Figure 5-30 Pickup and feed unit Y M C K ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 151 Cassette pickup The sequence of steps for the cassette-tray pickup operation is the following: 1. When the product starts or the tray closes, the lifting mechanism lifts the paper stack so it is ready. 2. After receiving a print command from the formatter, the DC controller rotates the pickup motor, which causes the cassette pickup roller, cassette feed roller, and cassette separation roller to rotate. 3. The DC controller drives the cassette pickup solenoid, which rotates the cassette pickup cam. As the pickup cam rotates, the pickup arm moves down, and the cassette pickup roller touches the surface of the paper stack. The cassette pickup roller then picks up one sheet of paper. Figure 5-31 Cassette-pickup mechanism NOTE: The lift-up operation lifts the lifting plate to keep the stack surface of the media at a pickup position. The lifting spring helps support the lifting plate depending on the media size and amount. 152 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Cassette-presence detection The cassette presence sensor is in the lifter drive unit. The sensor detects the cassette-presence sensor flag and determines whether the cassette is installed correctly. Figure 5-32 Cassette presence sensor Cassette lift operation The DC controller rotates the lifter motor (M7) and moves the lifter rack until the cassette media-stack surface sensor (SR9) detects it. The lifter lifts, and the lifting plate moves up to the position where the media can be picked up. The lift operation is performed by monitoring the cassette media-stack-surface sensor when the printer is turned on, when the cassette is installed, or as needed during a print operation. If the paper-stack surface sensor does not detect the paper within a specified time after the lifter motor begins rotating, the DC controller notifies the formatter that the lifter motor has failed. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 153 The DC controller lowers the lifting plate when no printing occurs to prevent media damage and pickup failure. If a print operation does not occur for a specified time, the DC controller reverses the lifter motor and moves the lifter rack until the cassette media-stack surface sensor stops detecting it. Figure 5-33 Cassette lift mechanism 154 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Cassette paper-presence detection The cassette media-presence sensor detects whether paper is in the cassette. Figure 5-34 Paper-level-detection mechanism Multifeed prevention In the cassette, a separation roller prevents multiple sheets of paper from entering the paper path. The cassette pickup roller drives the separation roller through a sheet of paper. The low friction force between the sheets weakens the driving force from the cassette pickup roller. Because some braking force is applied to the cassette separation roller, the weak rotational force of the pickup roller is not enough to rotate the separation roller. Therefore, the separation roller holds back any multiple-fed sheets, and one sheet of media is fed into the printer. Figure 5-35 Multifeed prevention Cassette pickup roller Cassette separation roller Media Lifting plate Separation roller does not rotate Normal feed ENWW Multiple feed Pickup, feed, and delivery system 155 Multipurpose tray pickup The multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor detects whether paper is in the tray. If no paper is present, the DC controller notifies the formatter. Printing does not occur until paper is in the tray. The sequence of steps for the multipurpose tray pickup operation as follows: 1. After receiving a print command from the formatter, the DC controller reverses the pickup motor, which causes the multipurpose tray separation roller to rotate. 2. The DC controller turns on the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid (SL3), causing the multipurpose tray pickup roller to rotate. 3. The multipurpose tray separation roller isolates a single sheet of paper in case more than one sheet was picked. The single sheet of paper feeds into the product. The MP-tray media-presence sensor (SR21) detects whether the media is present in the MP tray. No printing occurs if no media is loaded. Figure 5-36 Multipurpose tray pickup mechanism 156 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Paper feed After the pickup operation, the paper feeds through the product and into the fuser. 1. The paper passes through the feed rollers. The registration shutter aligns the paper correctly to prevent skewed printing. 2. The DC controller detects the leading edge of paper by the Top sensor (SR8) and controls the rotational speed of the pickup motor to align with the leading edge of image on the ITB. 3. The DC controller detects whether or not the media is overhead transparency, using the OHT sensor. 4. The toner image on the ITB transfers onto the media, which feeds to the fuser. Figure 5-37 Paper-feed mechanism ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 157 Skew-feed prevention The product can straighten the paper without slowing the feed operation. 1. As the paper enters the paper path, the leading edge strikes the registration shutter, which straightens the paper. The paper does not pass through the shutter . 2. The feed rollers keep pushing the paper, which creates a force on the leading edge against the registration shutter. 3. When the force is great enough, the registration shutter opens and the paper passes through. Figure 5-38 Skew-feed prevention 1 2 3 OHT detection The OHT sensor detects overhead transparencies. The OHT sensor is a transmission sensor that uses an LED. The DC controller determines a media mismatch and notifies the formatter when the media type differs from the media type detected by the OHT sensor. The DC controller turns the LED in the 158 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW OHT sensor on and off during the wait or initial rotation period. If the intensity of the light does not match the specified value, the DC controller determines that the OHT sensor has failed. Fusing and delivery unit The fusing and delivery unit fuses the toner onto the paper and delivers the printed page into the output bin. The following controls ensure optimum print quality: ● Loop control ● Pressure roller pressurization/depressurization control A sensor detects when the output bin is full, and the DC controller notifies the formatter. Figure 5-39 Fuser and delivery unit Fuser/delivery block Y M C K Loop control The loop control monitors the tension of the paper between the second-transfer roller and the fuser. ENWW ● If the fuser rollers rotate more slowly than the secondary transfer rollers, the paper warp increases and an image defect or paper crease occurs. ● If the fuser rollers rotate faster than the secondary transfer rollers, the paper warp decreases and the toner image fails to transfer to the paper correctly, causing color misregistration. Pickup, feed, and delivery system 159 To prevent these problems, the loop sensors, which are located between the secondary transfer rollers and the fuser rollers, detect whether the paper is sagging or is too taut. The DC controller adjusts the speed of the fuser motor. Figure 5-40 Loop-control mechanism 160 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Pressure-roller pressurization control To prevent excessive wear on the pressure roller and help with jam-clearing procedures, the pressure roller pressurizes only during printing and standby. The DC controller reverses the fuser motor. The fuser motor rotates the fuser pressure-release cam. Fuser motor FUSER PRESSURE RELEASE signal FUSER MOTOR CONTROL Figure 5-41 Pressure-roller pressurization control Fuser pressure release cam Fuser sleeve The pressure roller depressurizes under the following conditions: ● The product is turned off with the on/off switch ● Any failure occurs other than a fuser pressure-release mechanism failure ● During powersave mode ● When a paper jam is detected If the DC controller does not sense the fuser pressure-release sensor for a specified period after it reverses the fuser motor, it notifies the formatter that a fuser pressure-release mechanism failure has occurred. NOTE: The fuser remains pressurized if the power is interrupted when the power cord is removed or the surge protector is turned off, or if the fuser is removed without turning off the product. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 161 Duplexing unit The duplexing unit reverses the paper and feeds it through the paper path to print the second side. The duplexing unit consists of the following components: ● Duplexing-reverse unit: Installed on top of the product ● Duplexing-feed unit: Along the right side The DC controller controls the operational sequence of the duplex block. The DC controller drives each load, such as motors, solenoid, and clutch, depending on the duplex reverse unit and duplex feed unit controls. Figure 5-42 Duplexing unit 162 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Duplexing reverse and feed control The duplexing reverse procedure pulls the paper into the duplexing unit after it exits the fuser. The duplexing feed procedure moves the paper through the duplexer so it can enter the product paper path to print the second side of the page. 1. After the first side has printed, the duplexing flapper solenoid opens, which creates a paper path into the duplexing-reverse unit. 2. After the paper has fully entered the duplexing-reverse unit, the duplexing-reverse motor reverses and directs the paper into the duplexing-feed unit. 3. The duplexing re-pickup motor and duplexing feed motor move the paper into the duplexing repickup unit. 4. To align the paper with the toner image on the ITB, the duplexing re-pickup motor stops and the paper pauses. 5. The paper re-enters the paper path, and the second side prints. Duplex pickup operation The product has the following two duplex-media-feed modes depending on the media sizes: ● One-sheet mode: Prints one sheet that is printed on two sides in one duplex print operation ● Two-sheet mode: Prints two sheets that are printed on two-sides in one duplex print operation (maximum paper size is A4) The formatter specifies the duplex-media-feed mode. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 163 Jam detection The product uses the following sensors to detect the paper as it moves through the paper path and to report to the DC controller if the paper has jammed. ● Fuser (fixing) delivery sensor (SR5) ● TOP (top of page) sensor (SR8) ● Loop sensor 1 (SR14) ● Loop sensor 2 (SR15) ● Duplex re-pickup sensor (SR22) Figure 5-43 Jam detection sensors Y M C K The product determines that a jam has occurred if one of these sensors detects paper at an inappropriate time. The DC controller stops the print operation and notifies the formatter. Table 5-14 Jams that the product detects Jam Description Pickup delay jam 1 Cassette pickup: The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a specified period after the cassette pickup solenoid has turned on. Multipurpose tray pickup: The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a specified period after the multipurpose tray solenoid has turned on. Pickup stationary jam The TOP sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the paper within a specified time from when it detects the leading edge. Fuser delivery delay jam The fuser delivery paper-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a specified period after the TOP sensor detects the leading edge. 164 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Table 5-14 Jams that the product detects (continued) Jam Description Fuser delivery stationary jam The fuser delivery paper-feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the paper within a specified period after it detects the leading edge. Wrapping jam After detecting the leading edge of the paper, the fuser delivery paper-feed sensor detects the absence of paper, and it has not yet detected the trailing edge. Residual paper jam One of the following sensors detects paper presence during the initialization sequence: ● Fuser delivery paper-feed sensor ● TOP senosor ● Loop sensor 1 ● Loop sensor 2 Door open jam A door is open while paper is moving through the product. Duplexing re-pickup jam 1 The duplex re-pickup sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a specified period after the media reverse operation starts in the duplex reverse unit. Duplexing re-pickup jam 2 The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a specified period after the paper is re-picked. After a jam, some sheets of paper might remain inside the product. If the DC controller detects residual paper after a door closes or after the product is turned on, the product automatically clears itself of those residual sheets. ENWW Jam detection 165 Optional paper feeder The 1x500-sheet paper feeder is optionally installed at bottom of the printer. The paper feeder picks up the print media and feeds it to the printer. NOTE: These optional trays are not identical to the main cassette (Tray 2). Figure 5-44 Optional paper feeder Y M C K The paper-deck drivers contain a microcomputer and control the paper feeder. The paper-deck drivers receive commands from the DC controller. If the DC controller is unable to communicate with a paperdeck driver, it notifies the formatter that the optional paper feeders is not connected correctly. 166 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5-45 Signals for the paper feeder The input trays contain several motors, solenoids, sensors, and switches, as described in the following table. Table 5-15 Electrical components for the paper feeder Component type Abbreviation Component name Motors M1 Paper feeder motor M2 Paper feeder lift motor Solenoids SL1 Paper feeder pickup solenoid Sensors SR1 Paper-feeder media-stack surface sensor 1 SR2 Paper-feeder media-stack surface sensor 2 SR3 Paper-feeder cassette media-presence sensor SR4 Paper-feeder media-feed sensor SW1 Paper feeder cassette media-size switch SW2 Paper-feeder door switch Switches ENWW Optional paper feeder 167 Paper-feeder pickup and feed operation The paper feeder picks up one sheet from the paper-feeder cassette and feeds it to the product. Figure 5-46 Paper-feeder pickup and feed operation 168 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Paper-size detection and cassette-presence detection The paper-feeder cassette media-size switch (SW1) detects the size of paper loaded in the paper-feeder cassette. The paper-feeder driver determines the media size by monitoring the combination of the switches. Figure 5-47 Paper size detection Paper size Universal ENWW Paper-feeder cassette media-size switch settings Top switch Center switch Bottom switch On On On Optional paper feeder 169 Paper size Paper-feeder cassette media-size switch settings Top switch Center switch Bottom switch A5 On Off Off B5 Off On On Executive On Off On Letter Off On Off A4 Off Off On Legal On On Off No cassette Off Off Off The paper-feeder cassette media size switch (SW1) detects whether the paper-feeder cassette is installed correctly. The paper-feeder driver determines if a cassette is absent when all three switches are turned off. The paper-feeder driver determines a cassette presence when one of the switches is turned on. Paper-feeder cassette lift operation The cassette lift operation keeps the stack surface of paper at a specified height to maintain stable media feeding. The paper-feeder driver controls the paper-feeder lifter motor (M2) and monitors the paperfeeder media stack surface sensors (SR1, SR2) to adjust the stack height when the printer is turned on, when the printer recovers from sleep mode, when the paper-feeder cassette is installed or as needed during a print operation. The paper feeder has two paper-feeder media-stack surface sensors. The paper-feeder media stack surface sensor 1 detects the stack height during a print operation. The paperfeeder media-stack surface sensor 2 detects the stack height when the printer is turned on, when the 170 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW printer recovers from sleep mode and when the paper-feeder cassette is installed. The operational sequence of the lift operation is as follows: 1. The paper-feeder driver rotates the paper-feeder lifter motor to lift the lifting plate. 2. The paper-feeder driver stops the paper-feeder lifter motor when the paper-feeder media-stack surface sensor 2 detects the stack surface. 3. The paper-feeder driver rotates the lifter motor again when paper-feeder media stack surface 1 detects that the media surface is lowered during a print operation. Figure 5-48 Paper-feeder cassette lift The paper-feeder driver notifies the formatter if either of the paper-feeder media-stack surface sensors fails to detect the stack surface within a specified period from when a lift-up operation starts. Paper-feeder presence detection The paper-feeder cassette media-presence sensor (SR3) detects whether the paper is present in the paper-feeder cassette. ENWW Optional paper feeder 171 Paper-feeder multiple feed prevention The paper-feeder uses a separation roller to prevent multiple sheets of paper from entering the printer. The separation roller prevents multiple feeds of paper by allowing the paper-feeder separation roller to rotate in the same direction as the paper-feeder feed roller 1. The paper-feeder separation roller is equipped with the torque limiter. If multiple sheets of paper are picked up, the torque limiter takes control of the paper-feeder separation roller, and pushes the extra sheets back to the paper-feeder cassette. That way, only the top sheet is fed to the printer. Figure 5-49 Paper-feeder multiple feed prevention No-load Rotational force for paper-feeder separation roller: Pushes back the media into the paper-feeder cassette Rotational force for paper-feeder feed roller 1: Feeds media into the printer Normal feed Rotational force for paper-feeder separation roller: Pushes back the media into the paper-feeder cassette Rotational force for paper-feeder feed roller 1: Feeds media into the printer Multiple-feed The low friction force between the sheets weakens the rotational force from the paper-feeder feed roller 1. The paper-feeder separation roller rotates by its own rotational force and removes the extra sheet. 172 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Paper feeder jam detection The paper feeder uses the paper-feeder media-feed sensor (SR4) to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper has jammed. Figure 5-50 Jam detection Y M C K The paper-feeder driver identifies a jam if the sensor detects paper at a specified timing stored in the paper-feeder driver. The paper-feeder driver stops printing and notifies the formatter through the DC controller of the jam. The paper feeder detects the following jams: ENWW ● Pickup delay jam: The paper-feeder media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when the paper-feeder pickup solenoid is turned on. ● Pickup stationary jam: The paper-feeder media-feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of media within a specified time period from when the sensor detects the leading edge. Optional paper feeder 173 Scanning/image capture system system Optical assembly The scanner is a carriage-type platen scanner which includes the frame, glass, LED optics, and a scanner controller board (SCB) attached to the bottom of the assembly. The scanner has a sensor to detect legal-sized media and a switch to indicate when the ADF is opened. The ADF and control-panel assembly are attached to the scanner assembly. If the scanner fails, it can be replaced as a whole unit. The scanner replacement part does not include the ADF, SCB, or controlpanel assembly. The HP Color LaserJet CM3530 contains an interconnect board (ICB) which has an NVRAM component that is used to store critical engines values and formatter data. This NVRAM allows for simpler save/ restore process. When a formatter or DC controller is replaced, the critical engine values are copied from NVRAM on the ICB to the new component. Automatic document feed system If the ADF fails, it can be replaced as a whole-unit replacement part. Control panel The control panel is a USB connected device with its own diagnostic capabilities. Calibration of the control-panel touch screen does not require a special boot-key sequence. See . The control panel also includes a hardware integration pocket where third-party USB solutions, such as card readers, can be installed. Sensors in the ADF The ADF contains the following sensors: ● ADF-cover sensor. Detects whether the ADF cover is open or closed. ● Top-of-page sensor. Detects the top of the page before sending a page through the ADF and the end of the page after feeding/scanning is complete. ● Paper-present sensor. Detects whether a document is present in the ADF. If paper is present in the ADF when copies are made, the product scans the document using the ADF. If no paper is present when copies are made, the product scans the document using the scanner glass. 174 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ADF paper path The ADF feeds documents past the ADF glass for scanning. See Figure 5-51 ADF path for single-sided documents on page 175. Figure 5-51 ADF path for single-sided documents 1 Separation pad 5 ADF input tray 2 Pickup roller 6 Delivery/duplex-feed rollers 3 Stack stop 7 ADF glass 4 Pre-pick roller 8 ADF feed rollers For two-sided documents, the delivery rollers reverse the direction of each page to feed the second side of the document past the ADF glass. See Figure 5-52 ADF path for two-sided documents on page 176. ENWW Scanning/image capture system system 175 Figure 5-52 ADF path for two-sided documents 3 4 5 2 1 6 8 7 NOTE: Callouts in Figure 5-52 ADF path for two-sided documents on page 176 are identical to callouts in Figure 5-51 ADF path for single-sided documents on page 175 . Stapler The HP Color LaserJet CM3530fs MFP includes a stapler capable of stapling 20 sheets of (80 g/m2) (20 lb) paper. The stapler has an AC power connection to the LVPS. Because there are no logic connections to the product, error conditions or out-of-staples indications are not displayed on the control panel. 176 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 6 Removal and replacement NOTE: Your product might not appear exactly as the one shown in the photos in this chapter. Although some photos do not show the ADF/scanner unit, the procedures in this chapter are appropriate for your product. ENWW ● Introduction ● Removal and replacement strategy ● Electrostatic discharge ● Required tools ● Before performing service ● After performing service ● Post-service test ● DC controller PCA ● Parts removal order ● Customer self repair (CSR) components ● External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly ● Internal assemblies 177 Introduction This chapter describes the removal and replacement of field-replaceable units (FRUs) only. Replacing FRUs is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, notes and tips are included to provide directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures. HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level. Note the length, diameter, color, type, and location of each screw. Be sure to return each screw to its original location during reassembly. Incorrectly routed or loose wire harnesses can interfere with other internal components and can become damaged or broken. Frayed or pinched harness wires can be difficult to find. When replacing wire harnesses, always use the provided wire loops, lance points, or wire-harness guides and retainers. Removal and replacement strategy WARNING! Turn the product off, wait 5 seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the product. If this warning is not followed, severe injury can result, in addition to damage to the product. The power must be on for certain functional checks during troubleshooting. However, disconnect the power supply during parts removal. Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful when handling sheet-metal parts. CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also, do not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must fully seat all FFCs in their connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA. NOTE: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly. TIP: For clarity, some photos in this chapter show components removed that would not be removed to service the product. If necessary, remove the components listed at the beginning of a procedure before proceeding to service the product. Electrostatic discharge CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when removing product parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap. If an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part. Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product. 178 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Required tools ● #1 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm (6-inch) shaft length ● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm (6-inch) shaft length ● Small flat blade screwdriver ● Needle-nose pliers ● ESD mat or ESD strap (if one is available) ● Penlight (optional) CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver (callout 1). Do not use a pozidrive screwdriver (callout 2) or any motorized screwdriver. These can damage screws or screw threads. Figure 6-1 Phillips and pozidrive screwdriver comparison ENWW Required tools 179 Before performing service ● Remove all media from the product. ● Turn off the power using the power switch. ● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables. ● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part. ● Remove the print cartridges. See Print cartridges on page 186. ● Remove the tray cassette or cassettes. See Tray cassette on page 199. 180 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW After performing service ● Plug in the power cable. ● Reinstall the print cartridges. ● Reinstall the tray cassette or cassettes. ● If the optional paper feeder was installed, place the product on the feeder. NOTE: Your product might not appear exactly as the one shown in the photos in this chapter. Although some photos do not show the ADF/scanner unit, the procedures in this chapter are appropriate for your product. ENWW After performing service 181 Post-service test Perform the following test to verify that the repair or replacement was successful. NOTE: Your product might not appear exactly as the one shown in the photos in this chapter. Although some photos do not show the ADF/scanner unit, the procedures in this chapter are appropriate for your product. Print-quality test 1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps. 2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper. 3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product. 4. Verify that the expected startup sounds occur. 5. Print a configuration page, and then verify that the expected printing sounds occur. 6. Print a demo page, and then verify that the print quality is as expected. 7. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations. 8. If necessary, restore any customer-specified settings. 9. Clean the outside of the product with a damp cloth. Copy-quality test 1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps. 2. Ensure that the input tray contains clean, unmarked paper. 3. Attach the power cord, and then turn on the product. 4. Verify that the expected start-up sounds occur. 5. Print a configuration page, and then verify that the expected printing sounds occur. 6. Place the configuration page in the ADF. 7. Print a copy job, and then verify the results. 8. Place the configuration page on the scanner glass. 9. Print a copy job, and then verify the results. 10. Clean the outside of the product with a damp cloth. 182 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW DC controller PCA Figure 6-2 DC controller PCA J126 Table 6-1 DC controller connectors ENWW J100: 24 v from low-voltage power supply (LVPS) and interlock J114: HVPS lower J126: memory tag connector J101: LVPS J115: fuser sensors J127: pre-exposure LEDs (rear), SR17, SL1 J105: interconnect board (ICB) J116: HVPS upper J130: registration density (RD) sensors (front and rear) J106: 500-sheet feeder, developing home position, laser motors J117: fuser motor J131: pickup motor J107: duplex sensor, tray 1 solenoid, paper present sensor J118: 5 v interlock J133: not used J108: environmental sensor J119: LVPS fan J134: not used J109: duplex clutch, overhead transparency (OHT) in, top-of-page sensor J120: drum motor 1 and drum motor 2 J137: toner collection unit (TCU) full, TCU motor, toner level detection J110: YM laser J121: drum motor 3, drum position 1,2,3 J138: 24 v to HVPS lower J111: CK laser J122: OHT out J139: fuser sensors J112: pre-exposure LEDs (front) J123: pressure release, bin full, fuser delivery J140: lift motor, tray present, stack surface J113: 24 v to high-voltage power supply (HVPS) upper J124: 24 v to scanner-control board (SCB) J143: 24 v present from LVPS DC controller PCA 183 Parts removal order Figure 6-3 Parts removal order (1 of 2) 184 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6-4 Parts removal order (2 of 2) ENWW Parts removal order 185 Customer self repair (CSR) components NOTE: Your product might not appear exactly as the one shown in the photos in this chapter. Although some photos do not show the ADF/scanner unit, the procedures in this chapter are appropriate for your product. Print cartridges CAUTION: If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 1. Open the front door. Make sure that the door is completely open. Figure 6-5 Remove the print cartridge (1 of 2) 186 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Grasp the print-cartridge handle and pull out to remove. CAUTION: Do not touch the green roller. Doing so can damage the cartridge. Do not expose the cartridge to strong light. Cover the cartridge with a sheet of paper to protect it from light. Reinstallation tip Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks into place. Figure 6-6 Remove the print cartridge (2 of 2) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 187 Stapler cartridge Open the stapler door, and then remove the stapler cartridge. Figure 6-7 Remove the stapler cartridge 188 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Duplex-reverse guide 1. Grasp the duplex-reverse guide and pull it away from the product to release it. Figure 6-8 Remove the duplex-reverse guide (1 of 2) 2. Remove the guide. Figure 6-9 Remove the duplex-reverse guide (2 of 2) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 189 Toner-collection unit NOTE: The toner-collection unit is designed for a single use. Do not try to empty the toner-collection unit and reuse it. Doing so could cause toner to spill inside the product and result in reduced print quality. For recycling information, see the product user guide. 1. Open the front door. Make sure that the door is completely open. Figure 6-10 Remove the toner-collection unit (1 of 4) 2. Grasp the blue label at the top of the toner-collection unit and remove it from the product. Reinstallation tip Insert the bottom of the replacement unit into the product first and then push the top of the unit until it clicks into place. If the toner-collection unit is installed incorrectly, the front door will not close completely. Figure 6-11 Remove the toner-collection unit (2 of 4) 190 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. To prevent toner spills, place the blue cap (callout 1) over the blue opening at the top of the unit (callout 2). Figure 6-12 Remove the toner-collection unit (3 of 4) 2 1 Figure 6-13 Remove the toner-collection unit (4 of 4) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 191 Formatter PCA CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. 1. Turn the product off and disconnect the power and interface cable or interface cables. 2. Unscrew the formatter thumb screws, and then firmly pull the formatter from the product. Place the formatter on a clean, flat, grounded surface. Figure 6-14 Remove the formatter NOTE: When reinstalling the formatter, push firmly on the right side to make sure the formatter is seated. 192 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Memory DIMM Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. Remove the memory DIMM CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. NOTE: See Enable memory for Windows on page 194 after installing a new memory DIMM. 1. Place the formatter on a clean, flat, grounded surface. 2. Release on tab, and raise the hard drive mounting bracket to access the memory DIMM. Figure 6-15 Remove the memory DIMM (1 of 2) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 193 3. Spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM slot. Lift the DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out. Reinstallation tip Hold the DIMM by the edges. Align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the metal contacts are not visible. Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM. Figure 6-16 Remove the memory DIMM (2 of 2) Enable memory for Windows Use the following procedure to enable the memory if you are installing a new DIMM. 1. Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the default Start menuview): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. -orWindows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the Classic Start menuview): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. -orWindows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware and Sound click Printer. 2. Right-click the driver icon, and then select Properties. 3. Click the Device Settings tab. 4. Expand the area for Installable Options. 5. Select the total amount of memory installed in the product. 6. Next to Automatic Configuration, select Update Now. 7. Click OK. 194 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Hard drive and Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) cable Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. Remove the hard drive and SATA cable CAUTION: 1. ESD sensitive component. Disconnect one connector. CAUTION: Use your finger to secure the connector base to the PCA. The connector base can be dislodged and damaged when the connector is removed. Figure 6-17 Remove the hard drive and SATA cable (1 of 3) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 195 2. Disconnect one connector and release the wire harnesses from the guide. Figure 6-18 Remove the hard drive and SATA cable (2 of 3) 3. Release one tab and then slide the hard drive toward the bottom of the formatter to release it. Remove the hard drive. NOTE: If necessary, disconnect the SATA cable from the hard drive. Figure 6-19 Remove the hard drive and SATA cable (3 of 3) 196 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Fax PCA and cable Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. Remove the fax PCA and cable CAUTION: 1. ESD sensitive component. Disconnect one connector. Figure 6-20 Remove the fax PCA and cable (1 of 2) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 197 2. Release one tab, and then rotate the fax PCA away from the formatter to release it. Remove the fax PCA. NOTE: If necessary, disconnect the cable from the fax PCA. Figure 6-21 Remove the fax PCA and cable (2 of 2) 2 198 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 1 ENWW Tray cassette NOTE: Use this procedure to remove the Tray 2 or optional Tray 3 cassette. 1. Pull the tray straight out of the product until it stops. Figure 6-22 Remove the tray cassette (1 of 2) 2. Carefully lift up on the tray to release it, and then remove the tray. Figure 6-23 Remove the tray cassette (2 of 2) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 199 Fuser CAUTION: The fuser might be hot. Allow enough time after turning off the product power for the fuser to cool. 1. Open the right-door assembly. Figure 6-24 Remove the fuser (1 of 2) 2. Grasp the handles and squeeze the blue release levers. Pull the fuser straight out of the product to remove it. Figure 6-25 Remove the fuser (2 of 2) 200 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Pickup roller (Tray 2) CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. 1. Look up into the Tray 2 cavity (where the cassette would be installed), and pull down to release the blue roller-locking lever. Reinstallation tip When the roller is reinstalled, rotate the roller shaft several times to make sure that the shaft correctly engages the drive mechanism. You should hear a click when the shaft engages the drive mechanism. Figure 6-26 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 2) (1 of 4) 2. Pull the roller toward the front of the product to release the rear of the roller shaft. Figure 6-27 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 2) (2 of 4) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 201 3. Rotate the roller shaft down and away from the product, and then slide the roller toward the rear of the product to release the front of the roller shaft. Figure 6-28 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 2) (3 of 4) 4. Remove the pickup roller. Reinstallation tip Make sure that the roller is orientated correctly when it is reinstalled (the large white collar should be positioned toward the front of the product. Figure 6-29 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 2) (4 of 4) 202 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Pickup and feed rollers (Tray 3) CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. 1. Locate the Tray 3 pickup and feed rollers. TIP: The feeder is shown front side up in this procedure for clarity. You do not have to separate the product from the feeder to remove these rollers. Remove the cassette, and then reach up into the cavity to remove the rollers. Figure 6-30 Remove the Pickup and feed rollers (Tray 3) (1 of 2) 2. Release three tabs (callout 1), and then remove the rollers. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the rollers, make sure that the rollers snap into place. Figure 6-31 Remove the Pickup and feed rollers (Tray 3) (2 of 2) 1 ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 203 Separation roller (Tray 2) CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. NOTE: Remove the Tray 2 cassette if not already removed for service. See Tray cassette on page 199. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the separation roller assembly (callout 2). Figure 6-32 Remove the separation roller (Tray 2) 1 2 204 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Secondary transfer roller CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause image quality problems. 1. Open the right-door assembly. Figure 6-33 Remove the transfer roller (1 of 3) 2. Use the blue lever (callout 1) to lower the secondary transfer assembly. Figure 6-34 Remove the transfer roller (2 of 3) 1 ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 205 3. Grasp the roller shaft collars, and lift the transfer roller off of the product. Figure 6-35 Remove the transfer roller (3 of 3) Reinstall the transfer roller When you reinstall the transfer roller, make sure that the pins on the shaft collars (callout 1) align with the holes in the mounting assembly. Figure 6-36 Reinstall the transfer roller 1 206 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Secondary transfer assembly The secondary transfer assembly includes the transfer roller. 1. Open the right-door assembly. 2. Use the blue lever (callout 1) to lower the secondary transfer assembly. Figure 6-37 Remove the transfer roller (2 of 3) 1 3. Push the pin on the release-lever side of the assembly toward the inside of the product to release it, and then lift the assembly up. Figure 6-38 Remove the secondary transfer assembly (1 of 2) 1 ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 207 4. Pull the assembly straight out of the product to remove it. Figure 6-39 Remove the secondary transfer assembly (2 of 2) Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly Press and hold down the blue release lever when you reinstall the assembly. Figure 6-40 Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly 208 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) CAUTION: Do not touch the black-plastic belt. Skin oils and fingerprints on the belt can cause printquality problems. Always place the ITB on a flat surface in a safe and protected location. 1. Open the right-door assembly. 2. Use the blue lever (callout 1) to lower the secondary transfer assembly. Figure 6-41 Remove the intermediate transfer belt (1 of 3) 1 3. Grasp the small handles on the ITB and then pull the ITB out of the product until two large handles expand along the right- and left-side of the ITB. Figure 6-42 Remove the intermediate transfer belt (2 of 3) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 209 4. Grasp the large handles on the ITB and then pull the ITB straight out of the product to remove it. CAUTION: The ITB is a sensitive component. Be careful when handling the ITB so that it is not damaged. Always place the ITB in a safe and protected location. Figure 6-43 Remove the intermediate transfer belt (3 of 3) Reinstallation tip If you are installing a replacement ITB, make sure that you remove all of the packing tape (callout 1) and the protective cover sheet (callout 2). 2 1 210 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Front-door assembly 1. Open the front door. Figure 6-44 Remove the front-door assembly (1 of 2) 2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the front-door assembly. NOTE: A small sheet-metal bracket on the left side of the door is not captive. Do not lose the bracket when you remove the screw. Figure 6-45 Remove the front-door assembly (2 of 2) 1 3. ENWW If you are installing a replacement front-door assembly, install the HP name tag and the appropriate product model number tag on the assembly. Customer self repair (CSR) components 211 Automatic document feeder (ADF) NOTE: After removing the ADF assembly, place it on a clean, dry, and smooth surface. You must calibrate the ADF and scanner after installing the ADF. See Calibrate a replacement ADF assembly on page 214. 1. Release two thumb screws, and then disconnect one connector. Figure 6-46 Remove the ADF assembly (1 of 4) 2. Open the ADF. Figure 6-47 Remove the ADF assembly (2 of 4) 212 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Lift the ADF straight up until it stops, and then slightly tilt it toward the rear of the product. Continue lifting the ADF straight up to remove it. Figure 6-48 Remove the ADF assembly (3 of 4) 4. Remove the ADF. Figure 6-49 Remove the ADF assembly (4 of 4) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 213 Calibrate a replacement ADF assembly 1. On the control-panel Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch Calibrate Scanner. 4. Touch Calibrate to print the first pass of the calibration target. 5. Follow the instructions on the control-panel display. For more information, see Calibrate the product on page 430. 214 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW ADF roller assembly and separation pad CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. 1. Open the ADF jam door. Figure 6-50 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (1 of 5) 2. Lift the green handle. Figure 6-51 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (2 of 5) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 215 3. Push the blue button. Figure 6-52 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (3 of 5) 4. Remove the ADF roller assembly. Figure 6-53 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (4 of 5 ) 216 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the separation-pad assembly (callout 2). TIP: Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to remove these screws. Figure 6-54 Remove the ADF roller assembly and separation pad (5 of 5) 2 1 Reinstall the ADF roller assembly Securely attach the ADF roller assembly to the blue hooks. Figure 6-55 Reinstall the ADF roller assembly ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 217 Control-panel overlay 1. Gently pull up on the control-panel overlay. Figure 6-56 Remove the control-panel overlay (1 of 2) 2. Remove the control-panel overlay. Figure 6-57 Remove the control-panel overlay (2 of 2) 218 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Control-panel assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Control-panel overlay. See Control-panel overlay on page 218. Remove the control-panel assembly 1. Release six tabs. Figure 6-58 Remove the control-panel assembly (1 of 3) 2. Pull the control-panel assembly toward the front of the product and rotate it up. Figure 6-59 Remove the control-panel assembly (2 of 3) ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 219 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the control-panel assembly. Figure 6-60 Remove the control-panel assembly (3 of 3) 1 220 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Right door (optional paper feeder) 1. Open the right door. Figure 6-61 Remove the right door; optional paper feeder (1 of 3) 2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the stopper toward the right side of the product to remove it. Figure 6-62 Remove the right door; optional paper feeder (2 of 3) 1 ENWW Customer self repair (CSR) components 221 3. Support the door, and then release the door-retainer arm at the bottom of the door. Raise the door to release the lower hinge pin, and then remove the door. Figure 6-63 Remove the right door; optional paper feeder (3 of 3) 222 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly Identification and location NOTE: Your product might not appear exactly as the one shown in the photos in this chapter. Although some photos do not show the ADF/scanner unit, the procedures in this chapter are appropriate for your product. Figure 6-64 External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly; identification and location 1 2 3 12 4 11 15 10 5 13 14 9 6 8 16 7 Table 6-2 External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly; identification and location ENWW Item Description 1 Front-top cover (see Front-top cover on page 261) 2 Right-top cover (see Right-top cover on page 258) 3 Right-rear cover (see Right-rear cover on page 231) 4 Right-door assembly (see Right-door assembly on page 227) 5 Right-front cover (see Right-front cover on page 239) 6 Left-upper cover (see Left-upper cover on page 247) 7 Left cover (seeLeft cover on page 233) 8 Rear cover (see Rear cover on page 238) External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 223 Table 6-2 External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly; identification and location (continued) Item Description 9 Rear-upper cover (see Rear-upper cover on page 236) 10 Tray cassette (see Tray cassette on page 199) 11 Front-door assembly (see Front-door assembly on page 211) 12 Front-upper cover (see Front-upper cover on page 225) 13 Control-panel assembly (see Control-panel assembly on page 219) 14 Control-panel overlay (see Control-panel overlay on page 218) 15 Automatic Document Feeder (see ADF roller assembly and separation pad on page 215) 16 Scanner (see Scanner assembly on page 242) 224 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Front-upper cover 1. Open the right door and front door. Figure 6-65 Remove the front-upper cover (1 of 4) 2. Remove one screw. Figure 6-66 Remove the front-upper cover (2 of 4) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 225 3. Remove one screw. Figure 6-67 Remove the front-upper cover (3 of 4) 4. Lift the cover up, and then remove the front-upper cover. NOTE: The cover might be difficult to remove. It might require some flexing to release it. Figure 6-68 Remove the front-upper cover (4 of 4) 226 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Right-door assembly 1. Open the right-door assembly Figure 6-69 Remove the right-door assembly (1 of 8) 2. Close the secondary transfer assembly. Figure 6-70 Remove the right-door assembly (2 of 8) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 227 3. Remove three screws (callout 1). Figure 6-71 Remove the right-door assembly (3 of 8) 1 4. Carefully release one link arm. Figure 6-72 Remove the right-door assembly (4 of 8) 228 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Remove one screw (callout 2), and then remove the cover (callout 3). Figure 6-73 Remove the right-door assembly (5 of 8) 3 2 6. Disconnect two connectors (callout 4), and then release the wire harness from the guide (callout 5). TIP: It is easier to disconnect the lower connector if you first remove the wire harnesses from the guide. Figure 6-74 Remove the right-door assembly (6 of 8) 4 5 ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 229 7. Remove two screws (callout 6). Figure 6-75 Remove the right-door assembly (7 of 8) 6 8. Remove the right-door assembly. Figure 6-76 Remove the right-door assembly (8 of 8) 230 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Right-rear cover 1. Open the right-door assembly. Figure 6-77 Remove the right-rear cover (1 of 3) 2. Remove two screws (callout 1) and release one tab (callout 2). Figure 6-78 Remove the right-rear cover (2 of 3) 2 1 ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 231 3. Rotate the bottom of the cover away from the product, and then remove the cover. Figure 6-79 Remove the right-rear cover (3 of 3) 232 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Left cover 1. Remove four screws (callout 1). Figure 6-80 Remove the left cover (1 of 5) 1 2. Release the rear edge of the cover, and slightly separate the cover from the product. Figure 6-81 Remove the left cover (2 of 5) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 233 3. The figure below shows the cover removed so that you can see the tab locations. Before proceeding, note the location of the mounting tabs. CAUTION: One tab (callout 2) is easily damaged when removing the cover. Be careful when removing the cover. Figure 6-82 Remove the left cover (3 of 5) 2 4. Use your thumb to press in on the lower-front portion of the cover (near the dashed circle in the figure below), and then slightly slide the cover away from the front door to release one tab. CAUTION: You must flex the cover enough to release the front edge of the cover, but do not damage the tab at the bottom-front edge of the cover. See callout 2 in Figure 6-82 Remove the left cover (3 of 5) on page 234. Figure 6-83 Remove the left cover (4 of 5) 2 1 234 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Slide the cover toward the rear of the product and rotate it away from the product and then remove the cover. Figure 6-84 Remove the left cover (5 of 5) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 235 Rear-upper cover 1. Release two thumb screws, and then disconnect one connector. Figure 6-85 Remove the rear-upper cover (1 of 4) 2. Remove two screws. Figure 6-86 Remove the rear-upper cover (2 of 4) 236 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Rotate the rear-upper cover away from the product (callout 1), and then slide it toward the right (callout 2) to release one tab. Figure 6-87 Remove the rear-upper cover (3 of 4) 1 2 4. Remove the rear-upper cover. Figure 6-88 Remove the rear-upper cover (4 of 4) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 237 Rear cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. Remove the rear cover 1. Remove eight screws (callout 1). Figure 6-89 Remove the rear cover (1 of 2) 1 2. Slide the cover toward the fan side of the product, and then remove the rear cover. Figure 6-90 Remove the rear cover (2 of 2) 238 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Right-front cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Front-upper cover. See Front-upper cover on page 225. Remove the right-front cover NOTE: Be careful. When removing the cover, do not dislodge the power button. If the button is dislodged, see Reinstall the power button on page 241 to reinstall it. 1. Remove one screw (callout 1). Figure 6-91 Remove the right-front cover (1 of 5) 1 2. Remove two screws (callout 2). Figure 6-92 Remove the right-front cover (2 of 5) 2 ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 239 3. Before you proceed, take note of the tab locations at the bottom of the cover. Figure 6-93 Remove the right-front cover (3 of 5) 4. Pull down on the cover to release three tabs (callout 3). TIP: It might be easier if you position the product at the edge of the work surface so that there is a space for the cover to slide downward. Or, you might try inserting a small flat blade screwdriver behind the cover, and carefully pry the cover away from the product as you pull down on the cover to release the tabs. Figure 6-94 Remove the right-front cover (4 of 5) 3 240 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Rotate the bottom of the cover away from the product, and then pull down on the cover to remove it. Figure 6-95 Remove the right-front cover (5 of 5) Reinstall the power button Snap the power button into the holders on the cover. Make sure that the spring is correctly installed. Figure 6-96 Reinstall the power button ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 241 Scanner assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Control-panel overlay. See Control-panel overlay on page 218 ● Control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 219. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. Remove the scanner assembly 1. Remove two screws. Figure 6-97 Remove the scanner assembly (1 of 6) 2. Remove two screws. Figure 6-98 Remove the scanner assembly (2 of 6) 242 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Lift the right side of the scanner assembly, and then move it slightly to the rear. Figure 6-99 Remove the scanner assembly (3 of 6) 2 1 4. Place the scanner assembly on top of the base. Figure 6-100 Remove the scanner assembly (4 of 6) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 243 5. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two thumb screws (callout 2), and then release one cable (callout 3). Figure 6-101 Remove the scanner assembly (5 of 6) 1 2 6. 3 Remove the scanner assembly. Figure 6-102 Remove the scanner assembly (6 of 6) 244 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Delivery cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Control-panel overlay. See Control-panel overlay on page 218. ● Control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 219. ● Front-upper cover. See Front-upper cover on page 225. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. ● Right-top cover. See Right-top cover on page 258. Remove the delivery cover 1. Remove three screws. Figure 6-103 Remove the delivery cover (1 of 3) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 245 2. Lift up (callout 1) and slide the delivery cover (callout 2). Figure 6-104 Remove the delivery cover (2 of 3) 2 1 3. Remove the delivery cover. Figure 6-105 Remove the delivery cover (3 of 3) 246 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Left-upper cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Control-panel overlay. See Control-panel overlay on page 218. ● Control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 219. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. Remove the left-upper cover 1. Remove one screw (callout 1) and one tab (callout 2). Figure 6-106 Remove the left-upper cover (1 of 2) 2 1 ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 247 2. Remove the left-upper cover. Figure 6-107 Remove the left-upper cover (2 of 2) 248 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Control-panel overlay. See Control-panel overlay on page 218. ● Control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 219. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover 1. Open the stapler door, and then remove the stapler cartridge. Figure 6-108 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (1 of 13) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 249 2. Remove two screws. Figure 6-109 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (2 of 13) 3. Slide the cover toward the front of the product while releasing two tabs. Figure 6-110 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (3 of 13) 250 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Slighty raise the cover and then release one tab. Figure 6-111 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (4 of 13) 5. Rotate the cover up, and then remove the cover. Figure 6-112 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (5 of 13) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 251 6. Remove one screw. Figure 6-113 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (6 of 13) 7. Remove two screws. Figure 6-114 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (7 of 13) 252 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 8. Remove one screw. Figure 6-115 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (8 of 13) 9. Release one tab. Figure 6-116 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (9 of 13) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 253 10. Rotate the cover. Figure 6-117 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (10 of 13) 11. Disconnect one connector. Figure 6-118 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (11 of 13) 254 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 12. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal cover (callout 2). Figure 6-119 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (12 of 13) 2 1 13. Separate the stapler power supply from the cover, and then remove the cover. Figure 6-120 Remove the front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover (13 of 13) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 255 Reinstall the right-side stapler cover 1. Insert one tab. Figure 6-121 Reinstall the right-side stapler cover (1 of 3) 2. Carefully bend the right-upper cover A around the chassis. Figure 6-122 Reinstall the right-side stapler cover (2 of 3) 256 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Insert three tabs (callout 1) into three slots (callout 2). Figure 6-123 Reinstall the right-side stapler cover (3 of 3) 2 1 ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 257 Right-top cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Automatic document feeder (ADF). See Automatic document feeder (ADF) on page 212 ● Control-panel overlay. See Control-panel overlay on page 218. ● Control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 219. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. Remove the right-top cover 1. Remove four screws. Figure 6-124 Remove the right-top cover (1 of 5) 258 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Release one tab. Figure 6-125 Remove the right-top cover (2 of 5) 3. Release three tabs. Figure 6-126 Remove the right-top cover (3 of 5) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 259 4. Release two tabs. Figure 6-127 Remove the right-top cover (4 of 5) 5. Remove the right-top cover. Figure 6-128 Remove the right-top cover (5 of 5) 260 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Front-top cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Front-upper cover. See Front-upper cover on page 225. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. Remove the front-top cover 1. Remove one screw (callout 1). Figure 6-129 Remove the front-top cover (1 of 2) 1 2. Slide the cover toward the left side of the product to release it, and then remove the cover. Figure 6-130 Remove the front-top cover (2 of 2) ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 261 Rear-top cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. ● Delivery cover. See Delivery cover on page 245. ● Left-upper cover. See Left-upper cover on page 247. ● Front-top cover. See Front-top cover on page 261. Remove the rear-top cover 1. Release the stapler power supply cable and one wire harness from the retainers (callout 1). NOTE: You might have to disconnect one end of the power supply cable to release it from the retainers. Figure 6-131 Remove the rear-top cover (1 of 2) 1 262 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the cover. Figure 6-132 Remove the rear-top cover (2 of 2) 2 ENWW External panels, covers, doors, and scanner assembly 263 Internal assemblies TIP: For clarity, some photos in this chapter show components removed that would not be removed to service the product. If necessary, remove the components listed at the beginning of a procedure before proceeding to service the product. Stapler assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Automatic document feeder (ADF) assembly. See Automatic document feeder (ADF) on page 212. ● Control-panel overlay. See Control-panel overlay on page 218. ● Control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 219. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. ● Front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover. See Front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover on page 249. Remove the stapler assembly 1. Remove two screws. Figure 6-133 Remove the stapler assembly (1 of 2) 264 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Lift up (callout 1) and remove the stapler assembly (callout 2). Figure 6-134 Remove the stapler assembly (2 of 2) 2 1 Reinstall the stapler assembly Insert the hooks on the stapler assembly (callout 1) into the chassis (callout 2), and then slide the stapler assembly down to engage the hooks. Figure 6-135 Reinstall the stapler assembly 2 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 265 Stapler power supply Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Automatic document feeder (ADF) assembly. See Automatic document feeder (ADF) on page 212. ● Control-panel overlay. See Control-panel overlay on page 218. ● Control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 219. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. ● Front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover. See Front stapler cover and right-side stapler cover on page 249. Remove the stapler power supply Disconnect one connector, and then remove the power supply. Figure 6-136 Remove the stapler power supply 266 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Interconnect board (ICB) WARNING! Do not remove the ICB from a product and then install it into a different product. Failure to follow this warning will result in severe damage to that product and cause it to be unusable. HP recommends that if you remove and replace the ICB, you should destroy the discarded ICB so that it can not accidentally be installed in a different product. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. Remove the ICB NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see DC controller PCA on page 183. 1. Disconnect one connector (callouts 1; J105), and then remove one screw (callout 2). Figure 6-137 Remove the ICB (1 of 3) 2 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 267 2. Carefully rotate and slide the ICB up and away from the chassis, and then disconnect one connector (callout 3). Figure 6-138 Remove the ICB (2 of 3) 3 3. Remove the ICB. Figure 6-139 Remove the ICB (3 of 3) 268 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstall the ICB The ICB bracket (callout 1) must be properly engaged on the chassis (callout 2). Figure 6-140 Reinstall the ICB 1 2 ENWW Internal assemblies 269 DC controller PCA and tray Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. Remove the DC controller PCA and tray CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part. TIP: To access components behind the DC controller PCA, remove the PCA and the sheet-metal tray together. Disconnect all of the connectors on the PCA, and then remove five screws and the bracket, see Figure 6-141 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (1 of 4) on page 270 and Figure 6-144 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (4 of 4) on page 272. 1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal bracket (callout 2). Figure 6-141 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (1 of 4) 2 1 270 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect all the connectors. Reinstallation tip The connector locations J133 and J134 are not used. Figure 6-142 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (2 of 4) 3. Remove four screws (callout 3), and then remove the DC controller PCA. Figure 6-143 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (3 of 4) 3 ENWW Internal assemblies 271 4. If necessary, remove four screws (callout 4), remove the wire guide (callout 5), and then remove the sheet-metal tray. Figure 6-144 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (4 of 4) 4 5 272 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. NOTE: If you are removing the power supply for internal product access, it is recommended that you leave the ICB installed on the power supply assembly. Remove the LVPS CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part. NOTE: The formatter cage is attached to the LVPS. Both components are removed as an assembly, and then the formatter cage is removed from the LVPS. 1. Disconnect six connectors (callout 1; J100, J101, J143 on the DC controller PCA). NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see DC controller PCA on page 183. NOTE: If you are removing the power supply for internal product access, it is recommended that you leave the ICB installed on the power-supply assembly. Figure 6-145 Remove the LVPS (1 of 10) 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 273 2. Push in on the locking tab to release the retainer (callout 2), and then separate the retainer from the assembly. NOTE: The retainer remains attached to the wire harness, and is disengaged from the assembly. Figure 6-146 Remove the LVPS (2 of 10) 2 3. Remove three screws (callout 3), and then remove the handle (callout 4). Figure 6-147 Remove the LVPS (3 of 10) 4 3 274 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Remove five screws (callout 5). NOTE: The illustration below shows the ICB removed. Figure 6-148 Remove the LVPS (4 of 10) 5 5. Disconnect one connector (callout 6), and then remove the wire from the guide (callout 7). Figure 6-149 Remove the (5 of 10) 7 6 ENWW Internal assemblies 275 6. Release one tab and lift up the wire cover. Figure 6-150 Remove the (6 of 10) 7. Remove three screws (callout 8). Figure 6-151 Remove the LVPS (7 of 10) 8 276 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 8. Rotate the formatter cage away from the top of the product. Figure 6-152 Remove the LVPS (8 of 10) 9. Remove the assembly. Figure 6-153 Remove the LVPS (9 of 10) ENWW Internal assemblies 277 10. Remove four screws (callout 9), and then separate the formatter cage from the low-voltage power supply. Figure 6-154 Remove the LVPS (10 of 10) 9 278 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Scanner-control board (SCB) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Automatic document feeder (ADF). See Automatic document feeder (ADF) on page 212. ● Control-panel overlay. See Control-panel overlay on page 218. ● Control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 219. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. Remove the SCB NOTE: To replace the Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCI-E) cable, locate and remove the cable that connects the SCB to the ICB. 1. Place the scanner assembly glass-side down on a clean surface or piece of paper. CAUTION: Dust or debris can scratch the scanner glass and cause print-quality problems. If possible, place the scanner on a clean lint-free cloth. 2. Release two thumb screws, and then remove one cable. Figure 6-155 Remove the SCB (1 of 8) ENWW Internal assemblies 279 3. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then release the wires from the guides (callout 3). Figure 6-156 Remove the SCB (2 of 8) 3 2 1 4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then disengage the ferrite assembly (callout 2). Figure 6-157 Remove the SCB (3 of 8) 2 1 280 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Disconnect one FFC, and then remove the ferrite assembly from the FFC. Figure 6-158 Remove the SCB (4 of 8) 6. Release two retainers (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then move the wires to the side. Figure 6-159 Remove the (5 of 8) 2 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 281 7. Remove two screws. Figure 6-160 Remove the SCB (6 of 8) 8. Gently slide the SCB, and then release two wire harnesses (callout 1). Figure 6-161 Remove the SCB (7 of 8) 1 282 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 9. Remove the SCB. Figure 6-162 Remove the SCB (8 of 8) Reinstall the SCB When reinstalling the SCB, fully engage the guides on both sides of the SCB with the slots on the scanner assembly. Reinstallation tip Make sure that the control-panel USB cable is properly routed. The scanner assembly will not correctly seat on the product if the cable is not properly routed. Figure 6-163 Reinstalling the SCB ENWW Internal assemblies 283 Pickup roller (Tray 1) CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy roller surface unless you are replacing the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper pickup problems. 1. Open Tray 1, release two tabs (callout 1), and then rotate the roller cover away from the product to remove it. TIP: Push down along the top edge of the cover to easily release the tabs. Figure 6-164 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 1) (1 of 2) 1 2. Release two tabs and rotate the roller body away from the product to remove it. TIP: It might be easier to release the Tray 1 pickup-roller solenoid plate, and then manually rotate the roller into the correct position to remove the roller. Figure 6-165 Remove the pickup roller (Tray 1) (2 of 2) 284 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor 1. Remove five screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2). Figure 6-166 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (1 of 9) 2 1 2. Disconnect five connectors (callout 3). NOTE: Disconnect the larger connector on the right side from the bottom. Disconnect the two smaller connectors on the right side from the top. Figure 6-167 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (2 of 9) 3 ENWW Internal assemblies 285 3. Release two tabs (callout 4), and then slide the delivery-fan and cartridge-fan assembly toward the power-supply side of the product to release it. Figure 6-168 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (3 of 9) 4 4. Pull the assembly slightly out of the product, disconnect two connectors (callout 5), and then to remove the assembly. Figure 6-169 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (4 of 9) 5 286 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Remove one screw (callout 6), and then remove the cover (callout 7). Figure 6-170 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (5 of 9) 7 6. 6 Disconnect two connectors (callout 8), and then remove the fans (callout 9). Figure 6-171 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (6 of 9) 9 8 ENWW Internal assemblies 287 7. Remove the antistatic foam (callout 10). Figure 6-172 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (7 of 9) 10 8. Release one tab (callout 11). Figure 6-173 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (8 of 9) 11 288 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 9. Disconnect one connector (callout 12), and then remove the environmental sensor. CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part. Figure 6-174 Remove the delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor (9 of 9) 12 ENWW Internal assemblies 289 Toner-collection sensor Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner-collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 190. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. Remove the toner-collection sensor 1. Remove five screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2). Figure 6-175 Remove the toner-collection sensor (1 of 4) 2 1 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 3). Figure 6-176 Remove the toner-collection sensor (2 of 4) 3 290 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Remove one screw (callout 4). Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the sensor, make sure that the tab (callout 5) on the sensor body completely engages the slot in the product chassis. Figure 6-177 Remove the toner-collection sensor (3 of 4) 4 4. 5 Remove the toner-collection sensor. Figure 6-178 Remove the toner-collection sensor (4 of 4) ENWW Internal assemblies 291 Residual-toner-feed motor Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner-collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 190. ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. Remove the residual-toner-feed motor NOTE: Be careful. Do not dislodge the residual-toner collection door when you remove the assembly. If the door becomes dislodged, see Reinstall the residual-toner collection door on page 296 to reinstall it. 1. Release one tab (callout 1) while you support the cover (callout 2). Figure 6-179 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (1 of 7) 1 2 292 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove the cover. Figure 6-180 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (2 of 7) 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 3). Figure 6-181 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (3 of 7) 3 ENWW Internal assemblies 293 4. Support the assembly, and then remove two screws (callout 4). Figure 6-182 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (4 of 7) 4 5. Be careful. Do not dislodge the residual-toner collection door when you remove the assembly. If the door becomes dislodged, see Reinstall the residual-toner collection door on page 296 to reinstall it. Figure 6-183 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (5 of 7) 294 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Push the assembly into the product to release it. Figure 6-184 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (6 of 7) 7. Remove the motor. Figure 6-185 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor (7 of 7) ENWW Internal assemblies 295 Reinstall the residual-toner collection door Snap the residual-toner collection door into the holders on the assembly. Make sure that the spring is correctly installed. Figure 6-186 Reinstall the residual-toner collection door 296 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Registration density (RD) sensor assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Secondary transfer assembly. See Secondary transfer assembly on page 207. ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. Remove the RD sensor assembly 1. Remove two screws (callout 1). Figure 6-187 Remove the RD sensor assembly (1 of 6) 1 2. Slide the shutter toward the right side of the product. Keep the shutter in this position for the following step. Figure 6-188 Remove the RD sensor assembly (2 of 6) ENWW Internal assemblies 297 3. Carefully separate the assembly from the product. The assembly wire harnesses are still attached to the product. CAUTION: Do not damage the shutter as it passes through the chassis. Figure 6-189 Remove the RD sensor assembly (3 of 6) 4. Disconnect two connectors (callout 2) on the back side of the assembly. Figure 6-190 Remove the RD sensor assembly (4 of 6) 2 298 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Push in on the locking tab to release the retainer (callout 3), and then separate the retainer from the assembly. NOTE: The retainer remains attached to the wire harness, and disengages from the assembly. Figure 6-191 Remove the RD sensor assembly (5 of 6) 3 6. Remove the assembly. Figure 6-192 Remove the RD sensor assembly (6 of 6) ENWW Internal assemblies 299 Power-supply fan and fan duct Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. Remove the power-supply fan and fan duct 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J119) and release the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 2). NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see DC controller PCA on page 183. Figure 6-193 Remove the power-supply fan (1 of 4) 1 2 300 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. To remove the fan only: Release two tabs (callout 3), and then remove the fan from the fan duct. Reinstallation tip When the fan is reinstalled, the air must flow into the product. Look at the arrows embossed on the fan frame that indicate air flow direction. Figure 6-194 Remove the power-supply fan (2 of 4) 3 3. To remove the fan and fan duct: Remove one screw (callout 4), and then release the wire harnesses from the guides on the fan duct. Figure 6-195 Remove the power-supply fan (3 of 4) 4 ENWW Internal assemblies 301 4. To remove the fan and fan duct: Release one tab (callout 5), and then remove the fan and fan duct (callout 6). Figure 6-196 Remove the power-supply fan (4 of 4) 6 5 302 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Registration assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Secondary transfer assembly. See Secondary transfer assembly on page 207. ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Registration density (RD) sensor assembly. See Registration density (RD) sensor assembly on page 297. TIP: Removing the RD sensor assembly makes it much easier to reinstall the registration assembly. ● Power-supply fan and fan duct. See Power-supply fan and fan duct on page 300. Remove the registration assembly NOTE: If a replacement registration assembly is installed, you must use the control-panel menus to reset the registration-roller count. 1. Remove two screws (callout 1). Figure 6-197 Remove the registration assembly (1 of 8) 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 303 2. Pull down on the cover to release one tab, and then rotate the cover away from the product to remove it. Figure 6-198 Remove the registration assembly (2 of 8) 3. Release two green latches (callout 2), and then lower the feed guide. Reinstallation tip Make sure that the feed guide snaps into the closed position when you reinstall the registration assembly. Figure 6-199 Remove the registration assembly (3 of 8) 2 304 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Remove three screws (callout 3). Figure 6-200 Remove the registration assembly (4 of 8) 3 5. Separate the assembly from the product, release one tab (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5). CAUTION: The assembly is still attached to the product by the wire harnesses. Figure 6-201 Remove the registration assembly (5 of 8) 4 5 ENWW Internal assemblies 305 6. Disconnect one connector (callout 6), and then release the wire harness from the retainer. Figure 6-202 Remove the registration assembly (6 of 8) 6 7. Disconnect three connectors (callout 7) on the back side of the assembly, and then release the wires from the retainers. Figure 6-203 Remove the registration assembly (7 of 8) 7 306 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 8. Remove the assembly. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the registration assembly, make sure that it is correctly positioned in the product. The tabs on the assembly must fit into the slots in the product chassis and the assembly should fit securely up against the product chassis. Figure 6-204 Remove the registration assembly (8 of 8) ENWW Internal assemblies 307 High-voltage power supply lower Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. Remove the high-voltage power supply lower CAUTION: 1. ESD-sensitive part. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2). Figure 6-205 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (1 of 4) 2 1 308 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to carefully remove three locking clips (callout 3). CAUTION: Do not damage the PCA with the screwdriver. Figure 6-206 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (2 of 4) 3 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 4; J114), and then release five clips (callout 5). NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see DC controller PCA on page 183. Figure 6-207 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (3 of 4) 4 5 ENWW Internal assemblies 309 4. Rotate the top of the power supply away from the chassis, and then disconnect one connector (callout 6). Remove the power supply Figure 6-208 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (4 of 4) 6 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply lower When you reinstall the power supply, look through the holes in the PCA and make sure that the highvoltage contact springs are correctly seated against the PCA. Figure 6-209 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply lower 310 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Developing-disengagement motor Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. Remove the developing-disengagement motor 1. Remove two screws (callout 1). Figure 6-210 Remove the developing-disengagement motor (1 of 2) 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 311 2. Remove the motor. Figure 6-211 Remove the developing-disengagement motor (2 of 2) 312 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Pickup motor Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● Low-voltage power supply. See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. Remove the pickup motor Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor. Figure 6-212 Remove the pickup motor 1 2 ENWW Internal assemblies 313 Lifter-drive assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. Remove the lifter-drive assembly 1. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the retainers. Figure 6-213 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (1 of 2) 1 314 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove five screws (callout 2), and then remove the assembly. Figure 6-214 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (2 of 2) 2 ENWW Internal assemblies 315 Cassette-pickup drive assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly NOTE: To remove the pickup motor only, see Pickup motor on page 313. 1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal bracket (callout 2). Figure 6-215 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (1 of 10) 2 1 316 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect six connectors (callout 3; J106, J107, J108, J137, J138, J140). NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see DC controller PCA on page 183. Figure 6-216 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (2 of 10) 33 3. Disconnect one connector (callout 4; J119), remove one screw (callout 5), and then release the wire harness from the guides. NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see DC controller PCA on page 183. Figure 6-217 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (3 of 10) 4 5 ENWW Internal assemblies 317 4. Release one tab (callout 6), and then remove the fan and fan duct (callout 7). Figure 6-218 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (4 of 10) 7 6 5. Disconnect five connectors (callout 8; J110, J111 on the DC controller PCA), release the FFCs from the guide (callout 9), and then release the wire harnesses from the guides. NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see DC controller PCA on page 183. Figure 6-219 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (5 of 10) 8 9 318 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Release one tab (callout 10), and then remove the guide. Figure 6-220 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (6 of 10) 10 7. Release one tab (callout 11), and then remove the guide. Figure 6-221 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (7 of 10) 11 ENWW Internal assemblies 319 8. Remove two screws (callout 12), and then remove the high-voltage bracket (callout 13). Figure 6-222 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (8 of 10) 12 13 9. Remove three screws (callout 14). Figure 6-223 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (9 of 10) 14 320 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 10. Carefully remove the assembly. CAUTION: The gears, arm, and spring on the assembly are not captive. Use your finger to secure the arm and spring as you remove the assembly. If the gears, arm, or spring become dislodged, see Reinstall the cassette-pickup drive assembly on page 321. Figure 6-224 Remove the cassette-pickup drive assembly (10 of 10) Reinstall the cassette-pickup drive assembly 1. Make sure that the spring-loaded gear (callout 1) is correctly installed. Figure 6-225 Reinstall the cassette-pickup drive assembly (1 of 3) 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 321 2. Make sure that the spring (callout 2) is correctly installed. Figure 6-226 Reinstall the cassette-pickup drive assembly (2 of 3) 2 3. Make sure that the gears, arm, and spring are correctly installed. Figure 6-227 Reinstall the cassette-pickup drive assembly (3 of 3) 322 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Cassette-pickup assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● Registration assembly. See Registration assembly on page 303. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. ● Cassette-pickup drive assembly. SeeCassette-pickup drive assembly on page 316. Remove the cassette-pickup assembly 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the gear (callout 2). Figure 6-228 Remove the cassette-pickup assembly (1 of 3) 2 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 323 2. Remove two screws (callout 3). Figure 6-229 Remove the cassette-pickup assembly (2 of 3) 3 3. Remove the assembly. Figure 6-230 Remove the cassette-pickup assembly (3 of 3) 324 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 190. ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) 1. Remove five screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2). Figure 6-231 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (1 of 12) 2 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 325 2. Disconnect in-line one connector (callout 3), and then release the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 4). Figure 6-232 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (2 of 12) 4 3 3. Release one tab (callout 5), and then remove the guide (callout 6). Figure 6-233 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (3 of 12) 5 6 326 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Remove one screw (callout 7), and then remove the cover (callout 8). Figure 6-234 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (4 of 12) 8 7 5. Disconnect one FFC (callout 9), and then release one spring (callout 10). CAUTION: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring when it is removed. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to safely retain the spring when it is removed. Do not use a flat blade screwdriver to remove the spring; the spring could forcibly leave the product and strike you. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the spring, make sure that the laser/scanner fits tightly up against the product chassis, and make sure that the FFC is fully seated in the connector. The locator tabs on the front and rear of the scanner must be firmly seated in the slots in the chassis. Figure 6-235 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (5 of 12) 9 10 ENWW Internal assemblies 327 6. Disconnect six connectors (callout 11). NOTE: Disconnect the larger connector on the right side from the bottom. Disconnect the two smaller connectors on the right side from the top. Figure 6-236 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (6 of 12) 11 7. Release two tabs (callout 12), and then slide the fan assembly toward the power-supply side of the product to release it. Figure 6-237 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (7 of 12) 12 328 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 8. Pull the fan assembly slightly out of the product, disconnect two connectors (callout 13), and then remove the assembly. Figure 6-238 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (8 of 12) 13 9. Remove one screw (callout 14), and then release one spring (callout 15). CAUTION: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring when it is removed. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to safely retain the spring when it is removed. Do not use a flat blade screwdriver to remove the spring; the spring could forcibly leave the product and strike you. Reinstallation tip When the laser/scanner is properly positioned in the chassis, the plastic parts which protrude at the front and rear of the product will be firmly seated against the locator tabs on the chassis. Verify that the assembly is correctly seated, and then install the spring. Figure 6-239 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (9 of 12) 14 ENWW 15 Internal assemblies 329 10. Remove the toner collection sensor. Figure 6-240 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (10 of 12) 11. Rotate the front of the laser/scanner assembly down (callout 1), and then slide it toward the right (callout 2). Lower the left corner, and then rotate the left corner out of the product (callout 3). Figure 6-241 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (11 of 12) 1 3 330 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 2 ENWW 12. Pull the laser/scanner assembly straight out of the product to remove it. Figure 6-242 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (12 of 12) ENWW Internal assemblies 331 Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Toner collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 190. ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. ● Lifter drive assembly. See Lifter-drive assembly on page 314. ● Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M). See Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 325. Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) 1. Release one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). CAUTION: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring when it is removed. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to safely retain the spring when it is removed. Do not use a flat blade screwdriver to remove the spring; the spring could forcibly leave the product and strike you. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the spring, make sure that the laser/scanner fits tightly up against the product chassis, and make sure that the FFC is fully seated in the connector. The locator tabs on the front of the scanner must be firmly seated in the slots in the chassis. Figure 6-243 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (1 of 7) 2 1 332 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 3). Figure 6-244 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (2 of 7) 3 3. Remove two screws (callout 4) located below the front door. Figure 6-245 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (3 of 7) 4 ENWW Internal assemblies 333 4. Open the front door, and then remove one screw (callout 5) and the cover (callout 6). Figure 6-246 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (4 of 7) 6 5. 5 Remove two screws (callout 7). Use your finger to release the locking tab (callout 8), and then remove the cover. CAUTION: Be careful. The PGC actuators are easily dislodged when the cover is removed. See Figure 6-250 Reinstall the PGC actuators (1 of 5) on page 336. To reinstall the actuators, see Reinstall the protective glass cleaner (PGC) actuators on page 336. Figure 6-247 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (5 of 7) 8 7 334 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Release one spring (callout 9). CAUTION: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring when it is removed. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to safely retain the spring when it is removed. Do not use a flat blade screwdriver to remove the spring; the spring could forcibly leave the product and strike you. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the spring, make sure that the laser/scanner fits tightly up against the product chassis. Figure 6-248 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (6 of 7) 9 7. Rotate the corner of the assembly away from the product until you can see the PCA, and then remove the assembly from the product. Reinstallation tip When the laser/scanner is properly positioned in the chassis, the plastic parts which protrude at the front and rear of the product will be firmly seated against the locator tabs on the chassis. Verify that the assembly is correctly seated, and then install the spring. Figure 6-249 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (7 of 7) 1 2 ENWW Internal assemblies 335 Reinstall the protective glass cleaner (PGC) actuators 1. The following figure shows a dislodged PGC actuator. TIP: If the actuator and spring are only slightly dislodged, you might be able to easily push them back into place. Figure 6-250 Reinstall the PGC actuators (1 of 5) 2. Remove the actuator and spring from the product. Install the spring on the actuator. Figure 6-251 Reinstall the PGC actuators (2 of 5) 336 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Before proceeding, take note of the following: ● Callout 1: The pin on the actuator will be installed into the slot in the chassis. ● Callout 2: The pin on the pivot arm will be installed into the slot on the actuator. ● Callout 3: The end of the spring will be installed onto the tab on the chassis. Figure 6-252 Reinstall the PGC actuators (3 of 5) 2 1 3 4. Place the end of the actuator into the PGC rod, and then use a small flat blade screw driver to fasten the end of the spring on the tab on the chassis. Figure 6-253 Reinstall the PGC actuators (4 of 5) ENWW Internal assemblies 337 5. Push down on the actuator to seat it into place. Verify that the actuators is correctly installed. The PGC actuator should freely move when you push in on the actuator. Figure 6-254 Reinstall the PGC actuators (5 of 5) 338 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW High-voltage power supply upper Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. ● DC controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. Remove the high-voltage power supply upper CAUTION: 1. ESD-sensitive part. Remove one screw (callout 1). Figure 6-255 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (1 of 5) 1 ENWW Internal assemblies 339 2. Remove four screws (callout 2), and then rotate the sheet-metal plate away from the power supply. NOTE: You do not need to completely remove the sheet-metal plate to access the power supply. Figure 6-256 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (2 of 5) 2 3. Disconnect two connectors (J201, J202; callout 3) from the back side of the power supply. NOTE: For clarity, the figure in this step shows the ADF and scanner removed. Carefully reach under these components to access the two connectors. Figure 6-257 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (3 of 5) 3 340 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Remove three screws (callout 4). Figure 6-258 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (4 of 5) 4 5. Release four tabs (callout 5), and then remove the power supply. Figure 6-259 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (5 of 5) 5 ENWW Internal assemblies 341 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply upper When you reinstall the power supply, look through the holes in the PCA and make sure that the highvoltage contact springs are correctly seated against the PCA. NOTE: One wire harness (callout 1) is disconnected at both ends. Do not lose the wire harness. Position the FFC (callout 2) over the cable guide when you reinstall the power supply. Figure 6-260 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply upper 1 2 342 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Drum motor 1 Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Reinstall the ICB on page 269. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper on page 339. Remove the drum motor 1 ▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor. Figure 6-261 Remove the drum motor 1 1 ENWW 2 Internal assemblies 343 Drum motor 2 or drum motor 3 Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper on page 339. Remove the drum motor 2 or drum motor 3 ▲ Do one of the following: ● Remove drum motor 2: Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor. ● Remove drum motor 3: Disconnect one connector (callout 3), remove four screws (callout 4), and then remove the motor. Figure 6-262 Remove the drum motor 2 or drum motor 3 2 4 344 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 3 1 ENWW Fuser motor Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192 ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● DC controller PCA and tray. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper on page 339. Remove the fuser motor Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the motor. Figure 6-263 Remove the fuser motor 1 2 ENWW Internal assemblies 345 Main-drive assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. See Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Secondary transfer assembly. See Secondary transfer assembly on page 207. ● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● Power-supply fan and fan duct. See Power-supply fan and fan duct on page 300. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. ● High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper on page 339. Remove the main-drive assembly 1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2). Figure 6-264 Remove the main-drive assembly (1 of 7) 1 2 346 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Release the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 3), and then remove one screw (callout 4). Figure 6-265 Remove the main-drive assembly (2 of 7) 4 3 3. Lift the high-voltage bracket up to release it, and then remove the bracket. Figure 6-266 Remove the main-drive assembly (3 of 7) ENWW Internal assemblies 347 4. Disconnect seven connectors (callout 5), and then release the wire harnesses from the guides. Figure 6-267 Remove the main-drive assembly (4 of 7) 5 5. Remove two screws (callout 6), and then remove the sheet-metal plates (callout 7). Figure 6-268 Remove the main-drive assembly (5 of 7) 7 348 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 6 ENWW 6. Release the FFCs and lower wiring harness from the guide, and then release one tab (callout 8) and remove the guide. Figure 6-269 Remove the main-drive assembly (6 of 7) 8 7. Remove ten screws (callout 9), and then carefully remove the assembly. CAUTION: Be careful when you remove the assembly. The cams on the backside of the assembly can be dislodged. If the cams become dislodged, install them on the shafts as shown in Figure 6-272 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (2 of 11) on page 350. The black cam must be installed on the shaft furthest away from the developing-disengagement motor. The white cams are interchangeable. Figure 6-270 Remove the main-drive assembly (7 of 7) 9 ENWW Internal assemblies 349 Reinstall the main-drive assembly 1. Remove the bracket (callout 1), two guides (callout 2), and the developing-disengagement motor (callout 3). Install the bracket and guides on the replacement main-drive assembly. NOTE: Do not install the developing-disengagement motor on the assembly (this motor must be removed from the assembly to align the main-drive cams). Figure 6-271 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (1 of 11) 1 3 2 2. Locate the cams (callout 4) on the back side of the assembly. Figure 6-272 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (2 of 11) 4 350 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Slowly rotate the shaft near the black cam. WARNING! Do not touch the plastic gears or cams. You must not wipe away any of the grease that is applied to these components. Always rotate the gears and cams by rotating the metal drive shaft. Figure 6-273 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (3 of 11) 4. Continue to rotate the shaft until the holes in the black-cam gear align as shown below. When correctly aligned, the bottom-most hole in the gear is aligned with a hole in the sheet-metal chassis. NOTE: The holes in the other cam gears have a different alignment. You must make sure that the holes in the black-cam gear are correctly aligned. Figure 6-274 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (4 of 11) ENWW Internal assemblies 351 5. Verify that the cams (callout 5) align correctly. TIP: The second cam in from the right (the white cam to the left of the black cam), should have the second hole aligned with the hole in the sheet-metal chassis. The third cam in from the right, should have the third hole aligned with the hole in the sheet-metal chassis. The fourth cam in from the right (the cam nearest the developing-disengagement motor), should have the fourth hole aligned with the hole in the sheet-metal chassis. If the second, third, or fourth cams do not correctly align, do the following. Hold the long drive shaft, gently tilt the cam and gear away from the shaft to allow clearance to rotate the gear until the correct hole in the gear aligns with the hole in the chassis. Figure 6-275 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (5 of 11) 5 6. When the cams align correctly, they easily fit into the holes in the chassis. Figure 6-276 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (6 of 11) 352 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 7. When the assembly is placed on the chassis, the pin on the swing gear and on the bracket (callout 6), must align with the holes in the chassis (callout 7). Figure 6-277 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (7 of 11) 7 6 8. Position the assembly on the chassis. Figure 6-278 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (8 of 11) ENWW Internal assemblies 353 9. Use your finger to push in on the assembly, and use a small flat blade screwdriver to align the pin on the swing gear with the hole in the chassis. Figure 6-279 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (9 of 11) 10. When the assembly is correctly installed against the chassis, the pin above the swing gear protrudes through the hole in the chassis. Figure 6-280 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (10 of 11) 354 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 11. Install the main-drive assembly mounting screws, and then reinstall the developing-disengagement motor (callout 8). TIP: After reassembling the product, use the Diagnostics menu to print a Color Band Test page. If the test page shows one or more color planes are not printing (usually in the upper left corner of the page), the cam or cams for the missing color plane are not correctly aligned. Repeat the reinstall the main-drive assembly procedure. Figure 6-281 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (11 of 11) 8 ENWW Internal assemblies 355 Fuser-drive assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter PCA. Formatter PCA on page 192. ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 200. ● Secondary transfer assembly. See Secondary transfer assembly on page 207. ● Front-upper cover. See Front-upper cover on page 225 ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. ● Front-top cover. See Front-top cover on page 261. ● Rear-top cover. See Rear-top cover on page 262 ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. TIP: For internal product access, you can remove the ICB and the low-voltage power supply as a single component. ● DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● Power-supply fan and fan duct. See Power-supply fan and fan duct on page 300. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. ● High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper on page 339. ● Main-drive assembly. See Main-drive assembly on page 346. 356 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Remove the fuser-drive assembly 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 2). Figure 6-282 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (1 of 6) 2 1 2. Remove two screws (callout 3), and then remove the guide (callout 4). Figure 6-283 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (2 of 6) 3 4 ENWW Internal assemblies 357 3. Remove one screw (callout 5), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 6). Figure 6-284 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (3 of 6) 6 5 4. Remove one screw (callout 7), and then remove the cover (callout 8). Figure 6-285 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (4 of 6) 8 7 358 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Remove five screws (callout 9). Figure 6-286 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (5 of 6) 9 6. Carefully remove the assembly. CAUTION: A gear on the assembly is not captive. Do not lose the gear when you remove the assembly. If the gear becomes dislodged, see Reinstall the fuser-drive assembly on page 360. Figure 6-287 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (6 of 6) ENWW Internal assemblies 359 Reinstall the fuser-drive assembly If the gear (callout 1) is dislodged when the assembly is removed, use the figure below to correctly install it on the assembly. Figure 6-288 Reinstall the fuser-drive assembly 1 360 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Delivery assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ENWW ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 200. ● Secondary transfer assembly. See Secondary transfer assembly on page 207. ● Front-upper cover. See Front-upper cover on page 225 ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. ● Front-top cover. See Front-top cover on page 261. ● Rear-top cover. See Rear-top cover on page 262 ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. ● DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● Power-supply fan and fan duct. See Power-supply fan and fan duct on page 300. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. ● High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper on page 339. ● Main-drive assembly. See Main-drive assembly on page 346. ● Fuser-drive assembly. See Fuser-drive assembly on page 356. Internal assemblies 361 Remove the delivery assembly 1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2). Figure 6-289 Remove the delivery assembly (1 of 5) 2 1 2. Remove two screws (callout 3). Figure 6-290 Remove the delivery assembly (2 of 5) 3 362 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Release one tab (callout 4), and then remove the gear (callout 5). Figure 6-291 Remove the delivery assembly (3 of 5) 5 4 4. Release one tab (callout 6), and then rotate the locking clip until the tab on the clip aligns with the slot in the chassis. Figure 6-292 Remove the delivery assembly (4 of 5) 6 ENWW Internal assemblies 363 5. Disconnect one connector (callout 7), remove two screws (callout 8), and then carefully lift the assembly (callout 9) off of the product to remove it. CAUTION: A solenoid arm (on the right side) and a spring (on the left side) on the assembly are not captive. Do not lose the solenoid arm or spring when you remove the assembly. If the solenoid arm or spring become dislodged, see Reinstall the delivery assembly on page 365. Figure 6-293 Remove the delivery assembly (5 of 5) 7 9 8 364 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstall the delivery assembly 1. Make sure that the solenoid arm is correctly installed on the assembly. Figure 6-294 Reinstall the delivery assembly (1 of 2) 2. Make sure that the spring is correctly installed on the assembly. Figure 6-295 Reinstall the delivery assembly (2 of 2) ENWW Internal assemblies 365 Duplex-drive assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 200. ● Secondary transfer assembly. See Secondary transfer assembly on page 207. ● Intermediate transfer belt. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209 ● Front-upper cover. See Front-upper cover on page 225 ● Right-rear cover. See Right-rear cover on page 231. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 233. ● Rear-upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 236. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 238. ● Scanner assembly. See Scanner assembly on page 242. ● Front-top cover. See Front-top cover on page 261. ● Rear-top cover. See Rear-top cover on page 262 ● Interconnect board (ICB). See Interconnect board (ICB) on page 267. ● DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. ● Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. ● Power-supply fan and fan duct. See Power-supply fan and fan duct on page 300. ● High-voltage power supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. ● High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper on page 339. ● Main-drive assembly. See Main-drive assembly on page 346. ● Fuser-drive assembly. See Fuser-drive assembly on page 356. ● Delivery assembly. See Delivery assembly on page 361. 366 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Remove the duplex-drive assembly 1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2). Figure 6-296 Remove the duplex-drive assembly (1 of 2) 2 1 2. Remove the assembly. Figure 6-297 Remove the duplex-drive assembly (2 of 2) ENWW Internal assemblies 367 Optional paper feeder assembly (Tray 3) NOTE: For information about removing the Tray 3 pickup roller, see Pickup and feed rollers (Tray 3) on page 203. For information about removing the Tray 3 cassette, see Tray cassette on page 199. For information about removing the right door (optional paper feeder), see Right door (optional paper feeder) on page 221 Drawer connector 1. With a small screwdriver, lift one tab and then slide the drawer connector to release. 2. Remove one connector (callout 1). Figure 6-298 Remove the drawer connector; optional paper feeder 1 368 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 7 Solve problems To use the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the HP LaserJet printing process. Explanations of each mechanical assembly, the product systems, and the basic theory of operation are contained in Theory of operation on page 115. Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes unless you understand the function of each product component. ENWW ● Solve problems checklist ● Menu map ● Troubleshooting process ● Tools for troubleshooting ● Control-panel messages ● Event log messages ● Clear paper jams ● Solve paper-handling problems ● Use manual print modes ● Solve image-quality problems ● Solve performance problems ● Solve connectivity problems ● Service mode functions ● Solve fax problems ● Solve e-mail problems 369 Solve problems checklist If the product is not responding correctly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the product does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist. 1. Make sure one of the following messages display on the control panel: Ready, Paused, or Sleep Mode On. If no lights are on or the display does not say Ready, Paused, or Sleep Mode On, see Power subsystem on page 376. 2. Check the cables. a. Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make sure that the connection is secure. b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible. c. Check the network connection. See Solve connectivity problems on page 501. 3. Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications. See Supported paper and print media on page 56. 4. Print a configuration page. See Configuration pages on page 436. If the product is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints. 5. 6. 7. a. If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media. b. If the page jams in the product, see Clear paper jams on page 472. If the configuration page prints, check the following items. a. If the page prints correctly, then the product hardware is working. The problem is with the computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program. b. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware. Does the image quality meet the user's requirements? If yes, go to step 7. If no, check the following items: ● Print the print-quality (PQ) troubleshooting pages See Print-quality-troubleshooting pages on page 431 in this chapter. ● Solve the print-quality problems, and then go to step 7. At the computer, check to see if the print queue is stopped, paused, or set to print offline. Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes. Double-click HP Color LaserJet CM3530. -orMac OS X: Open Printer Setup Utility, and then double-click the line for the HP Color LaserJet CM3530. 370 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 8. Verify that you have installed the HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series printer driver. Check the program to make sure that you are using the HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series printer driver. 9. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, then the problem is with the program you are using. If this solution does not work (the document does not print) complete these steps: a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed. b. If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the new connection type that you are using. Solve problems checklist 371 Menu map The menu map can be an important troubleshooting tool. It shows each control-panel menu and submenu to aid navigation through the menu system. Print the menu map from the control panel by completing the following steps. 1. Touch Administration. 2. Touch Information. 3. Touch Configuration/Status Pages. 4. Touch Administration Menu Map. 5. Touch Print. 372 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Troubleshooting process Determine the problem source When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems. ● Use the pre-troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem. ● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction. Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues: ● Are supply items within their rated life? ● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors? NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition. Pre-troubleshooting checklist The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem. Table 7-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist Environment Media Input trays ENWW ● Is the product installed on a solid, level surface? ● Is the product exposed to particle matter or dust? ● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source? ● Is the power supply plug inserted in the product and directly to the wall outlet (not a power strip)? ● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters, as listed in the appendix of this manual? ● Is the product exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials? ● Is the product exposed to direct sunlight? ● Does the customer use only supported media? ● Is the media in good condition (contains no curls, folds, and so forth)? ● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits? ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications? ● Is the media correctly placed in the tray? Troubleshooting process 373 Table 7-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued) ● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack? ● Is the paper tray correctly installed in the product? ● Is each print cartridge installed correctly? ● Are original HP print cartridges installed? ● Are the cartridges damaged? ● Are the ITB and fuser correctly installed? ● Is the ITB or fuser damaged? Covers ● Are the top cover and front cover closed? Condensation ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe the affected area dry or leave the product on for 10 to 20 minutes. ● Was a print cartridge opened soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the product to sit at room temperature for one to two hours. ● Check for and remove any non-HP components (print cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the product. ● Remove the product from the network, and ensure that the failure is associated with the product before beginning troubleshooting. ● For any print-quality issues, calibrate the product. See Calibrate the product on page 430. Print cartridges ITB and fuser Miscellaneous 374 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Troubleshooting flowchart This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve product hardware problems. Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the appropriate section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, proceed to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart. Table 7-2 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 Is the product on and does a readable message display? Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See Power subsystem on page 376. Power on Yes 2 Control panel messages 3 Event log No Does the message Ready display on the control panel? Yes No Open the Troubleshooting menu and print an event log to see the history of errors with this product. If an error message appears, see Control-panel messages on page 441. After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3. If the event log does not print, see Print an event log on page 468. If paper jams inside the product, see Clear paper jams on page 472. Does the event log print? Yes After the control-panel display is functional, go to step 2. No If error messages appear on the control-panel display when you try to print an event log, see Control-panel messages on page 441. After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, go to step 4. 4 Information pages Open the Information menu and print the configuration pages to verify that all of the accessories are installed. If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it. After evaluating the configuration pages, go to step 5. Are all the accessories installed? Yes 5 No Does the print quality meet the customer's requirements? Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect tables. See Image defects table on page 494. Image quality Yes 6 No After the print quality is acceptable, go to step 6. Can the customer print successfully from the host computer? Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid IP address is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page. Yes. This is the end of the troubleshooting process. If error messages display on the control panel, see Control-panel messages on page 441. Interface No When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end of the troubleshooting process. ENWW Troubleshooting process 375 Power subsystem Power-on checks The basic product functions should start up when the product is plugged into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the product does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem. Power-on troubleshooting overview Turn on the product power. If the control panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or the normal initialization display does not appear, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem. Power-on sequence ● 00 seconds: power on button LED (+5 VA from LVPS) ● 02 seconds: control-panel display with HP logo (check USB cable from ICB, 12 v from formatter) ● 04 seconds: output bin LED (+5 v from SCB) ● 06 seconds: scanner lamp and initialization (24 v from LVPS) ● 10 seconds: ADF initialization (check ADF cable) ● 12 seconds: LVPS fan (right rear corner, 24 v from LVPS) ● 22 seconds: engine initialization NOTE: The LVPS includes an over current and over voltage crowbar circuit. If the power supply does not come on, unplug the power cord, wait five minutes, and then plug the power cord in and try turning the product on again. If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine, formatter, and control panel problems. Perform an engine test (see Engine-test button on page 386). If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them. If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product, check the following items. 1. Make sure that the product is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that delivers the correct voltage. 2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position. 3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational. 4. Make sure that the control panel display wire harness is connected. 5. Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. Turn off the product and remove the formatter. Reinstall the formatter, and then verify that the heartbeat LED is flashing. 6. Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards, and then try to turn the product on again. 376 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW NOTE: If the control panel remains blank, lift the control and verify the USB cable is seated. Next, remove the rear upper cover and check the other end of the control panel USB cable where it connects to the ICB. The control panel operates on +12 v which originates on the formatter and is delivered through connections on the ICB. The control panel diagnostic mode can be accessed to verify functionality. Touching “+” and “*” together at any time accesses the diagnostic mode. ENWW Troubleshooting process 377 Tools for troubleshooting The section describes the tools that can help you solve problems with the product. Individual component diagnostics LED diagnostics LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot product problems. Understand lights on the formatter Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly. 1 2 3 1 Formatter connectivity LED (lit when formatter is correctly seated) 2 Heartbeat LED 3 HP Jetdirect LEDs Formatter connectivity LED The formatter connectivity LED indicates when the formatter is correctly seated in the product. If the LED is not lit, follow this procedure to correct the problem. 1. Turn the product off. 378 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 2. Disconnect all power and interface cables. NOTE: This illustration might not show all the cables. ENWW 3. Locate the thumb screws on the formatter in the rear of the product. 4. Unscrew the thumb screws and pull the formatter from the product. Tools for troubleshooting 379 5. Align the formatter in the tracks at the bottom of the slot, and then slide it back into the product. Push firmly on the right side of the formatter to make sure it is fully inserted. NOTE: To prevent damage to the formatter, ensure the formatter is aligned in the tracks at the top and the bottom of the opening. Reinstallation tip To prevent the formatter from flexing and not fully seating, firmly push in on the formatter along the edge opposite of the thumb screws. 6. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the product on. Heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the product has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off. If the heartbeat LED is off, the formatter might have a problem. Turn the product off and then on. If the LED is still off, replace the formatter. See Formatter PCA on page 192. 380 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus. 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Touch Initial Setup. 3. Touch Networking and I/O. 4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect or EIO Jetdirect. 5. Touch Link Speed. 6. Select the appropriate link speed. 7. Touch Save. Engine diagnostics This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics that are available in the HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series product. The product contains extensive internal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path, noise, component, and timing issues. Troubleshooting menu The Troubleshooting menu allows you to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the product. ENWW Menu item Description Event Log This shows the event codes and their corresponding engine cycles on the control-panel display. See Event log messages on page 468. Calibrate Scanner Use this feature to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for ADF and flatbed scans. You might need to calibrate the scanner if it is not capturing the correct sections of scanned documents. PQ Troubleshooting This item prints a series of eight pages that include instructions, pages for each color, a demo page, and a configuration page. These pages can help isolate print-quality problems. See Solve image-quality problems on page 494. Fax T.30 Trace Print or configure the fax T.30 trace report. T.30 is the standard that specifies handshaking, protocols, and error correction between fax machines. See Solve fax problems on page 507. Fax Transmit Signal Loss Set loss levels to compensate for phone-line signal loss. Do not modify this setting unless requested to do so by an HP service representative because it could cause the fax to stop functioning. See Solve fax problems on page 507. Fax V.34 Disable V.34 mode if several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it. See Solve fax problems on page 507. Tools for troubleshooting 381 Menu item Description Fax Speaker Mode A technician can use this feature to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations. See Solve fax problems on page 507 . Diagnostic Page Print a diagnostic page that includes color swatches and the EP parameters table. See Diagnostics page on page 434. Disable Cartridge Check This item allows you to remove a print cartridge to help determine which cartridge is the source of a problem. See Disable cartridge check on page 385. Paper Path Sensors This item displays the status of each sensor in the paper path. See Paperpath sensors test on page 408. Paper Path Test This item tests the paper handling features of the product, such as the configuration of the trays. See Paper-path test on page 386. Manual Sensor Test This item displays the status of each sensor, and allows manual testing of the sensors. See Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 387. Component Test This item activates individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, and other hardware issues. See Component tests on page 409. Print/Stop Test This item isolates print-quality faults more accurately by stopping the product in mid-print cycle. Stopping the product in mid print cycle allows you to see where the image begins to degrade. It also causes a jam that might need to be manually removed. A service representative should perform this test. See Print/Stop test on page 409. Color Band Test Print a color-band test page to identify arcing in the high-voltage power supply. See Color-band test on page 440. Scanner Tests Use this item to diagnose potential problems with the product scanner. See Troubleshooting menu on page 50. 382 Chapter 7 Solve problems ● Lower-lamp ● ADF read motor ● Sensors ◦ ADF empty sensor ◦ Top-of-page sensor ◦ Register/deskew sensor ◦ ADF width sensor ◦ ADF jam cover sensor ◦ ADF length sensor ◦ Flatbed cover sensor ◦ Flatbed width sensor ◦ Flatbed length sensor ● ADF read motor reverse ● ADF input motor ● ADF duplex solenoid ● ADF input reverse ENWW Menu item Control Panel PTT test mode ENWW Description ● ADF indicator light ● Flatbed motor Use this item to make sure that the control-panel is functioning. See Troubleshooting menu on page 50. ● test control-panel LEDs by turning them on and off ● display a test pattern on the display (if the test pattern does not display the control panel is not correctly functioning) ● test the functionality of the control-panel buttons ● display a test grid on the touch screen (touch each section of the grid to verify touch screen sensitivity) Manufacturing test only. Not a service test. Tools for troubleshooting 383 Defeating interlocks Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For component or noise isolation, you can run the diagnostic test after removing the covers for a better view of the areas that are being tested. To operate the product with the covers removed, the door-switch levers (SW1, callout 1) must be depressed (this is the door-closed position) with a folded piece of paper. WARNING! Be careful when performing product diagnostics to avoid the risk of injury. Only trained service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed or with the door switch levers depressed. Never touch any of the power supplies when the product is turned on. WARNING! If the front- or right-door switch levers are depressed, the laser/scanners can be activated while a door is open. Figure 7-1 Front-door interlock Figure 7-2 Right-door interlock 384 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW NOTE: Anytime that a cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed, the door interlock must be manually cycled to simulate opening and closing the top cover in order for the engine to recognize the change. When the covers are installed, the door switch and fuser interlock are automatically operated. Disable cartridge check Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the product when one or more print cartridges or image drum pairs are removed or exchanged. While the product is in this diagnostics mode, consumable supply errors are ignored, and you can navigate the menus. This test can be used to isolate problems, such as noise, and to isolate print-quality problems that are related to individual print cartridges. NOTE: Do not remove or exchange print cartridges until after you start the disable cartridge check diagnostic. NOTE: Anytime a print cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed, the front door interlock must be manually cycled to simulate opening and closing the front door in order for the engine to recognize the change. When the covers are installed, the front-door switch is automatically operated. ENWW 1. Touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch Disable Cartridge Check. Tools for troubleshooting 385 Engine-test button To verify that the product engine is functioning, print an engine-test page. Use a small pointed object to depress the test-page switch located on the back of the product. The test page should have a series of horizontal lines. The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2. Figure 7-3 Engine-test button Paper-path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams. To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you open the diagnostic feature: ● Print Test Page. Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select Print Test Page to start the test. ● Source. Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional trays. ● Duplex. Enable or disable 2-sided printing. ● Copies. Set the number of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or 500. 1. Touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch Paper Path Test. 4. Select the paper-path test options for the test you want to run. 386 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Manual sensor test (special-mode test) Use this diagnostic test to test the product sensors and switches. Each sensor is represented by a letter and number on the control panel display. Following is the default state of the sensors when the test is accessed (J is not used on this product). ● A1 B1 C1 D1 E0 F0 G0 H1 I0 K0 L1 M0 N1 O0 P0 Q0 R0 S0 T0 U0 NOTE: For the K right and front door interlock switches test: Sensor K displays as 0 when both the front and side doors are closed. When either door is opened, sensor K displays as 1. There is only one interlock switch for both doors. If sensor K displays as 1, check both door actuators. If the actuators are not damaged, check connector J118 on the DC controller. TIP: If a sensor test fails and the solution is to replace an assembly, try the following. Before you replace the entire assembly, try replacing the failed sensor with the sensor from a replacement assembly. If the problem persists, replace the indicated assembly. 1. Touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting. 3. Scroll to and touch Manual Sensor Test. 4. To exit this test, touch Exit on the touchscreen. Table 7-3 Manual sensor diagnostic tests ENWW Sensor or switch name Sensor or switch number Top (A) SR8 Loop 1 (B) SR14 Loop 2 (C) SR15 Fuser delivery (D) SR5 Duplex re-feed (E) SR22 Output bin full (F) SR6 Developing home position sensor (G) SR11 Fuser pressure release sensor (H) SR7 ITB alienation sensor (I) SR17 Front and side door switchs (K) SW1, SW2 Tray 1 (L) SR9 Tray 2 paper present (M) SR3 Tray 2 installed (N) SR4 Tray 2 lift motor (O) SR1 Tray 3 paper present (P) SR3 Tray 3 feed (Q) SR4 Tray 3 installed (R) SR1 Tray 3 size (bottom) button (S) SW1 Tools for troubleshooting 387 Table 7-3 Manual sensor diagnostic tests (continued) Sensor or switch name Sensor or switch number Tray 3 (middle) button (T) SW1 Tray 3 (top) button (U) SW1 388 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW A TOP (top of page) sensor 1. Open the right door. 2. Lower the secondary transfer assembly. 3. Open the registration shutter. 4. Insert a piece of paper to activate the TOP sensor. Figure 7-4 Test the TOP sensor ENWW 5. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 6. If no response, replace the registration assembly. Tools for troubleshooting 389 B and C loop sensors 1. Open the right door. 2. Lower the secondary transfer assembly. 3. Slowly insert a piece of paper to activate the B and C loop sensors underneath the fuser. Figure 7-5 Test the loop sensors 4. Check the control-panel display for a sensor response. 5. If there is no response, replace fuser. See Fuser on page 200. 390 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW D fuser (fixing) delivery sensor 1. Open the right door. 2. Lower the secondary transfer assembly. 3. Remove the fuser assembly, and then verify that the sensor flag on the fuser assembly moves freely. If the sensor flag does not move freely, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. Figure 7-6 Test the fuser delivery sensor (1 of 2) 4. Insert a piece of paper to activate the fuser (fixing) delivery sensor. Figure 7-7 Test the fuser (fixing) delivery sensor (2 of 2) ENWW 5. Check the control-panel display for a sensor response. 6. If there is no response, replace the fuser (fixing) delivery sensor. Tools for troubleshooting 391 E duplex re-pickup sensor 1. Open the right door. 2. Use the green handle to lift the duplex jam cover. 3. Insert a piece of paper to activate the duplex re-pickup sensor (8492). Figure 7-8 Test the duplex re-pickup sensor 4. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 5. If no response, replace the right door assembly. See Right-door assembly on page 227. 392 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW F output bin full sensor NOTE: Upper-front cover has been removed for clarity. 1. Open the right door. 2. Lower the secondary transfer assembly. 3. Remove the fuser. 4. Move the output-bin full sensor flag. Figure 7-9 Test the output-bin-full sensor ENWW 5. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 6. If no response, remove the control panel and verify that the flag is moving. If not, replace the delivery assembly. If the sensor is malfunctioning, replace the delivery assembly. See Delivery assembly on page 361. Tools for troubleshooting 393 G developing home-position sensor The normal status of sensor G is 0. Testing the sensor requires the following steps: 1. Turn off the product and then remove the formatter and left side cover. 2. Reinstall the formatter and turn on the product. Resume the manual sensor test. 3. Disconnect the 3-pin connector to the right of the power cord connection. Sensor G should change to 1. 4. Reconnect the connector. Sensor G should change to 0. 5. If sensor G does not change, replace the main drive assembly. See Main-drive assembly on page 346. 394 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW H fuser (fixing) pressure-release sensor 1. Open the right door. 2. Lower the secondary transfer assembly. 3. Remove the fuser, and then rotate the gear (callout 1) to move the flag (callout 2). If the flag does not actuate, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. Figure 7-10 Test the fuser (fixing) pressure-release sensor (1 of 2) 2 4. 1 Insert a piece of paper to activate the fuser (fixing) pressure-release sensor. Figure 7-11 Test the fuser (fixing) pressure-release sensor (2 of 2) ENWW 5. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 6. If there is no response, replace fuser (fixing) pressure-release sensor. Tools for troubleshooting 395 I primary transfer-roller disengagement sensor 1. Open the right door. 2. Lower the secondary transfer assembly. 3. Remove the ITB. 4. Rotate the gear (callout 1) to move the flag (callout 2). If the flag does not actuate, replace the ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. Figure 7-12 Test the primary transfer-roller disengagement sensor (1 of 2) 1 2 5. Remove all print cartridges. NOTE: Cover all removed print cartridges with paper. 6. Locate the sensor behind the cyan OPC drum position. 396 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 7. Insert a piece of paper to activate the primary transfer-roller disengagement sensor. Figure 7-13 Test the primary transfer-roller disengagement sensor (2 of 2) ENWW 8. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 9. If no response, replace the sensor. Tools for troubleshooting 397 K right and front door interlock switches 1. Open the right door (callout 1) to disengage the right-door switch (callout 2). Figure 7-14 Test the right- and front-door interlock switches (1 of 4) 2 1 2. Close the right door and check the control panel on the product for sensor response. 3. Open the front door (callout 3) to disengage the front-door switch (callout 4). Figure 7-15 Test the right- and front-door interlock switches (2 of 4) 4 3 4. Close the front door and check the control panel on the product for sensor response. 5. If either interlock switch failed to respond, remove the upper-front cover and right-front cover. By removing the right-front cover, you can tell if the linkages are properly closing the switches. 398 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 6. Close the right door and front door to verify that the switches close. Figure 7-16 Test the right- and front-door interlock switches (3 of 4) 7. Open the right door and front door to verify that the switches open. Figure 7-17 Test the right- and front-door interlock switches (4 of 4) 8. If the switches do not close, check the connectors on the DC controller PCA. 9. If the switches are opening/closing correctly when either door is open or closed, then check J118 on the DC controller. 10. If the connectors are securely connected to the DC controller PCA and the switches still do not close, replace the DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 399 L Tray 1 media present sensor 1. Open Tray 1. 2. Move the Tray 1 media-present sensor flag. Figure 7-18 Test the Tray 1 media-present sensor 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If no response, replace Tray 1. 400 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW M Tray 2 paper out sensor 1. Remove Tray 2. 2. Move the tray 2 paper-out sensor flag. Figure 7-19 Test the tray 2 paper-out sensor ENWW 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the tray 2 paper-out sensor. Tools for troubleshooting 401 N Tray 2 closed sensor 1. Remove Tray 2. NOTE: The Tray 2 closed sensor flag is on the back of Tray 2. Inspect the flag to verify that it is aligned correctly. If it is bent upward, it might miss the sensor when installed. Figure 7-20 Test the Tray 2 closed sensor (1 of 2) 2. Insert a piece of paper in the Tray 2 closed sensor. Figure 7-21 Test the Tray 2 closed sensor (2 of 2) 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the lifter-drive assembly. See Lifter-drive assembly on page 314. 402 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW O Tray 2 stack-surface sensor 1. Remove Tray 2. 2. Move the Tray 2 stack-surface sensor flag. Figure 7-22 Test the Tray 2 stack-surface sensor ENWW 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If no response, replace the lifter-drive assembly. See Lifter-drive assembly on page 314. Tools for troubleshooting 403 P optional Tray 3-empty sensor 1. Remove the optional Tray 3 cassette. 2. Move the optional Tray 3-empty sensor flag. Figure 7-23 Test the optional Tray 3-empty sensor 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If no response, replace the optional Tray 3. 404 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Q optional Tray 3 media-feed sensor (Q) 1. Open the right door on optional Tray 3. 2. Insert a piece of paper to activate the optional Tray 3 media-feed sensor Figure 7-24 Test the optional Tray 3 media-feed sensor ENWW 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. 4. If there is no response, replace the optional Tray 3. Tools for troubleshooting 405 R optional Tray 3 stack-surface sensor (R) 1. Remove the optional Tray 3 cassette. 2. Push the lever to activate the sensor arms. Figure 7-25 Test the optional Tray 3 stack-surface sensor 3. If there is no response, replace the optional Tray 3. 406 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW S, T, and U optional Tray 3 media-size sensors 1. Push any of the three buttons to see if the control panel changes for sensors S, T or U. ● S: top button on size switch ● T: middle button on size switch ● U: bottom button on size switch Figure 7-26 Test the optional Tray 3 media-size sensors 2. ENWW If any of the tests fail, replace the 500-sheet feeder Tools for troubleshooting 407 Paper-path sensors test This test displays the status of each paper-path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages. 1. Touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch Paper Path Test. 4. Select the paper-path test options for the test you want to run. NOTE: The default state of the sensors when first entering the test is shown below. Sensor J is not used on this product. A1 B1 C1 D1 E0 F0 G0 H1 I0 K0 L1 M0 N1 O0 P0 Q0 R0 S0 T0 U0 Table 7-4 Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests Sensor name Sensor number TOP (A) SR8 Loop 1 (B) SR14 Loop 2 (C) SR15 Fusing delivery (D) SR5 Duplex re-feed (E) SR22 Output bin full (F) SR6 Developing home position sensor (G) SR11 Fuser pressure release sensor (H) SR7 Alienation sensor (I) SR17 Front and side door switches (K) SW1, SW2 MP Tray 1 (L) SR21 Tray 2 paper present (M) SR20 Tray 2 installed (N) SR13 Tray 2 lift motor (O) SR9 Tray 3 paper present (P) SR3 Tray 3 feed (Q) SR4 Tray 3 installed (R) SR1 Tray 3 size (bottom) button (S) Tray 3 (middle) button (T) Tray 3 (top) button (U) 408 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Print/Stop test Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams in the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the product-paper path. The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 mS. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the product in one of two ways. 1. Touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting. 3. Scroll to and touch Print/Stop Test. 4. Select the number of milliseconds and then touch OK. Component tests Component test (special mode test) This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems. Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If you select CONTINUOUS from the dropdown menu as the repeat option, the test cycles the component on and off. This process continues for two minutes, and then the test ends. NOTE: The door interlock switch must be defeated to run any of the component tests. If covers are removed, the door switch must be manually cycled during some tests in order for the engine to recognize a change. Print cartridges can be installed or removed during certain tests. The control-panel display prompts you to remove some or all cartridges during certain tests to rotate and isolate certain components, and to protect the cartridges and ITB. 1. Touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch Component Test. 4. Select the component test options for the test you want to run. Table 7-5 Component test details ENWW Component test Motor or solenoid number TRANSFER MOTOR M5 BELT ONLY M10 CARTRIDGE MOTOR ● M3: yellow ● M4: magenta and cyan ● M5: black Comments Rotates the transfer belt. Activates three drum motors at a specified speed for 10 seconds. BLACK LASER SCANNER M8 Activates the black/cyan scanner motor for 10 seconds. CYAN LASER SCANNER M8 Activates the black/cyan scanner motor for 10 seconds. MAGENTA LASER SCANNER M9 Activates the yellow/magenta scanner motor for 10 seconds. Tools for troubleshooting 409 Table 7-5 Component test details (continued) Component test Motor or solenoid number Comments YELLOW LASER SCANNER M9 Activates the yellow/magenta scanner motor for 10 seconds. FUSER MOTOR M2 Activate the fuser motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds. FUSER PRESSURE RELEASE MOTOR M2 reverse Reverses the fuser motor and pressurizes or depressurizes the pressure release motor. ALIENATION MOTOR M10 Disengages the developer from the primary charge roller. ITB CONTACT ALIENATION MOTOR M2 Activates the ITB drive motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds. TCU MOTOR M12 Activates the motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds. TRAY 1 PICKUP SOLENOID SL3 Activates the solenoid for 10 seconds. TRAY 2 PICKUP MOTOR M13 Activates the motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds. TRAY 2 PICKUP SOLENOID SL4 Activates the solenoid for 10 seconds. TRAY 3 PICKUP MOTOR M1 Activates the motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds. TRAY 3 PICKUP SOLENOID SL1 Activates the solenoid for 10 seconds. DUPLEX PICKUP MOTOR M11 Activates the motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds. DUPLEX REFEED CLUTCH SOLENOID CL1, SL2 Activates the clutch for 10 seconds. 410 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Diagrams Formatter PCA Figure 7-27 Formatter PCA 2 3 1 4 5 6 Table 7-6 Formatter PCA ENWW Item Description 1 Hard drive 2 Hard drive cable 3 DIMM slot (under the hard drive) 4 Fax card and cable 5 EIO slot 6 Internal USB ports Tools for troubleshooting 411 Location of connectors DC controller PCA Figure 7-28 DC controller PCA J126 Table 7-7 DC controller connectors J100: 24 v from low-voltage power supply (LVPS) and interlock J114: HVPS lower J126: memory tag connector J101: LVPS J115: fuser sensors J127: pre-exposure LEDs (rear), SR17, SL1 J105: interconnect board (ICB) J116: HVPS upper J130: registration density (RD) sensors (front and rear) J106: 500-sheet feeder, developing home position, laser motors J117: fuser motor J131: pickup motor J107: duplex sensor, tray 1 solenoid, paper present sensor J118: 5 v interlock J133: not used J108: environmental sensor J119: LVPS fan J134: not used J109: duplex clutch, overhead transparency (OHT) in, top-of-page sensor J120: drum motor 1 and drum motor 2 J137: toner collection unit (TCU) full, TCU motor, toner level detection J110: YM laser J121: drum motor 3, drum position 1,2,3 J138: 24 v to HVPS lower J111: CK laser J122: OHT out J139: fuser sensors J112: pre-exposure LEDs (front) J123: pressure release, bin full, fuser delivery J140: lift motor, tray present, stack surface J113: 24 v to high-voltage power supply (HVPS) upper J124: 24 v to scanner-control board (SCB) J143: 24 v present from LVPS 412 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Paper feeder driver PCA Figure 7-29 Paper feeder driver PCA Table 7-8 Paper feeder driver PCA connectors J401: engine connector J402: not used J404: SW1, SW2, lifter motor J405: SR1, SR2, SR3, SR4, SL1 J406: feed motor ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 413 PCAs, motors, fans, switches, solenoids, and clutches Use the diagrams to locate components. For a list of components, see Table 7-9 PCAs, motors, fans, switches, solenoids, and clutches on page 418 Base product Figure 7-30 Component locations (1 of 5) 1 414 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Figure 7-31 Component locations (2 of 5) 4 3 5 2 6 7 8 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 415 Figure 7-32 Component locations (3 of 5) 9 10 11 12 13 14 416 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Figure 7-33 Component locations (4 of 5) 15 16 17 18 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 417 Figure 7-34 Component locations (5 of 5) 19 22 20 21 23 27 24 25 26 Table 7-9 PCAs, motors, fans, switches, solenoids, and clutches Location Connector Component abbreviation Component name 1 J89 M12 Residual toner-feed motor 2 J26 FM2 Cartridge fan 3 J27 FM3 Delivery fan 4 J62 SW3 24V interlock switch 5 J118 SW1, SW2 5V interlock switch 6 J84 SL3 Multipurpose-tray pickup solenoid 7 J780 SW4 Power switch 8 J86 CL1 Duplex re-pick clutch 418 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-9 PCAs, motors, fans, switches, solenoids, and clutches (continued) Location Component abbreviation Component name 9 ICB Interconnect board (ICB) 10 LVPS Low-voltage power supply 11 HVPS (t) HVPS-T upper 12 DCC DC Controller FM1 Power-supply fan HVPS (d) HVPS-D (lower) 13 Connector J119 14 ENWW 15 J41 M3 Drum motor 1 16 J40 M4 Drum motor 2 17 J42 M5 Drum motor 3 18 J25 M10 Development-disengagement motor 19 J8 SL1 Primary transfer roller disengagement solenoid 20 J15 M2 Fuser motor 21 J55 M9 Yellow/magenta scanner motor 22 J56 M8 Cyan/black scanner motor 23 J20 M11 Duplex reverse motor 24 J21 SL2 Duplex reverse solenoid 25 J6 M13 Pickup motor 26 J83 SL4 Cassette-pickup solenoid 27 J79 M7 Tray 2 lifter motor Tools for troubleshooting 419 1 x 500 paper feeder Figure 7-35 1 x 500 paper feeder 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Location Connector 28 Component abbreviation Component name PF PCA Paper-feeder driver PCA 29, 34 J18 SL1 Paper-feeder pickup solenoid 30 J21 SW2 Paper-feeder door switch 31 J16 SW1 Paper feeder cassette media size switch 32 J15 M2 Paper-feeder lifter motor 33 J14 M1 Paper-feeder motor 420 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Sensors Figure 7-36 Sensors Table 7-10 Sensors ENWW Component abbreviation Component name SR1 Tray 3 paper surface sensor 1 SR2 Tray 3 paper surface sensor 2 SR3 Tray 3 paper sensor SR4 Tray 3 feed sensor SR5 Fuser (fixing) output sensor SR6 Output bin full sensor SR7 Fuser (fixing) pressure release sensor SR8 TOP sensor Tools for troubleshooting 421 Table 7-10 Sensors (continued) Component abbreviation Component name SR9 Tray 2 lift sensor SR11 Developing home position sensor SR13 Cassette presence sensor SR14 Loop sensor 1 SR15 Loop sensor 2 SR17 ITB disengagement sensor SR20 Cassette-media presence sensor SR21 MP-tray-media-presence sensor SR22 Duplex re-pickup sensor 422 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW ENWW STBY Print command INTR Timing chart is two consecutive print jobs on letter-size paper (full color using one-to-one speed mode) 23 Secondary transfer bias 22 Primary transfer bias Bk 21 Primary transfer bias C 20 Primary transfer bias M 19 Primary transfer bias Y 18 Developing bias Bk 17 Developing bias C 16 Developing bias M 15 Developing bias Y 14 Primary charging bias Bk 13 Primary charging bias C 12 Primary charging bias M 11 Primary charging bias Y 10 Pickup motor 9 Drum motor 3 8 Drum motor 2 7 Drum motor 1 6 TOP signal 5 Scanner motor 4 Fixing motor 3 Fixing delivery sensor 2 TOP sensor 1 Cassette pickup solenoid Operation PRINT LSTR STBY General timing chart Figure 7-37 General timing chart Tools for troubleshooting 423 Circuit diagrams Figure 7-38 General circuit diagram (1 of 2) Fuser pressure release sensor 424 Chapter 7 Solve problems Fuser delivery sensor ENWW Figure 7-39 General circuit diagram (2 of 2) Fuser motor Fuser ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 425 Figure 7-40 Product circuit block diagram ADF hub Control Panel USB + 12v 12v to 5v Pocket 5v Scanner Motor ADF open/close switch Size Sensor Home position Optics LED array Cave light 5v FFC SCB PCI-E Stapler Engine 24v Formatter Backplane ICB FFC 3.3v/5v DCC 24v LVPS 426 Chapter 7 Solve problems AC 110/220v ENWW Figure 7-41 Paper feeder circuit diagram ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 427 Print-quality troubleshooting tools Repetitive defects ruler If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect. Place the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect indicates which component needs to be replaced. Figure 7-42 Repetitive defects ruler 0 mm 27 mm 32 mm 44 mm 49 mm 50 mm 63 mm 66 mm 75.5 76 77 78 80 mm mm mm mm mm 92 mm 105 mm Distance between defects Product components that cause the defect 27 mm Print cartridge: primary charge roller 32 mm Print cartridge: developer roller 44 mm Printer: primary transfer roller 49 mm Print cartridge: RS roller 50 mm Printer: secondary transfer roller 63 mm ITB: secondary transfer backing roller 66 mm Printer: distance from secondary transfer roller to fuser 75.5 mm Print cartridge: OPC drum 76 mm ITB: driven roller 77 mm Fuser sleeve 78 mm Fuser pressure roller 428 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Distance between defects Product components that cause the defect 80 mm Printer: distance from primary transfer roller to secondary transfer roller for black 92 mm Print cartridge station to station pitch: distance from the centerline of one OPC to the centerline of the adjacent OPC ITB: drive roller 105 mm ENWW Printer: distance from registration to secondary transfer roller Tools for troubleshooting 429 Calibrate the product NOTE: The procedure below is used to calibrate the scanner portion of the product. To perform an internal print-quality calibration from the control panel, open the Print Quality menu. Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for ADF and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage head might not read the position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure, scanner offset values are calculated and stored. The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct portion of the document is captured. Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned images. The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again only rarely. Before calibrating the scanner, print the calibration target. 1. Place letter- or A4-size paper in tray 1, and adjust the side guides. 2. On the control-panel Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration. 3. Touch Troubleshooting. 4. Touch Calibrate Scanner. 5. Touch Calibrate to print the first pass of the calibration target. 6. Place the first pass of the calibration target face-down in tray 1 so that the arrows are facing into the product. 7. Touch Start to print the second pass. The final calibration target must look similar to the following figure. CAUTION: If the calibration target does not look similar to the figure shown here, the calibration process will fail and the quality of scans will be degraded. The black areas must extend completely to the short edges of the page. If they do not, use a black marker to extend the black areas to the edge of the page. Make sure that the paper is loaded correctly. 8. Place the calibration target face-up into the ADF, and adjust the side guides. 9. After the calibration target has passed through the ADF once, reposition it face down in the ADF and touch Start. 10. Place the calibration target face-down on the scanner glass, touch Start, and scan the page. After this pass, the calibration is complete. 430 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Internal print-quality test pages Print-quality-troubleshooting pages Use the built-in print-quality-troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems. 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch PQ Troubleshooting. 4. Touch Print. The product returns to the Ready state after printing the print-quality-troubleshooting pages. Follow the instructions on the pages that print out. Figure 7-43 Print-quality troubleshooting procedure hp color LaserJet CP 3530 MFP Printers Print Quality Troubleshooting Procedure 1 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 431 Figure 7-44 Yellow print-quality troubleshooting page Yellow Green Figure 7-45 Yellow comparison page Green Yellow Yellow cannot be easily seen unless combined with cyan, so half of each page is yellow and the other half is an amplified version of yellow problems (green half). Compare the yellow on page one with the corresponding green on page two for defects. You can also check the cyan page for defects. 432 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Figure 7-46 Black print-quality troubleshooting page 1 2 3 ENWW 1. Grids The grids are in inches and millimeters. They are label with letters and numbers so that defects can be described by position and by distance between repeats. 2. Color plane registration (CPR) bars After printing, the box with no extra color in each area on each page shows how far off the CPR of that color is. Each page has two process direction areas and three scan direction areas that are labeled x and y and 1–11. The page should be fed by the long edge. Each square from the center equals 42 microns. 3. Color ramp patches Used to detect offset for the OPC or developer in the image drum or offset in the fuser. Tools for troubleshooting 433 Diagnostics page Use the diagnostics page to evaluate problems with color-plane registration, EP parameters, and print quality. 1. Touch Administration. 2. Touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch Diagnostics Page. HP Color LaserJet CP 3530 MFP Printers Diagnostics Page 2 Page 1 1 4 3 5 6 7 8 DD MMM YYYY XX:XX 1 Calibration information 2 Parameters 3 Color density 4 Color-plane registration 5 Primary colors 6 Secondary colors 7 Temperature values (22 M) 8 Humidity values (22 N) 434 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Cleaning page Run the product cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and paper particles that can sometimes accumulate and cause specks to appear on the front or back side of your print jobs. HP recommends that you use the cleaning page when there is a print-quality issue. A Cleaning message appears on the product control-panel display while the cleaning is taking place. In order for the cleaning page to work correctly, print the page on copier-grade paper (not bond, heavy, or rough paper). Create and use the cleaning page ENWW 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Print Quality. 3. Touch Calibration/cleaning. 4. Touch Process cleaning page. Tools for troubleshooting 435 Configuration pages Depending on the model, up to three pages print when you select PRINT CONFIGURATION. In addition to the main configuration page, an embedded Jetdirect configuration page also prints. Configuration page Use the configuration page to view current product settings, to help troubleshoot product problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages. 1. Touch Administration. 2. Touch Information. 3. Touch Configuration/Status Pages. 4. Touch Configuration Page. 5. Touch Print. The message Printing Configuration displays on the control panel until the product finishes printing the configuration page. The product returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page. NOTE: If the product is configured with EIO cards (for example, an HP Jetdirect Print Server) or an optional hard-disk drive, an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices. Figure 7-47 Configuration page HP Color LaserJet CP 3530 MFP Printers Configuration Page 1 4 Page 1 5 2 6 7 3 8 ENGLISH 1 Printer information 2 Installed personalities and options 436 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 3 Color density 4 Calibration information 5 Memory 6 Event log 7 Security 8 Paper trays and options Tools for troubleshooting 437 HP embedded Jetdirect page The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information: Figure 7-48 HP embedded Jetdirect page HP Color LaserJet CP 3530 MFP Printers Embedded Jetdirect Page Page 1 1 4 2 5 3 6 1 HP Jetdirect Configuration indicates the product status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date. 2 Security Settings information 3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions. 4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address 5 IPv4 information 6 IPv6 information Always make sure the status line under the HP Jetdirect configuration lines indicates "I/O Card Ready". 438 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Embedded protocol page The embedded protocol page contains the following information: Figure 7-49 Embedded protocol page HP Color LaserJet CP 3530 MFP Printers Embedded Protocol Page Page 1 3 1 4 2 ENWW 1 IPX/SPX 2 Novell/NetWare 3 AppleTalk 4 DLC/LLC Tools for troubleshooting 439 Finding important information on the configuration pages Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the e-mail gateways, is especially helpful while servicing the product. This information is on the various configuration pages. Table 7-11 Important information on the configuration pages Type of information Specific information Configuration page Firmware date codes DC controller Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” When you use the remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of these firmware components Firmware datecode are upgraded. Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Embedded Jetdirect firmware version Look on the embedded Jetdirect page, under “HP Jetdirect Configuration.” Accessories and internal storage External disk (optional) All optional devices that are installed on the product should be listed on the main configuration page. Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and Options.” Shows model and capacity. Embedded HP Jetdirect Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and Options.” Shows model and ID. Total RAM Look on the main configuration page, under “Memory.” Duplex unit Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.” Additional 500-sheet feeders Additional 500-sheet feeders Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.” Engine cycles and event logs Engine cycles Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Pages since last maintenance (print engine maintenance count) Pages since last maintenance (print engine maintenance count) Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Event-log information Event-log information Look on the main configuration page, under “Event log.” In addition, separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax accessory. These pages list more-detailed information for those devices. Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing product maintenance. The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors. To see a list of the 50 most recent errors, print an event log from the Diagnostics menu. Color-band test The color-band test page shows bands of colors that can indicate whether or not the product is producing colors correctly. 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch Color Band Test. 4. Touch Print. 440 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Control-panel messages Table 7-12 Control-panel messages Control panel message Description Recommended action Output Bin Full Remove all paper from bin The output bin is full and must be emptied for printing to continue. Empty the bin to continue printing. 10.00.YY Supply memory error 1. Open the front door and remove the print cartridge, and then reinsert it. 2. Close the front door. If the message reappears, turn the product off and then on. 3. If the error reappears, replace the print cartridge. 11.XX Internal clock error To continue touch OK The product is unable to read the cartridge data. The print cartridge is present but defective. ● 10.00.00 Supply memory error (black print cartridge) ● 10.00.01 Supply memory error (cyan print cartridge) ● 10.00.02 Supply memory error (magenta print cartridge) ● 10.00.03 Supply memory error (yellow print cartridge) ● 10.10.00 Supply memory error (e-label for the black print cartridge) ● 10.10.01 Supply memory error (e-label for the cyan print cartridge) ● 10.10.02 Supply memory error (e-label for the magenta print cartridge) ● 10.10.03 Supply memory error (e-label for the yellow print cartridge) ● 10.10.05 Supply memory error (e-label for the black image drum) ● 10.10.06 Supply memory error (e-label for the cyan image drum) ● 10.10.07 Supply memory error (e-label for the magenta image drum) ● 10.10.08 Supply memory error (e-label for the yellow image drum) The product's real time clock experienced an Whenever the product is turned off and then error. turned on again, set the time and date at the control panel. See the user guide for more information. If the error persists, you might need to replace the formatter. 13.01 Jam In Tray 3 The leading edge of the paper fed from Tray 3 stopped before reaching the media feed sensor (SR4). Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.04 Jams inside right door The paper stopped at the registration sensor (A). Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.05 Fuser area jam The leading edge of the paper stopped between registration and the input to the Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. ENWW Control-panel messages 441 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action fuser. The paper did not reach the loop sensors (SR14, SR15) 13.06 Fuser area jam The paper stopped at the fuser-delivery sensor (D). Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.12 Jam inside right door The duplex refeed paper stopped before it reached duplex re-pickup sensor (SR22). Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.13 Jam inside right door The duplex refeed paper stopped between the duplex re-pickup sensor (SR22) and registration. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.1C Fuser Wrap Jam The paper is stopped in the fuser. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.20 Jams inside right door The paper is stopped at either the registration sensor (SR8), the loop sensors (SR14,SR15) or the fuser-delivery sensor (SR5). Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.21 Jams inside right door Either the front or right side door was opened while paper was in the path. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.2E Paper Late Jam Near Fuser at Sensors F - J The paper stopped between the fuser-output sensor (F) and the output-bin-full sensor (J). Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.30.00 Jam in Tray 1 Paper being fed from Tray 1 did not reach registration sensor. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.30.00 Jam in Tray 2 Paper from Tray 2 did not reach registration sensor (SR8). Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 13.30.00 Jam inside lower right door Paper being fed from Tray 3 did not reach registration sensor. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate and remove the paper or obstruction. 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY To continue touch OK The product does not have enough memory to print the page. Touch OK to print a partial page. Reduce the page complexity or add product memory. 22 - USB I/O buffer overflow To continue touch OK The product's USB buffer overflowed during a busy state. Touching OK resumes printing but results in a loss of data. 22 EMBEDDED I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue touch OK Too much data was sent to the embedded HP Touch OK to print the transferred data. Some Jetdirect print server. An incorrect data might be lost. Check the host communications protocol might be in use. configuration. 30.01.02 Scanner failure The document feeder is jammed. 30.01.03 Scanner failure 442 Chapter 7 Solve problems An ADF pickup failure occurred. 1. Remove all originals from the document feeder. 2. Open the document feeder top cover and check for torn paper or other objects, such as paper clips. 1. Verify that the original documents are not damaged. If one edge is damaged, try rotating the originals. 2. Verify that the document feeder guides are not too tight against the stack of originals. 3. Clean or replace the document feeder rollers and the separation pad. ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 30.01.08 Scanner failure The scanner carriage is locked or it has not returned to the home position within the expected time. 1. Verify that the scanner is not locked. 2. Verify that the scanner carriage can move freely. If it cannot move, replace the scanner. See Scanner assembly on page 242. The SCB firmware failed. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the scanner. See Scanner assembly on page 242. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the scanner. See Scanner assembly on page 242. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Check the SCB LED. 3. Verify that the SCB connections are correct. 4. Verify the cable from the scanner to the formatter is not plugged in backwards. 5. Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Resend the firmware upgrade. 3. Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the scanner. See Scanner assembly on page 242. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the scanner. See Scanner assembly on page 242. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. 30.01.14 Scanner failure 30.01.18 Scanner failure 30.01.19 Scanner failure 30.01.23 Scanner failure 30.01.25 Scanner failure 30.01.36 Scanner failure 30.01.39 Scanner failure 30.01.40 Scanner failure 30.01.41 Scanner failure ENWW The SCB ASIC failed. The scanner lamp failed. A scanner calibration error has occurred. The scanner-control board (SCB) cannot communicate with the product. An error occurred during the SCB firmware upgrade. There was an AFE1 (analog front-end) failure. The scanner AFE 2 failed. There was a SCB error. Control-panel messages 443 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 30.01.42 Scanner failure The PCI-E (peripheral component interconnect express) cable is faulty or disconnected. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Check the PCI-E cable connections at the SCB and the ICB. 3. Replace the PCI-E cable. See Scannercontrol board (SCB) on page 279. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Check the PCI cable at the scanner and formatter. 3. Check the SCB connections. 4. Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. 30.01.43 Scanner failure 30.01.44 Scanner failure 30.01.45 Scanner failure 30.01.46 Scanner failure The SCB memory has failed. Communication failed on the SCB. The SCB has failed. The SCB enumeration failed. 40 Embedded I/O Bad Transmission To continue touch OK A temporary printing error occurred. The Touch OK to clear the error message and connection between the product and the EIO continue printing. Turn the product off and card in the specified slot has been broken. then on. 41.3 Load Tray : [Type] [Size] The specified tray is loaded with media that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size adjusted for the tray. This message also appears if two or more sheets of media stick together in the product or if the tray is not adjusted correctly. If using glossy paper, ensure that it has been acclimated. Touch OK to use another tray. Reconfigure the size in a tray so that the product will use a tray that is loaded with the correct media size. If the message does not clear automatically from the control-panel display, turn the product off and then on. 41.5 Load Tray : [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch OK The product detected an unexpected paper size. There is a tray type mismatch. To continue, load the tray with the size and type indicated. Or, if another tray is available, touch OK to use it. This problem affects printing, but some scan functions might still be available. The tray is a cassette and there is another tray available for use. 41.X ERROR A temporary printing error occurred. Touch OK to clear the error. If the error is not cleared, turn the product off and then on. 49.XXXXX ERROR To continue turn off then on A firmware error has occurred. The following steps should help to identify possible causes and a resolution to the error condition: This type of error can be caused by corrupted print jobs or software program issues, non product-specific printer drivers, poor-quality USB or network cables, bad network connections or incorrect network configurations, invalid firmware operations, or unsupported accessories. 444 Chapter 7 Solve problems 1. Turn the product off then on. If the error returns, disconnect all interface cables and turn the product off and then on again. ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action If the error recurs only after connecting one of the interface cables or it happens randomly, go to step 2. If the error returns after the second time you turn the product off and on, follow these steps: a. The error has been isolated to when the product is in stand-alone condition. Turn the product off and remove the hard drive, fax card (if equipped), any HP paper-handling accessories, all third-party DIMMs (leave the minimum HP memory installed), and all third-party accessories. b. After you have removed all components, turn the product on and print a configuration page. If the configuration page prints, the error has been isolated to one or more components you removed. Go to step c. If the configuration page does not print, go to step e. c. Turn the product off, reinstall one of the components onto the formatter, and turn the product on. Print the configuration page after the individual component is added. d. Continue reinstalling one component at a time and printing the configuration page until you identify the faulty component. Replace the faulty component, or contact the third-party accessory supplier. e. If the configuration page did not print in step b, turn the product off and reinstall all components removed from the formatter. Reinstall the formatter. f. Perform a Cold Reset, Disk INIT and NVRAM INIT. NOTE: Customer settings or data from the disk might be lost. g. ENWW If the product does not come to a ready state after performing all steps listed above, contact your Hewlett Packard support center. Control-panel messages 445 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action NOTE: HP LaserJet formatter PCAs are rarely the cause of 49 service errors. Do not replace the formatter unless troubleshooting identifies it as the cause. 2. If the error clears after turning the product off and then on, it is possible that a print job, an action performed on the product, or a connectivity issue is responsible for the error. a. b. 446 Chapter 7 Solve problems If the error recurs only after connecting an interface cable try the following actions, if applicable: ● Try a new cable. ● Move the product to a new network port, fax-line port, or USB port. ● Verify that all unused network protocols are disabled and that all settings are correctly set for the network configuration being used. ● Reset the fax settings to factory defaults. Configure only the basic settings needed to operate: country/ region, company name, and fax number. ● Verify that the fax card firmware revision is the correct version for the formatter firmware version on the product. If the error happens only when performing certain actions, such as making a copy, sending an e-mail, or sending a fax, try the following actions, if applicable: ● Try different configuration settings ● Increase or decrease the file resolution ● Use black and white file format instead of color, or vice-versa. ● Use different file formats, for example .PDF or .TIFF. ● Use different copy settings, such as eliminating duplex printing or printing multiple pages on one sheet. ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action c. d. 50.1 FUSER ERROR ENWW The fuser has experienced a lowtemperature error. ● Reduce the number of originals. ● Reset the fax settings to factory defaults. Configure only the basic settings needed to operate: country/ region, company name, and fax number. ● Verify that the fax card firmware revision is the correct version for the formatter firmware version on the product. If the error occurs only when printing a job, try the following actions: ● Verify that the printer driver is correct for your product. ● Try printing another file from the same software program or from another software program. ● Reduce the number of features being used in the print job, such as printing watermarks, printing multiple pages on one sheet, or using job-storage features. ● If other files or software programs are successful, try making changes to the file, such using different fonts, changing driver settings, or printing with another driver language, such as PCL 6. If the error continues to occur, update the product firmware. Obtain the latest firmware from www.hp.com/go/ cljcm3530mfp_firmware. 3. If the error persists after performing these steps, contact your Hewlett Packard support center. 1. Remove any paper jams from the fuser area. 2. Remove the fuser. Check the connector (J50) between the fuser and the product. Replace the cable or fuser if the connector is damaged. 3. If the problem persists, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. Control-panel messages 447 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 50.2 FUSER ERROR The fuser has experienced a warm-up error. 1. Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector (J50) between the fuser and the product. Replace the cable or fuser if the connector is damaged. 2. Reconnect the connectors (J138, J115) of the DC controller PCA˙. Reconnect connector (J60), on the power line between the low voltage power supply and the fuser. 3. If the problem persists, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. 1. Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector (J50) between the fuser and the product. Replace the cable or fuser if the connector is damaged. 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. 1. Check the power source. If a power generator is used, improve the situation. 50.3 FUSER ERROR 50.4 FUSER ERROR The fuser has experienced a hightemperature error. The fuser driver circuit has experienced an error. NOTE: If the product does not meet the power requirement of 43 to 67Hz frequency, the fuser temperature control does not work, which causes a malfunction. 50.5 FUSER ERROR 50.7 FUSER ERROR 448 Chapter 7 Solve problems The fuser has experienced a type-mismatch error. The fuser has experienced a pressure release mechanism error. 2. Reconnect connector (J101) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the problem persists, replace the lowvoltage power supply. See Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 273. 1. Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector (J50) between the fuser and the product. Replace the cable or fuser if the connector is damaged. 2. Reconnect the connector (J139) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the problem persists, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. 1. Reconnect the connectors (J117, J123) on the DC controller PCA. 2. Run the sensor test to test the fuser pressure-release sensor (H) SR7. If the sensor is defective, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 50.8 FUSER ERROR The fuser has experienced a lowtemperature error. 1. Remove any paper jams from the fuser area. 2. Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector (J50) between the fuser and the product. Replace the cable or fuser if the connector is damaged. 3. If the problem persists, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. 1. Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector (J150) between the fuser and the product. Replace the cable or fuser if the connector is damaged. 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. There is a beam detect error. 1. Turn the product off and then on. ● 51.10=black 2. ● 51.11=cyan ● 51.12=magenta Check the flat flexible cable (FFC) connections to the laser scanners. Also check connectors J111 and J110 at the DC controller, and check connectors J503 and J501 at the laser scanners ● 51.13=yellow 3. Replace the specific laser scanner. See Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 332 or Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 325. There is a laser error. 1. Turn the product off and then on. ● 51.20=black 2. ● Check the connectors on the laser scanner. 51.21=cyan ● 3. 51.22=magenta ● 51.23=yellow Replace the specific laser scanner. See Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 332 or Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 325. 1. Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu. 2. Depending on the test results, perform one of the following steps: 50.9 FUSER ERROR 51.1Y Error To continue turn off and then on 51.2Y Error To continue turn off and then on 52.00 Error To continue turn off and then on The fuser has experienced a hightemperature error. The laser scanner experienced a startup error. 3. ENWW ◦ If the cyan or black component tests showed a startup failure, reconnect the connectors of the cyan/black scanner motor (J56 and J58) and the DC controller PCA (J106). ◦ If the yellow or magenta component tests showed a startup failure, reconnect the connectors of the yellow/magenta scanner motor (J55 and J57) and the DC controller PCA (J106). Replace the cyan/black laser scanner unit or the yellow/magenta laser Control-panel messages 449 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action scanner unit. See Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 332 or Laser/ scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 325. 52.20 Error To continue turn off and then on The laser scanner experienced a rotational error. 1. Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu. 2. Depending on the test results, perform one of the following steps: 3. ◦ If the cyan or black component tests showed a startup failure, reconnect the connectors of the cyan/black scanner motor (J56 and J58) and the DC controller PCA (J106). ◦ If the yellow or magenta component tests showed a startup failure, reconnect the connectors of the yellow/magenta scanner motor (J55 and J57) and the DC controller PCA (J106). Replace the cyan and black laserscanner assembly or the yellow and magenta laser-scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 332 or Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 325. 53.10.0X Unsupported DIMM An unsupported DIMM is installed. Turn the product off, and then replace the DIMM that caused the error. 54.01 Error The environmental sensor experienced an error. 1. Reconnect the connector of the DC controller PCA (J108). 2. Replace the environmental sensor. See Delivery fan, cartridge fan, and environmental sensor on page 285. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Perform an engine test. See Engine-test button on page 386. 3. Verify the connectors on the DC controller. 4. Replace the DC controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Perform an engine test. See Engine-test button on page 386.. 3. Verify the connectors on the DC controller. 4. Replace the DC controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. 55.00.YY DC Controller Communication Error To continue turn off and then on 55.01.YY DC Controller Memory Error To continue turn off and then on 450 Chapter 7 Solve problems The DC controller experienced a communication error. There is an error with the DC controller memory. ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 55.02.YY Outgoing Parity Error To continue turn off and then on There is a DC controller outgoing parity error. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Perform an engine test. See Engine-test button on page 386. 3. Verify the connectors on the DC controller. 4. Replace the DC controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Perform an engine test. See Engine-test button on page 386. 3. Verify the connectors on the DC controller. 4. Replace the DC controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Perform an engine test. See Engine-test button on page 386. 3. Verify the connectors on the DC controller. 4. Replace the DC controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Remove any third-party hardware. 3. Resend the firmware upgrade. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Remove any third-party hardware. 3. Attempt the remote firmware update again. 4. Replace the DC controller. 55.03.YY No Engine Response To continue turn off and then on 55.04.YY Communications Timeout To continue turn off and then on 55.05 ENGINE FIRMWARE RFU ERROR 56.01 - Illegal input To continue turn off and then on DC controller no response error. There was a DC controller communications time out. Firmware upgrade failed. There was an illegal input. 56.02 - Illegal output To continue turn off and then on There was an illegal output. Turn the product off and then on. 57.03 Error To continue turn off and then on The cartridge area cooling fan (FM2) experienced an error. 1. Reconnect the connector J26 of the cartridge fan, connector J262 on the high voltage power supply D PCA, and connector J114 on the DC controller PCA. 2. Immediately after turning on the product, measure the voltage between the connector J262-1 and J262-3 on the high-voltage power supply D PCA. If the voltage changes from 0 V to approximately 24 V, replace the cartridge fan. ENWW Control-panel messages 451 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 57.04 Error To continue turn off and then on The low-voltage power-supply fan (FM1) experienced an error. 1. Reconnect the connector J119 on the DC controller PCA. 2. Immediately after turning on the product, measure the voltage between the connector J119-1 and J119-3 on the DC controller PCA. If the voltage changes from 0 V to approximately 24 V, replace the power-supply fan. 1. Reconnect the connector J27 of the delivery fan, connector J262 on the high voltage power supply D PCA, and connector J114 on the DC controller PCA. 2. Immediately after turning on the product, measure the voltage between the connector J262-4 and J262-6 on the high-voltage power supply D PCA. If the voltage changes from 0 V to approximately 24 V, replace the delivery fan. 1. Perform the fuser motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu. 2. Reconnect the connector J117 on the DC controller PCA. 3. Replace the fuser motor. See Fuser motor on page 345. 1. Perform the fuser motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu. 2. Reconnect the connector J117 on the DC controller PCA. 3. Replace the fuser motor. See Fuser motor on page 345. A drum motor has experienced a startup error. 1. Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu. ● Y=0: Black (drum motor 3) (M5) (J121) 2. ● Reconnect the connectors J120 or J121 on the DC controller PCA. Y=1: Cyan (drum motor 2) (M4) (J120) ● 3. Y=2: Magenta (drum motor 1) (M3) (M4) (J120) Replace the appropriate drum motor. See Drum motor 1 on page 343 or Drum motor 2 or drum motor 3 on page 344. ● Y=3: Yellow (drum motor 1) (M3) (J120) A drum motor has experienced a rotational error. 1. Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu. ● Y=0: Black (drum motor 3) (M5) (J121) 2. ● Reconnect the connectors J120 or J121 on the DC controller PCA. Y=1: Cyan (drum motor 2) (M4) (J120) 3. Replace the appropriate drum motor. See Drum motor 1 on page 343 or Drum motor 2 or drum motor 3 on page 344. 57.07 Error To continue turn off and then on 59.30 Error To continue turn off and then on 59.40 Error To continue turn off and then on 59.5Y ERROR The delivery area cooling fan (FM3) experienced an error. The fuser motor experienced a startup error. The fuser motor experienced a rotational error. To continue turn off then on 59.6Y ERROR To continue turn off then on 452 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message 59.B0 ERROR Description ● Y=2: Magenta (drum motor 1) (M3) (M4) (J120) ● Y=3: Yellow (drum motor 1) (M3) (J120) Recommended action The toner-collection unit is full. Replace the toner-collection unit. See Tonercollection unit on page 190 This message displays for one of the following reasons: Replace the toner-collection unit. See Tonercollection unit on page 190. To continue turn off then on 59.BO CLEANING MOTOR ERROR REPLACE TONER COLLECTION UNIT 59.C0 Error To continue turn off and then on 59.F0 ERROR ENWW ● The cleaning motor is stuck. ● The toner-collection unit is full. ● The chute at the top of the toner collection unit is clogged. The developer-disengagement motor experienced a rotational error. The transfer unit is missing or a motor error has occurred. 1. Perform the Alienation Motor test in the Component Tests menu in the Troubleshooting menu. Verify that the cartridges are being correctly alienated. 2. Check the following connectors: J25 at the motor (M10), J261 and J251 on the high voltage power supply-D PCA, and connectors J138 and J106 on the DC controller PCA. 3. Perform the Manual Sensor Test and observe item G. The normal state is “0”. Locate the in-line connector J70 in the cable that is connected to developinghome-position sensor (SR11). To find this connector, remove the left-side cover and look in the area below the support plate. Disconnect the in-line connector. The state of item G should change to “1”. 4. If the motor is defective, replace motor M10. If the sensor is defective, replace the main-drive assembly. 1. Verify that the ITB is installed correctly. Remove the ITB and manually test the alienation mechanism. 2. The position of the alienation mechanism in the ITB is monitored by the primary transfer roller disengagement sensor (SR17), which is located in the rear of the black cartridge slot. Perform the manual sensor test while the ITB is removed, and observe the state of sensor “I”. The normal state is “0”. When you insert a piece of paper into the sensor, the state should change to “1.” 3. Open the right door and defeat the interlock. Perform the ITB Contact/ Alienation test in the Component Control-panel messages 453 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action Test menu. Observe the alienationdrive hub, which is above the cyan cartridge. 4. If the sensor (SR17) fails, order the rear pre-exposure assembly and replace the faulty sensor with the new sensor from the assembly. 5. If the alienation drive hub does not rotate, the problem could be the fuser motor or the fuser-drive assembly. 59.XY ERROR To continue turn off then on A temporary printing error occurred. Turn the product off and then on. 60.02 Tray 2 lifting error 1. Check the Tray-2 paper-surface sensor in the Manual Sensor Test 2 menu in the Troubleshooting menu. 2. Reconnect the connectors of the cassette lifter motor (J1920) and the DC controller PCA (J112). 3. Replace the lifter drive unit. See Lifterdrive assembly on page 314. 1. Check the Tray-3 paper-surface sensor in the Manual Sensor Test 2 menu in the Troubleshooting menu. 2. Reconnect the connectors of the cassette lifter motor (J1920) and the DC controller PCA (J112). 3. Replace the lifter drive unit. See Lifterdrive assembly on page 314. 60.03 Tray 3 lifting error 68.X Storage error settings changed To continue, touch OK. 69.X Error To continue, touch OK. The Tray 2 lifter motor experienced an error. The Tray 3 lifter motor experienced an error. At least one of the settings saved in the nonvolatile storage device is invalid and was reset to its factory default. Printing can continue, but there may be some unexpected behavior because an error occurred in permanent storage. ● 68.0: The onboard NVRAM failed. ● 68.1: The removable disk (flash or hard) failed. A duplex error occurred. 79.XXXX - ERROR To continue turn off and A critical hardware error occurred. then on 454 Chapter 7 Solve problems Touch OK to clear the message. Turn the product off and then on. This problem affects printing, but some scan functions might still be available. Touch Hide to remove this message and use other features. Turn the product off and then on. ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action 8X.YYYY EIO ERROR To continue turn off and then on The EIO accessory card encountered a critical error, as specified by YYYY. Try the following actions to clear the message: 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Turn the product off, reseat the EIO accessory, and then turn the product on. 3. Replace the EIO accessory. See Formatter PCA on page 192. 8X.YYYY EMBEDDED JETDIRECT ERROR The embedded HP Jetdirect print server encountered a critical error, as specified by YYYY. Turn the product off and then on. ABCDEFGHIJK 100000000000 The product is performing the paper path test. To exit press the Stop button. ACTION NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE A duplexed (2-sided) document was FOR TRAY X TRAY SIZE CANNOT BE ANY requested from a tray that is set to Any Size SIZE/ANY CUSTOM or Any Custom. Duplexing is not allowed from a tray configured to Any Size or Any Custom. Select another tray or reconfigure the tray. Authentication required Authentication is enabled for this feature or destination. A user name and password are required. Type the user name and password, or contact the network administrator. Authentication required to use this feature A user name and password are required. Type the user name and password, or contact the network administrator. Bad optional tray connection The optional tray is not connected properly 1. and must be reconnected before printing can 2. continue. Turn the product off. Remove and then reinstall optional tray. Calibrating... The product is calibrating. No action is necessary. Cancelling The product is canceling a job. No action is necessary. Card Slot Device Failure - To Clear Touch OK The specified device failed. Touch OK to clear. Card Slot file operation failed To clear touch OK A PJL file system command was received that attempted to perform an illogical operation, such as downloading a file to a non-existent directory. Touch OK to clear. Card Slot is write protected To clear touch The device is protected and no new files can Touch OK to clear message. OK be written to it. Card Slot Not Initialized The file system device must be initialized before it can be used. Initialize the device. Cartridge Error – Replace Black Cartridge Toner has settled in the black print cartridge and the auger cannot turn. Replace the black cartridge. After replacing the cartridge, turn the power off and then on to continue Cartridge Error-Replace color cartridges Reinstall, then turn off and then on The cyan, magenta, or yellow print cartridges are defective and need to be replaced. Replace the defective print cartridges and turn the product off and then on. Checking engine The product is checking the engine. No action is necessary. Checking paper path The engine is checking the rollers for possible No action is necessary. paper jams. ENWW Control-panel messages 455 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action Chosen personality not available. To continue touch OK. A print job requested a product language (personality) that is not available for this product. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory. Print the job by using a printer driver for a different printer language, or add the requested language to the product (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page. Cleaning The cleaning page is being processed. No action is necessary. Cleaning disk % complete Do not power off A storage device is being sanitized or cleaned. Do not turn off the product. The product's functions are unavailable. The product will automatically restart when finished. Clearing activity log The corresponding fax menu item has been triggered. No action is necessary. Clearing all blocked numbers The corresponding fax menu item has been triggered. No action is necessary. Clearing event log The event log is being cleared. No action is necessary. Clearing paper path The product jammed or was turned on and paper was detected where it should not be. It is attempting to eject these pages automatically. No action is necessary. Close front or right doors Either the front or right door is open. 1. Close the door. 2. Inspect the interlock on both the front and right doors. 3. Use the manual sensor test to verify that the interlock switches are working correctly. Close lower-right door The lower-right door is open. Close the lower-right door. Cooling device This product recently experienced a period of heavy usage. In order to maintain a supported operating temperature, the product cycles through intervals of printing and pausing. No action is necessary. Creating cleaning page A two-step page is being processed after having been created. This message is also used for products with duplexers that create and process the cleaning page in one step. No action is necessary. Data received The product is waiting for the command to print the last page. The last page will print in a few moments. No action is necessary. Deleting... The product is currently deleting a stored job. No action is necessary. Disk spinning up The EIO disk product in slot is spinning up. No action is necessary. Document feeder cover open The document feeder cover is open. Close the document feeder cover. Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog box. DOCUMENT FEEDER EMPTY The document feeder is empty. 1. Place originals in the document feeder or on the glass. 2. Press the Start button. 456 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action Document feeder pick error The document feeder experienced an error while picking media. 1. Open the document feeder cover. 2. If necessary, roll the green wheel to the left to advance the paper. Remove all paper found. 3. Lift the green tab to open the paper guide. Remove all paper found. 4. Close the paper guide. Close the document feeder cover. 5. Reinsert the original pages into the document feeder. Align the paper guides with the edges of the paper. 6. To continue, press the Start button. NOTE: If this jam occurs frequently, try scanning from the flatbed glass. Some paper types cause jams in the document feeder. If the original document contains both Letter and Legal size pages, select “Mixed Letter/ Legal” as the original size. Duplexing... do not grab paper The product is printing a duplex job, and the paper is accessible. E-MAIL GATEWAY DID NOT ACCEPT THE JOB BECAUSE THE ATTACHMENT WAS TOO LARGE The scanned documents have exceeded the Send the job again using a lower resolution, size limit of the server. smaller file size setting, or fewer pages. Contact the network administrator to enable sending the scanned documents by using multiple e-mails. E-MAIL GATEWAY DID NOT RESPOND A gateway exceeded the time-out value. Validate the SMTP IP address. E-MAIL GATEWAY REJECTED THE JOB BECAUSE OF THE ADDRESSING INFORMATION One or more of the e-mail addresses is incorrect. Send the job again with the correct addresses. EIO Disk initializing The EIO disk product in slot is initializing. No action is necessary. EIO disk not functional The EIO disk in slot is not working correctly. Turn the product off. Remove the disk from the slot indicated, and replace it with a new disk. Turn the product on. EIO Device Failure - To Clear Touch OK The specified device failed. Touch OK to clear. EIO file operation failed To clear touch OK A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation, such as downloading a file to a directory that does not exist. Touch OK to clear. EIO is write protected To clear touch OK The device is protected and no new files can Touch OK to clear message. be written to it. EIO Not initialized The file system device must be initialized before it can be used. Initialize the device. Entering internal application The product is opening an internal program. No action is necessary. Error The directory or file is not readable. To activate a fax, complete the required fax settings available through the Administration menu. ENWW No action is necessary. Control-panel messages 457 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action ERROR EXECUTING DIGITAL SEND JOB A digital send job failed and cannot be delivered. Try to send the job again. External device initializing An external product is initializing. No action is necessary. Fax is disabled ignoring call The product received a call, but the fax feature was not configured with the required settings (country/region, date/time, company name, fax number, etc.). The fax icon on the control panel is grayed out. Configure the fax with the required settings from the Administration menu on the control panel. Flatbed cover open The flatbed scanner cover is open. Close the flatbed cover. Found SMTP gateway The Find SMTP Gateway menu has been selected. No action is necessary Gateways failed The gateway configuration is incorrect. See Solve connectivity problems on page 501. Gateways OK No action is necessary. The gateway configuration is correct. Genuine HP supplies installed A new HP cartridge has been installed. This message appears for approximately 6 seconds before the returns to the Ready state. No action is necessary. HP DIGITAL SENDING: DELIVERY ERROR A digital send job failed and cannot be delivered. Try to send the job again. HP SECURE HARD DRIVE DISABLED The HP high-performance hard disk is disabled, or the product does not recognize the hard disk. Use the embedded Web server to configure the hard disk. 1. Open the embedded Web Server by typing the product IP address into a Web browser. 2. Click the Digital Sending tab. 3. Select the Security link from the left navigation menu, and open the Hard Disk and Mass Storage Security Settings section. 4. The following options are available: After an encrypted hard disk is paired with a specific product, it cannot be used in another product unless it is reinitialized. NOTE: After the encrypted hard disk is paired to the product, all other hard disks are disabled. 458 Chapter 7 Solve problems ◦ Disk Init: This option does not affect the disk encryption status. ◦ NVram Init: This option does not affect the disk encryption status. ◦ Disable Hard Disk Encryption and Reboot: This option completely erases the hard disk including all stored jobs, digitalsend settings, and authentication settings. All pre-loaded fonts, aftermarket fonts, and other programs must be reloaded. ◦ Reinitialize Hard Disk: This option has the same effect as the Disable Hard Disk Encryption ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action and Reboot, but it does not restart the product. Image CRC error This message is displayed before the firmware is loaded at startup when an error occurs during a firmware upgrade. Incompatible fuser The wrong fuser is installed. The product will Install the correct fuser. See Fuser not print, even though the fuser fits the on page 200. product. Incompatible supplies Two or more incompatible supplies are installed. The product will not print, even though the supplies fit the product. Install the correct supply. INFLATE FAILURE An error occurred during the firmware upgrade. Resend the upgrade. Initializing permanent storage Product is initializing permanent storage. No action is necessary. Initializing scanner The scanner is initializing. Wait until the scanner is Ready before proceeding to scan. Install cartridge The print cartridge has been removed or has been installed incorrectly. Replace or reinstall the print cartridge correctly to continue printing. Install fuser The fuser is either not installed or not installed correctly. Install the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. Install supplies At least two supplies are missing. Replace the missing supplies or make sure the installed supplies are fully seated. Install transfer unit The ITB is either not installed or not installed Replace the ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. correctly. Insufficient memory to load fonts/data To continue touch OK The product does not have enough memory to load the data (for example, fonts or macros) from the location specified. Touch OK to continue without this information. If the message persists, add memory. Internal Disk Device Failure - To Clear Touch OK The specified device failed. Touch OK to clear the message. Internal disk file operation failed To clear touch OK A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation, such as downloading a file to a non-existent directory. Touch OK to clear. Internal Disk Initializing The internal disk is initializing. No action is necessary. Internal disk is write protected To clear touch OK The product is protected and no new files can Touch OK to clear the message. be written to it. Internal disk not found Internal disk not found. Turn the product off and then on. Internal disk not functional The internal disk is not functional. Copy and send is disabled. Turn the product off and then on. Internal disk not initialized The internal disk is not initialized. Initialize the disk. Internal disk spinning up The internal disk is spinning up its platter. It No action is necessary. usually shows for approximately 15 seconds when the product comes out of power-save mode. Jobs can still print, but jobs that require disk access (i.e., stored jobs) must wait. ENWW Resend the upgrade. Control-panel messages 459 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action Jam in document feeder Paper is jammed in the document feeder. 1. Open the document feeder cover. 2. If necessary, roll the green wheel to the left to advance the paper. Remove all paper found. Lift the green tab to open the paper guide. Remove all paper found. Close the paper guide. Close the document feeder cover. 3. Reinsert the original pages into the document feeder. Align the paper guides with the edges of the paper. To continue, press the Start button. NOTE: If this jam occurs frequently, try scanning from the flatbed glass. Some paper types cause jams in the document feeder. If the original document contains both letterand legal-size pages, select Mixed Letter/ Legal as the original size. Job is being saved to disk Job is being saved. No action is necessary. LED is on To continue, touch OK This message appears when the LED is component tested. Touch OK to continue. Load Tray 1 The tray is empty or configured for a different Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog size than the size requested. box. Load Tray 1: [Type], [Size] To continue, touch OK Tray 1 is empty. Load Tray 1 with the requested paper. Or, if paper is already in Tray 1, touch OK to print. If paper is in another tray, remove the paper and insert it in Tray 1, and then touch OK. Load Tray To use another tray, touch OK A cassette tray is empty, and there is another tray available. Load the tray with the requested paper or adjust the paper guides. If another tray is available, touch OK to select. Load Tray : [type], [size] A cassette tray is empty, and there is no other tray available. Load the tray with the requested paper or adjust the paper guides. Loading program Do not power off Programs and fonts are being loaded into the product’s file system. No action is necessary. Manually feed The specified job requires manual feed from Tray 1. Load the requested media into Tray 1. Touch OK to use paper in another tray. Manually feed output stack Then touch OK to print second sides 460 Chapter 7 Solve problems The first side of a manual duplex job printed and the product is waiting for the user to insert the output stack to complete the second side. For the normal Manually Feed message, printing continues automatically when the paper is reinserted. With this message, printing stops until the user touches the OK button, which allows time for straightening the output stack. The even-numbered pages of the two-sided document have printed. Follow the next steps to print the odd-numbered pages. 1. Maintaining the same orientation, remove the document from the output bin. Do not discard blank pages. 2. Flip the document over so it is face up. 3. Load Tray 1 with the face-up document. 4. To continue printing, touch OK. ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Manually Feed: [Type], [Size] To continue, A job has specified manual feed, and Tray 1 touch OK is loaded. Recommended action Touch OK to resume printing. Manually Feed: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch OK The job specified manual feed, the MP-tray is Touch OK to switch to another tray and empty, and there is another tray available to resume printing. use. Moving solenoid To exit press STOP The solenoid and a motor are moving as part of a component test. No job to cancel This message appears when the Stop button No action is necessary. is pressed. Non-HP supply installed A refilled color or a cloned color/mono cartridge was installed, and the product previously used all genuine HP supplies. Or, an unauthorized cartridge was installed, and the product previously used all genuine supplies. Install a genuine HP cartridge, or touch OK to override the condition. Non-HP supply in use This message appears when the override button is pressed (on the non-HP supply installed error). No action is necessary. Order Cartridge The identified print cartridge is nearing the Order a replacement print cartridge. end of its useful life. The product is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages indicated. Estimated pages remaining is based upon the historical page coverage of this product. No action is necessary. Printing will continue until a supply needs to be replaced. Order Fuser Kit The fuser is near the end of life. The product Order a replacement fuser kit. is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages indicated. Printing will continue until a supply needs to be replaced. Order roller kit-Less than XXXX pages The roller kit is low due to rotations. Order a replacement roller kit. Order Supplies One or more supplies need to be replaced. Replace the supply. Order toner collection unit The toner collection unit is almost full. Order a replacement toner collection unit. Order Transfer Kit The transfer kit is near the end of life. Printing Order a replacement transfer kit. can continue. Order transfer kit Less than XXXX pages The number of pages remaining for this supply has reached the low threshold. Printing can continue. Order a replacement transfer kit. Approximate pages remaining will vary depending on the types of documents printed. Performing Color Band Test The color-band test is being performed. No action is necessary. Performing paper path test Press stop to cancel The product is performing a paper-path test. No action is necessary. Performing upgrade The product is performing a product upgrade. Do not turn the product off or press any buttons. The product will automatically restart when the upgrade is finished. Please wait The product is going offline. No action is necessary. Printing The page is being printed. No action is necessary. ENWW Control-panel messages 461 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action Printing CMYK Samples The CMYK-samples page is being generated. The product will return to the ready state when the page is complete. No action is necessary. PRINTING COLOR USAGE LOG The color-usage-log page is being generated. The product will return to the ready state when the page is complete. No action is necessary. Printing configuration The product is generating the internal configuration page. No action is necessary. PRINTING DEMONSTRATION The demo page is being generated. The product will return to the ready state when the page is complete. No action is necessary. PRINTING DIAGNOSTICS PAGE The diagnostics page is being generated. The product will return to the ready state when the page is complete. No action is necessary. Printing event log The event log page is being generated. No action is necessary. Printing file directory The product is generating the file directory page. No action is necessary. Printing font list The product is generating the font list. No action is necessary. Printing menu map The product is generating the menu map. No action is necessary. Printing mopy status The product is generating the mopy status report. No action is necessary. PRINTING PQ TROUBLESHOOTING The print-quality troubleshooting test is being generated. The product will return to the ready state when the test completes. No action is necessary. Printing registration page The product is generating the registration page. No action is necessary. PRINTING RGB SAMPLES The print-quality troubleshooting test is being generated. The product will return to the ready state when the test completes. No action is necessary. Printing stopped To continue, touch OK A Print/Stop test is running. No action is necessary. Printing supplies status The product is generating the supplies status page. No action is necessary. Printing usage page The product is generating the usage page. No action is necessary. Processing copy of ... The product is currently processing or printing collated copies. No action is necessary. Processing digital send job The product is processing a digital send job. No action is necessary. Processing duplex job The product is processing a duplex job. No action is necessary. Processing from tray The product is processing a job. The stands for the chosen paper tray. No action is necessary. Processing-intermittent mode The internal temperature of the product is too hot, and the product is processing a job(s). No action is necessary. Processing. . . The product is processing the current job but No action is necessary. has not begun to pick up pages yet. 462 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action RAM Disk Device Failure - To Clear Touch The specified device failed. OK Touch OK to clear the message. RAM Disk file operation failed To clear touch OK Touch OK to clear the message. A PJL file system command was received that attempted to perform an illogical operation, such as downloading a file to a non-existent directory. RAM Disk is write protected To clear touch The device is protected and no new files can Touch OK to clear the message. OK be written to it. RAM disk not initialized The file system device must be initialized before it can be used. Initialize the device. Ready The product is online and ready to receive data. No action is necessary. Receiving upgrade The product is receiving a firmware update. No action is necessary. Remove All Print Cartridges The product is executing a component test and the component selected is belt only. Remove all print cartridges. Remove At Least One Print Cartridge The product is executing a disable-cartridge check or component test and the component selected is the cartridge motor. Remove one print cartridge. REMOVE CARTRIDGE LOCKS At least one print-cartridge lock is installed. 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the cartridge locks from the front of each cartridge. 3. Close the front door. Replace Cartridge The identified print cartridge has reached the Replace the specified print cartridge. end of life. Printing can continue. Replace cartridge - To continue, touch “OK” A print cartridge has reached the low threshold, and the Replace Supplies menu is set to stop at low. Order a replacement print cartridge. Touch OK to continue printing. Replace DIMM MEM test failure The listed DIMM is not functioning properly and must be replaced. Replace the DIMM. Replace document feeder kit This warning message appears one month before the end of life when the maintenance interval has been reached. Follow instructions included with the document feeder kit to install. Replace fuser kit The fuser kit has reached the low threshold. Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. Replace fuser kit To continue, touch OK The fuser is nearing the end of its useful life. Printing can continue. Replace the fuser kit. See Fuser on page 200. Replace roller kit The roller kit has reached the low threshold. Replace the roller kit. Secondary transfer assembly on page 207. Replace Supplies - Override in Use The product is set to continue printing even though a supply has reached the end of life. No action is necessary. CAUTION: Using the override mode can result in unsatisfactory print quality. HP recommends replacing the supply when this message appears. The HP Supplies Premium Protection Warranty coverage ends when a supply is used in override mode. ENWW Control-panel messages 463 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action Replace Supplies - Using black A color supply (or supplies) has reached the out condition and the Color Supply Out menu item is set to Autocontinue black. No user input is required for printing to continue. Printing continues in black. Replace transfer kit The supply has reached the end of life. Printing can continue. Replace transfer kit. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. Replace transfer kit To continue, touch OK The transfer kit is at the end of life. Printing can continue, but print quality might be reduced. The product is set to stop printing when a supply needs to be ordered. To continue printing, touch OK. Replace the ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. Request Accepted Please Wait This message appears when a request to Wait for the internal page to print. print an internal page is accepted but cannot print. Resend external accessory firmware An external accessory requires a firmware upgrade. Printing can continue, but jams may occur if the job uses the external accessory. Perform a firmware upgrade. Resend upgrade A firmware upgrade did not complete successfully. Upgrade the firmware again. Restoring factory settings A Restore Factory Settings reset is being performed. No action is necessary. Restoring… A Restore Last Saved State, Restore Print Modes, Restore Optimization, or Restore Color Values operation is being performed. No action is necessary. Restricted from printing in color The print job is being forced to print in black either because the product is set to print only in black or because the user ID and application ID do not have color printing permissions. No action is necessary. RFU LOAD ERROR A failure occurred during the remote firmware upgrade. Resend the upgrade. ROM Disk Device Failure - To Clear Touch OK The specified device failed. Touch OK to clear. ROM Disk file operation failed To clear touch OK A PJL file system command was received that attempted to perform an illogical operation, such as downloading a file to a non-existent directory. Touch OK to clear the message. ROM Disk is write protected To clear touch OK The device is protected and no new files can be written to it. Touch OK to clear the message. ROM Disk Not Initialized The file system device must be initialized before it can be used. Initialize the device. Rotating Motor A component test is in progress; the component selected is the cartridge motor. Press Stop to stop the test. Rotating Motor - To exit press STOP The product is executing a component test and the component selected is a motor. Press Stop to stop the test. Sanitizing Disk % Complete Do not power off The hard disk is being cleaned. Contact the network administrator. 464 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action SCAN FAILURE The scan was unsuccessful and the document needs to be scanned again. If necessary, reposition the document to scan again, and then press Start. Scanning...page The product is scanning a job in the ADF. No action is necessary. Scanning...page from glass The product is scanning from the glass. No action is necessary. Searching... please wait The product is searching. No action is necessary. Send complete The send process is complete. No action is necessary. Sending digital send job The product is sending a digital-send job. No action is necessary. Sending to external destinations The product is sending a digital-send job. No action is necessary. Size mismatch in tray XX The media in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray. Load the correct media. Sleep mode on The product is in sleep mode. No action is necessary. SMTP Gateways OK The status of the SMTP gateways is normal. No action is necessary. Testing Please wait The product is temporarily unavailable. No action is necessary. To return to ready press STOP The product is paused, and there are no error messages pending at the display. No action is necessary. Total images: The product has processed the number of images indicated by . No action is necessary. Tray : [Type], [Size] The tray is closed if the Size/Type Prompt menu is set to Display. No action is necessary. Tray empty: [type], [size] The specified tray is empty and needs to be loaded, but the current job does not need this tray to print. Load the tray. Tray open The specified tray is open or not closed completely; the tray is not required to print and is not blocking the paper path of a tray required for printing. Close the tray. Type Mismatch In Tray The specified tray contains a media type that The specified tray will not be used until this does not match the configured type. condition is addressed. Printing can continue from other trays. Unable to connect To temporarily hide this message in order to fax or send to e-mail, touch Hide. UNABLE TO COPY The product was unable to copy the document. To temporarily hide this message in order to fax or send to e-mail, touch Ignore. Unable to mopy job Because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem, a mopy job cannot be mopied. Only one copy will be produced. Try increasing the product memory or reducing the complexity of the job. UNABLE TO SEND To temporarily hide this message in order to fax or send to e-mail, touch Ignore. UNABLE TO SEND FAX The product was unable to send the fax. Contact the network administrator. Unauthorized supply in use The product is using a non-HP supply. Any product repair required as a result of using non-HP or unauthorized supplies is not covered under warranty. HP cannot ensure the accuracy or the availability of certain features. ENWW Control-panel messages 465 Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action Unsupported data on [FS] DIMM in slot The data on the DIMM is not supported. The DIMM may need to be replaced. Turn off the product before removing it. To clear this warning, touch OK. Unsupported USB accessory detected The USB accessory is not recognized and cannot be used by this product. Remove the USB accessory. To clear this message, touch OK. Upgrade complete To continue, turn off and then on Upgrade complete. Turn the product off and then on. USB ACCESSORY UNAVAILABLE The USB accessory was installed after the product was turned on. The product does not support plug-and-play operation. 1. Remove the USB accessory. 2. Turn the product off, and then plug in the USB accessory. 3. Turn the product on. USB Device Failure - To Clear Touch OK The specified device failed. Touch OK to clear. USB file operation failed To clear touch OK A PJL file system command was received that attempted to perform an illogical operation, such as downloading a file to a non-existent directory. Touch OK to clear the message. USB HUBS NOT FULLY SUPPORTED Some USB hubs require more power than the product has available. 1. USB is write protected To clear touch OK The device is protected and no new files can be written to it. Touch OK to clear the message. USB needs too much power Power requirements for the USB accessory attached to this product are beyond supported limits. Detach the accessory, and then turn the product off and then on. Try a similar accessory that has its own power supply or requires less power. USB Not Initialized The file system device must be initialized before it can be used. Initialize the device. USB storage is initializing The designated USB storage unit is initializing. No action is necessary. USB storage is not functional A parameter in the USB storage is not working correctly. Turn the product off. Disconnect the USB storage accessory, and replace with a new USB storage accessory. USB storage removed A USB storage accessory has been disconnected since the product was turned on. To continue using the USB accessory, turn the product off and reconnect it. Turn the product off and then on to clear the message. USED SUPPLY IN USE One or more used supplies have been installed. 1. Install new supplies. 2. If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, visit us at www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit. Any repair required as a result of using used cartridges is not covered under warranty. Supply status and features depending on supply status are not available. Remove the USB hub. Wait for printer to reinitialize The user changed the RAMDISK settings. The product automatically restarts. No action is necessary. Waiting for tray to lift The tray number specified by is in the process of lifting the paper to the top of the tray for proper feeding. No action is necessary. 466 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-12 Control-panel messages (continued) Control panel message Description Recommended action Warming up The product is coming out of sleep-delay mode. Printing will continue once the product completely warms up. No action is necessary. Warming up scanner The scanner is warming up. No action is necessary. Windows login required to use this feature A Windows login is required. ENWW Enter a Windows login. Control-panel messages 467 Event log messages Print an event log Print the event log 1. Touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch Print Event Log. Show an event log View the event log from the control panel 1. Touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting. 3. Touch Show Event Log. Clear the event log Use the Service menu to clear the event log. Clear the event log 1. Touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Service. 3. Touch Clear Event Log. Event log message table Event log message Description Comments 10.40.00 Genuine HP Supplies Installed Transition from at least one non-HP to all genuine HP supplies. (no control panel message) 10.50.23 Fuser kit life reset above order threshold. For products without fusible link 10.80.YY Override not in use due to user limit The cartridge out override is deactivated because the user limit was reached on at least one cartridge. 10.81.00 468 Chapter 7 Solve problems ● YY = 00 black print cartridge (K) ● YY = 01 cyan print cartridge (C) ● YY = 02 magenta print cartridge (M) ● YY = 03 yellow print cartridge (Y) Not printing black only Printing monochrome after the color cartridge out was deactivated ENWW Event log message Description Comments 10.88.YY Override not in use 10.89.YY ● YY = 00 black print cartridge (K) The cartridge out override was deactivated because the limit was reached on at least one cartridge. ● YY = 01 cyan print cartridge (C) ● YY = 02 magenta print cartridge (M) ● YY = 03 yellow print cartridge (Y) 13.02.00 PAPER STOP JAM IN TRAY 2 AT SENSOR D 13.05.00 PAPER LATE JAM BETWEEN SENSORS D AND F 13.06.00 PAPER JAM IN FUSER 13.10.00 PAPER LATE JAM IN DUPLEX AREA SENSORS F-G 13.11.00 PAPER STOP JAM IN DUPLEX AREA AT SENSOR G 13.12.00 PAPER LATE JAM IN DUPLEX AREA SENSORS H-D 13.13.00 PAPER STOP JAM IN DUPLEX AREA SENSORS G-H 13.1C.00 FUSER WRAP JAM, PAPER IN FUSER 13.20.00 PAPER EJECT JAM AT SENSORS E, FG 13.21.00 DOOR OPEN JAM 13.2B.00 NON-SPECIFIC PAPER JAM 13.2C.00 NON-SPECIFIC PAPER JAM 13.2D.00 NON-SPECIFIC PAPER JAM 13.2E.00 PAPER LATE JAM NEAR FUSER AT SENSORS F-J 13.30.00 PAPER LATE JAM, JAM IN CASSETTE 14.X Feed roller error 54.05 ● X = 2 Tray 2 (upper cassette) ● X = 3 Tray 3 (lower cassette) Printer error Feed roller life warning Waste toner sensor failure OHT sensor out of range 54.0D.XX ENWW Halftone calibration errors 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. ● XX=00: Black densitymeasurement abnormality 2. Scroll to and touch Print Quality. 3. Touch Calibration/Cleaning. ● XX=01: Cyan density-measurement abnormality Event log messages 469 Event log message 54.0F.XX 54.14 54.1E.XX 55.06.01 55.06.02 Description Comments ● XX=02: Magenta densitymeasurement abnormality 4. Touch Full Calibration. 5. Touch Calibrate. ● XX=03: Yellow densitymeasurement abnormality ● XX=00: Black misregistration is out of range. 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Print Quality. ● XX=01: Cyan misregistration is out of range. 3. Touch Calibration/Cleaning. ● XX=02: Magenta misregistration is out of range. 4. Touch Full Calibration. 5. Touch Calibrate. ● XX=03: Yellow misregistration is out of range. 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Print Quality. 3. Touch Calibration/Cleaning. 4. Touch Full Calibration. 5. Touch Calibrate. 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Print Quality. 3. Touch Calibration/Cleaning. 4. Touch Full Calibration. 5. Touch Calibrate. 1. Turn the product off then on. 2. If the error persists, replace the DC Controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. 1. Turn the product off then on. 2. If the error persists, replace the DC Controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 270. CPR sensor abnormality Halftone calibration error. The DC controller NVRM has an abnormal read/write. The DC controller NVRM is not accessible. 55.901C DCC restored DCC NVRAM was restored from the formatter. 61.00.01 Color table error This event occurs when the color table cannot read a table from the disk and the component reverts to the version in RAM. The file could be corrupt, missing, or the disk could have failed. No messages display on the control panel. 67.XX.00 68 8X01 470 Chapter 7 Solve problems A system variable (XX) is out of range. Permanent storage was reset to factory default because the current value was not valid. ENWW ENWW Event log message Description Comments 68 8X02 The permanent storage is full. 8x7345 Disk was successfully cleaned or sanitized. 8x7346 The disk cleaning or sanitization failed. 88.00 The engine self-test failed. 99.00.01 Upgrade not performed, file is corrupt. CRC error in the firmware image (bad image) 99.00.02 Upgrade not performed, timeout during receive. IO timeout when reading header number and size 99.00.03 Upgrade not performed, error writing to disk Disk error: write operation failed 99.00.04 Upgrade not performed, timeout during receive. IO timeout when reading rest of header 99.00.05 Upgrade not performed, timeout during receive. IO timeout when reading image data 99.00.06 Upgrade not performed, error reading upgrade. Unexpected read error when reading header number and size 99.00.07 Upgrade not performed, error reading upgrade. Unexpected read error when reading rest of header 99.00.14 Upgrade not performed, the file is invalid The header number is greater than 2, but the header size is too small for this future header version. Event log messages 471 Clear paper jams Common causes of jams The product is jammed. Cause Solution The paper does not meet specifications. Use only paper that meets HP specifications. See Supported paper and print media on page 56. A component is installed incorrectly. Verify that the transfer belt and transfer roller are correctly installed. You are using paper that has already passed through a product or copier. Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied. An input tray is loaded incorrectly. Remove any excess paper from the input tray. Make sure that the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray. See Load paper and print media on page 62. The paper is skewed. The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it. The paper is binding or sticking together. Remove the paper, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload the paper into the input tray. The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin. Reset the product. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the second side of the document was printed. Reset the product and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. The paper is in poor condition. Replace the paper. The internal tray rollers are not picking up the paper. If the paper is heavier than 220 g/m2 (58 lb), it might not be picked from the tray. The rollers are worn. Replace the rollers. The paper has rough or jagged edges. Replace the paper. The paper is perforated or embossed. Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily. Feed single sheets from Tray 1. Paper was not stored correctly. Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment. Not all product packing material was removed. Verify that the packing tape, cardboard, and plastic shipping locks have been removed from the product. 472 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Jam locations Use this illustration to identify locations of jams. In addition, instructions appear on the control panel to direct you to the location of jammed paper and how to clear it. NOTE: Internal areas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams have green handles or green labels. Figure 7-50 Jam locations 7 1 2 6 5 3 4 1 Output-bin area 2 Fuser area 3 Tray 1 area 4 Optional 500-sheet paper and heavy media tray (Tray 3) 5 Tray 2 pickup area 6 Duplexing area 7 Document feeder area Clear jams When a jam occurs, a message appears on the control-panel display that describes the location of the jam. WARNING! To avoid electrical shock, remove any necklaces, bracelets, or other metal items before reaching into the inside of the product. Type of jam Procedure 13.XX.YY - Jam inside right door See Clear jams in the right door on page 475 13.XX.YY - Jams inside right door 13.XX.YY - Fuser area jam See Clear jams in the right door on page 475. 13.XX.YY - Fuser wrap jam 13.XX.YY - Jam below control panel ENWW See Clear jams in the output bin area on page 479. Clear paper jams 473 Type of jam Procedure 13.XX.YY - Jam in tray 1 See Clear jams in Tray 1 on page 480. 13.XX.YY - Jam in tray 2 See Clear jams in Tray 2 on page 482. 13.XX.YY - Jam in tray 3 See Clear jams in the optional 500-sheet paper and heavy media tray (Tray 3) on page 483 13.XX.YY - Jam inside lower-right door See Clear jams in the lower right door (Tray 3) on page 484. 474 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the right door CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it. TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-rightdoor-jams. ENWW 1. Open the right door. 2. If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin, gently pull the paper downward to remove it. 3. If paper is jammed inside the right door, gently pull the paper to remove it. Clear paper jams 475 4. Lift the paper-feed cover on the inside of the right door. If jammed paper is present, gently pull the paper straight out to remove it. 5. Close the paper-feed cover. 6. Gently pull the paper out of the pickup area. 1 2 476 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 7. Look for paper in the Tray 2 roller area. Near the bottom of the right side, squeeze the two green levers upward to release the jam-access door. Remove any jammed paper, and close the door. 8. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser, gently pull downward to remove it. CAUTION: Do not touch the rollers on the transfer roller. Contaminates can affect print quality. 9. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it would not be visible. Remove the fuser to check for jammed paper inside. CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it. a. ENWW Grasp the fuser handles, lift up slightly, and pull straight out to remove the fuser. Clear paper jams 477 b. Open the jam-access door. If paper is jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper fragments. CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers until they have cooled. 2 1 c. 1 Open the jam-access door. 2 Remove the jammed paper. Close the jam-access door, and push the fuser completely into the product. 10. Close the right door. 478 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the output bin area TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-outputjams. ENWW 1. If paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it. 2. If jammed paper is visible in the duplex output area, gently pull it to remove it. Clear paper jams 479 Clear jams in Tray 1 TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-tray1jams. 1. If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam by gently pulling the paper straight out. Touch the OK button to clear the message. HP LaserJet DDMMYYYY 00.00 AM 2. If you cannot remove the paper, or if no jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, close Tray 1 and open the right door. 3. If paper is visible inside the right door, gently pull the trailing edge to remove it. 480 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 4. Gently pull the paper out of the pick up area. 5. Close the right door. Clear paper jams 481 Clear jams in Tray 2 CAUTION: Opening a tray when paper is jammed can cause the paper to tear and leave pieces of paper in the tray, which might cause another jam. Be sure to clear jams before opening the tray. TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-tray2jams. 1. Open Tray 2 and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. 2. Close the tray. 482 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the optional 500-sheet paper and heavy media tray (Tray 3) TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-tray3jams. ENWW 1. Open Tray 3 and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly. Remove any damaged or jammed sheets of paper. 2. Close Tray 3. Clear paper jams 483 Clear jams in the lower right door (Tray 3) TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-lowerright-door-jams. 1. Open the lower right door. 2. If paper is visible, gently pull the jammed paper up or down to remove it. 3. Close the lower right door. 484 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the document feeder TIP: To see an animation of this procedure go to this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp-adfjams. ENWW 1. Open the document feeder cover. 2. Lift the rollers. 3. Remove any jammed paper. Clear paper jams 485 4. Close the document feeder cover. Jam recovery This product provides jam recovery, a feature that reprints jammed pages. The following options are available: ● Auto setting — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. ● Off setting — The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal. NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost. ● On setting — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer. Set the jam recovery feature 1. Touch the Administration menu and then touch the Device Behavior setting. 2. Touch the Warning/Error Behavior setting and then touch the Jam Recovery setting. 3. Touch an option and then touch the Save button. 486 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Solve paper-handling problems Use only paper that meets the specifications outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. Always configure the paper type on the control panel to match the type of paper that is loaded in the tray. Product feeds multiple sheets Product feeds multiple sheets Cause Solution The input tray is overfilled. Open the tray and verify that the paper stack is below the maximum stack height mark. Remove excess paper from the input tray. Print paper is sticking together. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over, and then reload it into the tray. NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can cause static electricity, which can cause paper to stick together. Paper does not meet the specifications for this product. Use only paper that meets HP paper specifications for this product. Trays are not properly adjusted. Make sure that the paper guides match the size of paper being used. Product feeds incorrect page size Product feeds incorrect page size Cause Solution The correct size paper is not loaded in the input tray. Load the correct size paper in the input tray. The correct size paper is not selected in the software program or printer driver. Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer driver are correct, because the software program settings override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the printer driver settings override the control panel settings. The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the product control panel. From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the tray. The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured. The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper. Product pulls from incorrect tray Product pulls from incorrect tray ENWW Cause Solution You are using a driver for a different product. Use a driver for this product. The specified tray is empty. Load paper in the specified tray. Solve paper-handling problems 487 Product pulls from incorrect tray Cause Solution The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured. The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper. Paper does not feed automatically Paper does not feed automatically Cause Solution Manual feed is selected in the software program. Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the checkmark button . The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper. The input tray is empty. Load paper into the input tray. Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path. The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured. The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the paper. The manual-feed prompt is set to ALWAYS. The product always prompts for manual feed, even if the tray is loaded. Open the tray, reload the media, and then close the tray. Or, change the manual-feed prompt setting to UNLESS LOADED, so that the product prompts for manual feed only when the tray is empty. The USE REQUESTED TRAY setting on the product is set to EXCLUSIVELY, and the requested tray is empty. The product will not use another tray. Load the requested tray. Or, change the setting from EXCLUSIVELY to FIRST on the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu. The product can use other trays if no media is loaded in the specified tray. Paper does not feed from Tray 2 or 3 Paper does not feed from Tray 2 or 3 Cause Solution The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper. The input tray is empty. Load paper in the input tray. The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the product control panel. From the product control panel, select the correct paper type for the input tray. Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path. Closely inspect the fuser area for jams. None of the optional trays appear as input tray options. The optional trays only display as available if they are installed. Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that 488 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Paper does not feed from Tray 2 or 3 Cause Solution the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional trays. An optional tray is incorrectly installed. Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the product. The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured. The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper. Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed Cause Solution The correct paper type is not specified in the software or printer driver. Verify that the correct paper type is selected in the software or printer driver. The input tray is overfilled. Remove excess paper from the input tray. Do not exceed the maximum stack height marks for the tray. Paper in another input tray is the same size as the transparencies, and the product is defaulting to the other tray. Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer driver. Use the product control panel to configure the tray to the paper type loaded. The tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is not configured correctly for type. Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer driver. Use the product control panel to configure the tray to the paper type loaded. Transparencies or glossy paper might not meet supported paper specifications. Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this product. High-humidity environments may cause glossy paper not to feed, or to feed too many sheets. Avoid printing glossy paper in high humidity conditions. When printing glossy paper, removing the paper from the wrapper and letting it rest for a few hours can improve feeding into the product. However, letting paper rest in humid environments may also cause blisters. Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product ENWW Cause Solution Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray. Only Tray 1 can feed envelopes. Load envelopes into Tray 1. Envelopes are curled or damaged. Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled environment. Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too high. Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled environment. Solve paper-handling problems 489 Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product Cause Solution Envelope orientation is incorrect. Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly. This product does not support the envelopes being used. Refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes. Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes. Output is curled or wrinkled Output is curled or wrinkled Cause Solution Paper does not meet the specifications for this product. Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this product. Paper is damaged or in poor condition. Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in good condition. Product speed needs to be reduced. Set the PAPER CURL option in the Print Quality menu to REDUCED to decrease full speed to 10 ppm (instead of 40 ppm) and 3/4 speed to 7.5 ppm (instead of 30 ppm). Product is operating in an excessively humid environment. Verify that the printing environment is within humidity specifications. You are printing large, solid-filled areas. Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a different pattern. Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed moisture. Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh, unopened package. Paper has poorly cut edges. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem persists, replace the paper. The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or selected in the software. Configure the software for the paper (see the software documentation). Configure the tray for the paper, see Load paper and print media on page 62. The paper has previously been used for a print job. Do not re-use paper. Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly Cause Solution You are trying to duplex on unsupported paper. Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing. The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing. Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing. 490 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly ENWW Cause Solution The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or letterhead. Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page leading into the product. For Tray 2 and 3, load the paper printed side up with the top of the page toward the right of the product. The product configuration is not set for duplexing. In Windows, run the automatic configuration feature: 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (for Windows XP). 2. Right-click the HP product icon, and then click Properties or Printing Preferences. 3. Click the Device Settings tab. 4. Under Installable Options, click Update Now in the Automatic Configuration list. Solve paper-handling problems 491 Use manual print modes Try the following multi-purpose (MP) modes to see if they solve the image-quality problems. At the control panel, touch Administration, and then Print Quality, and then scroll to the Print Modes or Optimize submenus. If you are having print-quality problems when using a specific paper type, use the Print Modes submenu to override the factory-default mode setting can sometimes resolve the print quality problems. You can associate a different print mode with each paper type. Use the Optimize submenu to optimize print engine parameters to get the best possible print quality for all the jobs rather than printing by media type. Use the Restore Optimize option to reset all of the Optimize parameters back to the factory default settings Table 7-13 MP modes under the Adjust paper types> sub menu PRINT MODE ● Plain ● Light 60-74g ● Intermediate 85-95g ● Bond ● Recycled ● Mid-Weight 96-110g ● Heavy 111-130g ● Mid-Wt Glossy 96-110 ● Hvy Glossy 111-130g ● Extra Heavy 131-175 ● Xhvy Glossy 131-175g ● Card Stock 176-220g ● Card Glossy 176-220 ● Transparency ● Labels NOTE: Not all print modes are available for all paper types. Table 7-14 MP modes under the Optimize submenu BACKGROUND Set to ALTERNATIVE 1 when a background occurs all over the page. Set to ALTERNATIVE 2 when thin vertical lines appear on the page. Set to ALTERNATIVE 3 when the other alternatives do not correct the problem. REGISTRATION Set to ALTERNATIVE when color misregistration occurs. TRANSFER CONTROL Set to ALTERNATIVE 1 to reduce primary transfer bias and to resolve low density or blotchy images. Set to ALTERNATIVE 2 to resolve ghosting outlines that look like a finger or fingers. Set to ALTERNATIVE 3 when the other alternatives do not correct the problem. 492 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Table 7-14 MP modes under the Optimize submenu (continued) TRAY1 Set the mode to ALTERNATE if you are seeing marks on the back side of the paper when printing from Tray 1. This sets the product to initiate a clean sequence every time a job finishes when the product is set for Any Size and Any Type for Tray 1. ENVIRONMENT Set to LOW TEMP if the product is operating in a lowtemperature environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image. LINE VOLTAGE Set to LOW VOLTAGE if the product is operating in a lowvoltage environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image. TRACKING CONTROL Improves color stability by adjusting the bias voltage. Make sure this mode is set to ON. UNIFORMITY CONTROL Set to ALTERNATIVE 1 to improve uniformity on any paper type. Set to ALTERNATIVE 2 to improve uniformity on normal and light paper types. Set to ALTERNATIVE 3 when the other alternatives do not correct the problem. NORMAL PAPER Set to SMOOTH when printing on smooth paper of normal weight. HEAVY PAPER Set to SMOOTH when printing on smooth, heavy media types. ENVELOPE MODE Set to REDUCED TEMP if envelopes are sticking due to moisture in the envelop adhesive. RESISTANCE MODE Set to Up to resolve print-quality issues caused by poor secondary transfer in low-humidity environments with resistive or rough surface media. HUMIDITY MODE With glossy film, set to High when the product is in a highhumidity environment and print-quality defects occur on HP Tough Paper or Opaque film. With transparencies, set to High when the product is in a highhumidity environment and print-quality defects occur on color transparencies on the first page of a print job. With all other paper types, set to High when the product is in a high-humidity environment and light density occurs on the first page of a print job. ENWW PRE-ROTATION MODE Set this feature to ON if horizontal banding occurs on pages. FUSER TEMP MODE If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on the following page, first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode settings are correct for the type of paper you are using. If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs, set the Fuser Temp feature to one of the Alternate settings . Try the ALTERNATE 1 setting first and see if it solves the problem. If you continue to see the problem, try ALTERNATE 2 and then ALTERNATE 3. Using the ALTERNATE 2 and ALTERNATE 3 settings might cause an extra delay between jobs. PAPER CURL MODE Use in high-humidity and high-temperature environments. The REDUCED setting decreases fuser temperature and increases the interpage gap. RESTORE OPTIMIZE Return all settings to the factory-default settings. Use manual print modes 493 Solve image-quality problems This section helps you define print-quality problems and what to do to correct them. Often print-quality problems can be handled easily by making sure that the product is properly maintained, using paper that meets HP specifications, or running a cleaning page. Image defects table The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the product short-edge first. These examples illustrate problems that would affect all of the pages that you print, whether you print in color or in black only. The topics that follow list the typical cause and solution for each of these examples. For ADF image-quality problems, verify that the scanner is scanning from the ADF and not the scanner glass. If it is scanning from the glass, you should see the scanner illuminate and the optical head move the entire length of the glass. If no document is on the glass, a blank page is produced. Problem Cause Solution Print is light or faded on entire page. Poor contacts exist on the ITB unit and the product grounding unit. Clean the grounding contacts. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. Poor secondary transfer contacts with exist on the secondary transfer roller and the ITB. Clean the contacts. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. Poor primary transfer bias contacts on the ITB unit and product. Clean the contacts of the color that produces the light print. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. Print is light or faded in a particular color. Poor primary charging bias contacts with the print cartridge and product. Poor developing bias contacts with the print cartridge and product. Image is too dark. 494 Chapter 7 Solve problems The image-density sensor is defective. Replace the color misregistration/imagedensity sensor unit. ENWW Problem Cause Solution Page is blank. The source document was not placed in the ADF input tray face-up. Verify that the source document is face-up in the ADF input tray. The source document was not detected in the ADF input tray. Remove and then reinsert the source document into the ADF, making sure that it is placed face-up. A source document was not picked up when attempting to feed multiple documents. Inspect the ADF pickup and feed rollers and the ADF separation pad for damage. Clean the rollers if they are dirty. If the ADF separation pad or rollers are warn, replace them. See ADF roller assembly and separation pad on page 215. The high-voltage power-supply lower is defective (no developing bias output). Replace the high-voltage power-supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. The page is all black or a solid color. Poor contact exists in the primary charging bias or developing bias contacts between the print cartridge and the product. Clean each contact of the color that produces the all black or solid color. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. White spots appear in an image The static charge eliminator is dirty. Clean the static charge eliminator. The primary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace the ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. The secondary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace the secondary-transfer-roller. See Secondary transfer roller on page 205. The secondary transfer roller is dirty. Replace the secondary transfer roller. See Secondary transfer roller on page 205. The fuser inlet guide or separation guide is dirty. Clean the dirty parts. If the dirt does not come off, replace the guide. The pressure roller is dirty. Execute the cleaning page. If the dirt does not come off, replace the fuser. The back of the page is dirty. ENWW Solve image-quality problems 495 Problem Cause Solution Vertical streaks or bands appear on the page. The ADF small glass might be dirty. Clean the ADF small glass. Scratches are present on the circumference of the photosensitive drum. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. Scratches are present on the circumference of the fuser roller. Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. Scratches are present on the circumference of the ITB. Replace the ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. The ITB drive roller is deformed or has deteriorated. The ITB cleaning mechanism is malfunctioning. Vertical white lines appear in a particular color. Vertical white lines appear in all colors. Horizontal lines appear on the page. A horizontal white line appears on the page. 496 Chapter 7 Solve problems The laser beam window is dirty. Clean the window and remove any foreign substances. Scratches are present on the circumference of the developing cylinder or photosensitive drum. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. The laser/scanner-unit mirror is dirty. Replace the laser/scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 325 or Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 332. Horizontal scratches on the fuser roller. Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. Scratches are present on the circumference of the ITB. Replace the ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. Repetitive horizontal lines appear. Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the dirty roller. Clean the roller. If the roller cannot be cleaned, replace the roller. Horizontal scratches are present on the photosensitive drum. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. Horizontal scratches are present on the fuser roller. Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. Repetitive horizontal white lines appear. Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the dirty roller. Clean the roller. If the roller cannot be cleaned, replace the roller. Horizontal scratches are present on the photosensitive drum. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. Scratches are present on the circumference of the ITB. Replace the ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. ENWW Problem Cause Solution Image in a particular color does not print in the correct color. Poor contact exists in the primary charging bias or developing bias contacts between the print cartridge and the product. Clean each contact of the color that produces the missing color. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. The print cartridge (primary charging roller, developing roller, or photosensitive drum) is defective. Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect. The high-voltage power-supply lower is defective (no primary charging bias or developing bias output). Replace the high-voltage power-supply lower. See High-voltage power supply lower on page 308. The laser/scanner unit is defective. Replace the laser/scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 325 or Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 332. The secondary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace the secondary-transfer-roller. See Secondary transfer roller on page 205. Dropouts appear. The primary charging roller, Replace the print cartridge of the color that developing roller,, or photosensitive matches the defect. drum is deformed or has deteriorated. The toner is not fully fused to the paper. The fuser roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace the fuser. The high-voltage power-supply T PCA is defective (no transfer bias output). Replace the high-voltage power-supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper on page 339. The fuser roller or pressure roller is scarred or deformed. Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. The fuser control PCA is defective. Replace the low-voltage power supply. See Fuser on page 200. The thermistor is defective. Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. The fuser heater is defective. ENWW Solve image-quality problems 497 Problem Cause Solution Some color is misregistered. The product is incorrectly calibrated. Calibrate the product. The ITB unit is defective. If the ITB does not rotate smoothly or a cleaning malfunction occurs (ITB is dirty), replace the ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 209. The drive gear of the ITB motor is worn or chipped. Check each drive gear between the ITB drive roller and the ITB motor. If the gear is worn or chipped, replace the drive unit. The RD sensor is defective. Open the close the front door several times to clean the RD sensor. If the problem persists, replace the RD sensor. See Registration density (RD) sensor assembly on page 297. The laser/scanner unit is defective. Replace the laser/scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 325 or Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 332. The print cartridge is defective. Replace the print cartridge of the affected color. The product has residual media. Remove the residual media. Poor grounding contacts exist between each print cartridge and the product. Clean the grounding contacts on each print cartridge and the product. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. The fuser inlet guide is dirty. Clean the fuser inlet guide. The ADF white backing is not uniformly pressing the source document against the flatbed glass. Check the ADF white backing for damage or warping. Replace the ADF if necessary. See Automatic document feeder (ADF) on page 212. The product is experiencing page skew. See the “Text or graphics are skewed on the printed page” row in this table. The laser/scanner unit is defective. Replace the laser/scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 325 or Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 332. The ADF input tray guides are not correctly adjusted. Make sure that the ADF input tray guides are adjusted so that they are lightly touching the sides of the paper stack. A source document was not picked up when attempting to feed multiple documents. Inspect the ADF pickup and feed rollers and the ADF separation pad for damage. Clean the rollers if they are dirty. If the ADF separation pad or rollers are warn, replace them. See ADF roller assembly and separation pad on page 215. The registration shutter spring is unhooked. Check the spring and place it in the correct position. The registration shutter spring is deformed. Replace the registration assembly. See Registration assembly on page 303. Toner smears appear on the media. The printed page contains misformed characters. Text or graphics are skewed on the printed page. 498 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Problem Cause Solution The printed page contains wrinkles or creases. The roller or media feed guide is dirty. Clean any dirty components. A roller is deformed or has deteriorated. Replace any deformed or deteriorated rollers. The paper feed guide is damaged. Replace the paper-feed-guide unit. The photosensitive drum is dirty. Replace the print cartridge. The fuser roller or pressure roller is dirty. Execute a Pressure roller clean mode. If the dirt does not come off, replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 200. The copied image does not look like the source document. If the copy was made using the ADF, make sure that no media is on the flatbed glass from a previous copy job. The front of the page is dirty. Unexpected image The scanner-control board (SCB) has Replace the SCB. See Scanner-control board (SCB) on page 279. failed. ENWW Solve image-quality problems 499 Solve performance problems Problem Cause Solution Pages print but are totally blank. The document might contain blank pages. Check the document that you are printing to see if content appears on all of the pages. The product might be malfunctioning. To check the product, print a Configuration page. Heavier paper types can slow the print job. Print on a different type of paper. Complex pages can print slowly. Proper fusing may require a slower print speed to ensure the best print quality. The product might not be pulling paper correctly. Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly. The paper is jamming in the product. Clear the jam. See Clear paper jams on page 472. The USB cable might be defective or incorrectly connected. ● Disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect it. ● Try printing a job that has printed in the past. ● Try using a different USB cable. Pages print very slowly. Pages did not print. Other devices are running on your computer. 500 Chapter 7 Solve problems The product might not share a USB port. If you have an external hard drive or network switchbox that is connected to the same port as the product, the other device might be interfering. To connect and use the product, you must disconnect the other device or you must use two USB ports on the computer. ENWW Solve connectivity problems Solve direct-connect problems If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable. ● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product. ● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 meters (6 feet). Replace the cable if necessary. ● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if necessary. Solve network problems Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a configuration page. See Print information pages on page 80. 1. Are there any physical connection problems between the workstation or file server and the product? Verify that the network cabling, connections, and router configurations are correct. Verify that the network cable lengths meet network specifications. 2. Are your network cables connected properly? Make sure that the product is attached to the network using the appropriate port and cable. Check each cable connection to make sure it is secure and in the right place. If the problem continues, try a different cable or ports on the hub or transceiver. The amber activity light and the green link status light next to the port connection on the back of the product should be lit. 3. Are the link speed and duplex settings set correctly? Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). See Networking and I/O on page 31. 4. Can you "ping" the product? Use the command prompt to ping the product from your computer. For example: ping 192.168.45.39 Ensure that the ping displays round-trip times. If you are able to ping the product, verify that the IP address configuration for the product is correct on the computer. If it is correct, delete and then add the product again. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network. 5. Have any software applications been added to the network? Make sure they are compatible and that they are installed correctly with the correct printer drivers. 6. Are other users able to print? The problem may be workstation-specific. Check the workstation network drivers, printer drivers, and redirection (capture in Novell NetWare). 7. ENWW If other users are able to print, are they using the same network operating system? Solve connectivity problems 501 Check your system for proper network operating system setup. 8. Is your protocol enabled? Check the status of your protocol on the Configuration page. You can also use the embedded Web server to check the status of other protocols. See Embedded Web server on page 85. 9. Does the product appear in HP Web Jetadmin or other management application? ● Verify network settings on the Network configuration page. ● Confirm the network settings for the product using the product control panel (for products with control panels). 502 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Service mode functions Service menu The Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu. When you select Service from the list of menus, the product prompts you to type an eight-digit PIN number. The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series is 11353008. NOTE: The product automatically exits the Service menu after about one minute if no items are selected or changed. 1. Scroll to and touch Administration. 2. Scroll to and touch Service. 3. Touch the Service use only: text box near the center of the control-panel display. The touchscreen numeric keypad appears. 4. Touch the touchscreen numeric keypad buttons to type the PIN (11353008). 5. Touch OK to save the PIN or Cancel to exit the screen. 6. The PIN displays in the Service use only: text box as ********. 7. Touch OK to open the Service menu or Cancel to exit the screen. The following menu items appear in the Service menu: Menu item ENWW Sub-menu item Description Clear Event Log Use this item to clear the product event log. Mono Cycle Count The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted (not including engine-test prints). Color Cycle Count The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted (not including engine-test prints). Refurbish Cycle Count Use this item to record the page count when the product was refurbished. Document Feeder Kit Count: Set the total number of pages that have been fed through the ADF. Document Feeder Kit Interval Total number of pages since the document feeder kit was replaced. ADF Count Set the total pages fed through the ADF. Flatbed Count Set the total pages scanned from the flatbed. ADF Simplex Count Set the total single-sided pages fed through the ADF. ADF Duplex Count Set the total two-sided pages fed through the ADF. Copy Scan Count Set the total copy pages that have been scanned. Send Scan Count Set the number of scanned pages sent to e-mail. Copy Pages Count Set the number of scanned pages that have been printed. Service mode functions 503 Menu item Sub-menu item Description Scanner Settings ADF Settings Set the calibration values. Glass Settings Set the calibration values. Serial number Set the serial number. SERVICE ID Use this item to show the date that the product was first used on the control panel. This eliminates the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty. Restore the service ID If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the product was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the dates: 1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the product was first used in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12. 2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9. ◦ Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 or add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287. Convert the service ID to an actual date You can use the product Service ID number to determine whether the product is still under warranty. Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows: 1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the product was installed. 2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month. 3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date. Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows: 1. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002. 2. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Since there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10, which represents October. 3. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date. 4. The complete date is 17-October-2002. NOTE: Cold Reset Paper 504 Chapter 7 Solve problems A six-day grace period is built into the date system. When you perform a cold reset, the paper size that is stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting. If you replace a formatter board in a country/region that uses A4 as the standard paper size, use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4. LETTER and A4 are the only available values. ENWW Product resets Restore factory settings Use the Resets menu to restore factory settings. 1. Scroll to and touch Administration and then touch Resets. 2. Touch Restore Factory Settings and then touch Reset. For more information, see Resets menu on page 53. Hard disk initialization (optional) A hard disk initialization will erase and reformat the product's hard disk. Perform hard disk initialization only if an error code displays on the control panel indicating a disk error. Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it. ENWW 1. Turn the product on. 2. As the product performs its power-on sequence, press and hold the Start button until all lights on the control panel are lit. 3. Press the 5 key. The INITIALIZE DISKS menu item appears. 4. Press the 6 key. The product initializes the hard disk and continues its power-on sequence. Service mode functions 505 NVRAM initialization CAUTION: Initializing NVRAM resets the serial number, the event log, the page counts, the calibration settings, and the EIO card. Use the Service menu to restore the serial number and page counts. You also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this product to recognize the product. Initialize NVRAM only when absolutely necessary. In most situations, use a cold reset to reset product variables but still retain the needed values in the Service menu. NOTE: Before performing an NVRAM initialization, print a menu map and a configuration page. Use the information on these pages to reset any customer-specific settings. From the configuration page and supplies status page, gather the following information: ● Total page count and color page count ● Serial number 1. Turn the product off. 2. Press and hold 9, turn the power on, wait for all three LEDs to stay on. This might take up to 20 seconds (release the 9 key). 3. Press and release 3, and then press and release Start. 4. Use the 3 and 9 keys to scroll to NVRAM INIT (this message appears in the upper-left corner of the display). 5. Press and release 6 to start the initialization. Restore factory settings (cold reset) Before beginning, print a configuration page and supplies status page. Use these pages to verify that the resets have occurred. 1. Turn the product offn. 2. Press and hold 6, turn the power on, wait for all three LEDs to stay on. This might take up to 20 seconds (release the 6 key). 3. Use the 3 and 9 keys to scroll to Cold Reset (this message appears in the upper-left corner of the display). 4. Press the 6 key to start the cold reset. 506 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW Solve fax problems See the HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 500 Fax Guide and the HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 500 Send Fax Driver Guide, which are included on the product User CD. The guides are also available for download from www.hp.com/go/mfpfaxaccessory500. Solve e-mail problems If you are unable to send e-mails by using the digital-send feature, you might need to reconfigure the SMTP gateway address or the LDAP gateway address. Print a configuration page to find the current SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses. See Print information pages on page 80. Use the following procedures to check if the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses are valid. Validate the SMTP gateway address NOTE: This procedure is for Windows operating systems. 1. Open an MS-DOS command prompt: click Start, click Run, and then type cmd. 2. Type telnet followed by the SMTP gateway address and then the number 25, which is the port over which the product is communicating. For example, type telnet 123.123.123.123 25 where "123.123.123.123" represents the SMTP gateway address. 3. Press Enter. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, the response contains the message Could not open connection to the host on port 25: Connect Failed. 4. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator. Validate the LDAP gateway address NOTE: This procedure is for Windows operating systems. ENWW 1. Open Windows Explorer. In the address bar, type LDAP:// immediately followed by the LDAP gateway address. For example, type LDAP://12.12.12.12 where "12.12.12.12" represents the LDAP gateway address. 2. Press Enter. If the LDAP gateway address is valid, the Find People dialog box opens. 3. If the LDAP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator. Solve fax problems 507 508 Chapter 7 Solve problems ENWW 8 ENWW Parts and diagrams ● Order parts, accessories, and supplies ● Part numbers ● Screws ● How to use the parts lists and diagrams ● ADF and scanner assemblies ● External covers, panels, and doors ● Right door assembly ● Internal components ● Accessories ● Alphabetical parts list ● Numerical parts list 509 Order parts, accessories, and supplies You can obtain the following items directly from HP: ● Replacement parts: To order replacement parts in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/hpparts/. Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center. ● Supplies and accessories: To order supplies in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. To order supplies worldwide, go to www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html. To order accessories, go to www.hp.com/support/cljcm3530mfp. 510 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Part numbers The following list of accessories was current at the time of printing. Ordering information and availability of the accessories might change during the life of the product. Customer self-repair (CSR) components Table 8-1 Customer self-repair (CSR) components ENWW Item Part number Formatter kit CC519-67903 128 MB memory kit CC519-67910 256 MB memory kit CC519-67911 512 MB memory kit CC519-67912 Hard drive kit CC519-67904 Hard drive cable kit CC519-67905 Fax PCA CC456-60001 Fax cable kit CC519-67907 Toner collection unit kit CC468-67910 Pick/feed and separation pad kit CC468-67911 ITB kit CC468-67907 110V fuser kit CC519-67901 220V fuser kit CC519-67902 Duplex reverse guide kit CC468-67913 Secondary transfer roller kit CC468-67914 Secondary transfer assembly kit (duplex) CC468-67915 Fuser cleaning kit (letter) CC468-67919 Front door assembly and nameplate CC519-67916 500 sheet feeder replacement kit CC468-67905 500 sheet feeder right door kit CC468-67906 Control panel kit CC519-67908 ADF kit CC483-67902 ADF roller kit CC519-67909 Stapler cartridge Q7432-67901 250-sheet cassette RM1-4962-000CN 500-sheet cassette RM1-6198-000CN Control panel overlay—English CC519-40003 Control panel overlay—French CC519-40004 Control panel overlay—Italian CC519-40005 Part numbers 511 Table 8-1 Customer self-repair (CSR) components (continued) Item Part number Control panel overlay—German CC519-40006 Control panel overlay—Spanish CC519-40007 Control panel overlay—Portuguese CC519-40009 Control panel overlay—Norwegian CC519-40010 Control panel overlay—Swedish CC519-40011 Control panel overlay—Finnish CC519-40012 Control panel overlay—Danish CC519-40013 Control panel overlay—Polish CC519-40014 Control panel overlay—Russian CC519-40015 Control panel overlay—Czech CC519-40016 Control panel overlay—Hungarian CC519-40017 Control panel overlay—Turkish CC519-40018 Control panel overlay—Hebrew CC519-40019 Control panel overlay—Greek CC519-40020 Control panel overlay—Arabic CC519-40021 Control panel overlay—Croatian CC519-40022 Control panel overlay—Romanian CC519-40023 Control panel overlay—Slovak CC519-40024 Control panel overlay—Slovenian CC519-40025 Control panel overlay—Catalan CC519-40026 Control panel overlay—Chinese, traditional CC519-40027 Control panel overlay—Chinese, simplified CC519-40028 Control panel overlay—Korean CC519-40030 Control panel overlay—Japanese CC519-40031 Control panel overlay—Thai CC519-40032 Control panel overlay—Bahasa Indonesian CC519-40033 Accessories and products Table 8-2 Accessories Item Description Part number Product part number Stapler cartridge Replacement staple cartridge Q7432-67901 Q7432A 1 x 500 paper feeder 500-sheet paper and heavy media tray CC468-67905 CE522A 512 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-2 Accessories (continued) Item Description Part number Product part number Fax PCA HP LaserJet MFP analog fax accessory 500 CC456-60001 CC487A Digital send software HP Digital Sending Software 4 NA T1936AA Print server HP Jetdirect 630n IPv6 Gigabit Ethernet print server NA J7997G HP Jetdirect 635n IPv6/IPSec print server NA J7961G HP 1284B parallel card NA J7972G Parallel card Print cartridges and toner collection unit Table 8-3 Print cartridges and toner collection unit Item Description1 Part number Product part number HP Color LaserJet black print cartridge Standard black cartridge CE250-67901 CE250A HP Color LaserJet black print cartridge High-capacity black cartridge CE250-67902 CE250X HP Color LaserJet cyan print cartridge Cyan cartridge CE251-67901 CE251A HP Color LaserJet yellow print cartridge Yellow cartridge CE252-67901 CE252A HP Color LaserJet magenta print cartridge Magenta cartridge CE253-67901 CE253A Toner collection unit Waste toner box assembly CC468-67910 CE254A Waste toner installation instructions Toner cleaning cloth For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies 1 Memory Table 8-4 Memory ENWW Item Description Product part number 200-pin DDR DIMM 128MB CC409AX Boosts the ability of the product to handle large or complex print jobs. 256MB CC410AX 512MB CC411AX HP Encrypted High Performance hard disks HP high-performance secure hard disk J8018A HP Encrypted High Performance hard disks HP high-performance secure EIO hard disk J8019A Part numbers 513 Cables and interfaces Table 8-5 Cables and interfaces Item Description Part number Enhanced I/O (EIO) card HP Jetdirect 635n IPv6/IPsec Print Server J7961G USB cable 2-meter standard USB-compatible device connector C6518A Power cord PWR-CORD OPT-903 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0740 PWR-CORD OPT-934 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0964 PWR-CORD OPT-902 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0731 PWR-CORD OPT-922 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0943 Power cord PWR-CORD OPT-901 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0837 Power cord PWR-CORD OPT-918 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0736 PWR-CORD OPT-900 3-COND 1.9-MLG 5A ROHS 8121-0739 PWR-CORD OPT-912 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0733 PWR-CORD OPT-920 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0729 PWR-CORD OPT-923 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0564 PWR-CORD OPT-921 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0735 PWR-CORD OPT-917 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0737 PWR-CORD OPT-919 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-1004 PWR-CORD OPT-906 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0738 North America Power cord Taiwan Power cord Europe (generic) Power cord China Japan (7A) Power cord United Kingdom; Singapore; Hong Kong SAR; Malaysia Power cord Denmark Power cord Argentina Power cord India (<= 6 A) Power cord Chile Power cord South Africa Power cord Israel Power cord Switzerland 514 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-5 Cables and interfaces (continued) Item Description Part number Power cord PWR-CORD OPT-927 3-COND 1.9-MLG ROHS 8121-0734 PHN-CORD OPT-501 US 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8121-0811 PHN-CORD OPT-516 KR 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8120-8908 PHN-CORD OPT-507 TR 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8120-8920 PHN-CORD OPT-520 EE 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8120-8922 PHN-CORD OPT-519 AU 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8120-8907 PHN-CORD OPT-505 UK/HK/NZ 3.0-MLG ROHS 8120-8921 PHN-CORD OPT-506 DK 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8120-8911 PHN-CORD OPT-515 AT 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8120-8909 PHN-CORD OPT-514 IT 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8120-8914 PHN-CORD OPT-512 CH 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8121-0844 PHN-CORD OPT-510 NO/FI 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8120-8916 PHN-CORD OPT-511 SE 3.0-M-LG ROHS 8120-8918 Item Description Part number 500 sheet feeder replacement kit 500 sheet feeder assembly (CE222A) CC468-67905 Thailand; Philippine Islands Phone cord United States Phone cord Republic of Korea Phone cord Turkey Phone cord Estonia Phone cord Australia Phone cord United Kingdom; Hong Kong SAR; New Zealand Phone cord Denmark Phone cord Australia Phone cord Italy Phone cord Switzerland Phone cord Norwegian; Finnish Phone cord Sweden Service kits Table 8-6 Service kit contents 500 sheet feeder instructions 500 sheet feeder right door kit ENWW Door stopper CC468-67906 Part numbers 515 Table 8-6 Service kit contents (continued) Item Description Part number Right door link Right door assembly Right door installation instructions ADF kit ADF assembly CC483-67903 ADF installation instructions ADF roller kit ADF roller assembly CC519-67909 ADF separation pad ADF roller kit installation instructions 128MB memory kit 128MB DDR DIMM CC519-67910 Installation instructions 256MB memory kit 256MB DDR DIMM CC519-67911 Installation instructions 512MB memory kit 512MB DDRDIMM CC519-67912 Installation instructions Toner collection unit kit Waste toner box assembly ● Part number: CC468-67910 (Maintenance kit) Waste toner installation instructions ● Product number: TCU CE254A Toner cleaning cloth Hard drive kit Hard Drive, 80GB disc 2.5" SATA ROHS CC519-67904 Left rail, plastic Right rail, snap plastic Hard drive installation instructions Hard drive cable kit SATA hard drive power/data cable CC519-67905 Hard drive installation instructions Fax cable kit Fax cable CC519-67907 Fax cable installation instructions Control panel kit Control-panel assembly CC519-67908 Installation instructions Duplex reverse guide kit Duplexing reverse guide CC468-67913 Duplexing guide installation instructions Front door kit Front door CC519-67916 Nameplate CLJ CM3530 MFP Nameplate CLJ CM3530fs MFP HP logo 516 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-6 Service kit contents (continued) Item Description Part number Front door assembly installation instructions Fuser cleaning kit (letter) 50 sheets of HP Tough Paper CC468-67919 Cleaning instructions Fuser kit 110V service fuser kit ● Part number: CC519-67901 (Maintenance kit) ● Fuser assembly, 110V ● Product number: CE484A ● Fuser installation instructions ● Recycle flyer ● Return label 220V service fuser kit ● Part number: CC519-67902 ● Fuser assembly, 220V ● Product number: CE506A ● Fuser installation instructions ● Recycle flyer ● Return label ITB kit Intermediate transfer belt assembly CC468-67907 ITB installation instructions Secondary transfer roller assembly Secondary transfer roller installation instructions Main drive assembly kit Main drive assembly CC468-67918 Main drive assembly installation instructions Formatter kit Formatter assembly CC519-67903 Formatter sheet metal tray assembly Screw, M3 x 0.5 EIO card guide Disk drive cradle Fax cable Formatter installation instructions Pick/feed and separation pad kit 250-sheet tray paper pickup roller CC468-67911 Paper feed roller assembly (500 SF) Paper pickup roller (500 SF) Replacement and installation instructions Laser/scanner assembly kit ENWW Laser/scanner assembly CC468-67917 Part numbers 517 Table 8-6 Service kit contents (continued) Item Description Part number Scanner installation instructions Secondary transfer assembly kit Secondary transfer assembly CC468-67915 Secondary transfer assembly installation instructions Secondary transfer (T2) roller kit Secondary transfer roller assembly CC468-67914 Secondary transfer roller installation instructions Preventative maintenance kit 110 v CE484A 220 v CE506A Service manuals and user documentation Table 8-7 Service manuals and user documentation Item Part number Service manual—English (entire manual) CC519-91013 Service manual—French (troubleshooting and replacement only) CC519-91014 Service manual—Italian (troubleshooting and replacement only) CC519-91015 Service manual—German (troubleshooting and replacement only) CC519-91016 Service manual—Spanish (troubleshooting and replacement only) CC519-91017 Service manual—Korean (troubleshooting and replacement only) CC519-91018 Service manual—Chinese, simplified (troubleshooting and replacement only) CC519-91019 Administrator guide CC519-60105 User guide CC519-60106 518 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Screws NOTE: The screw illustrations in the following table are for reference only. Screws might vary in size and appearance from those shown in this table. Table 8-8 Common fasteners Example Description Size Part Number Screw, with washer M3x8 XA9-1420-000CN Screw, tapping, truss head M4x10 XB4-7401-005CN Screw, tap M3x6 XA9-1503-000CN Screw, D M3x8 XA9-1671-000CN Screw, tooth washer M4x6 XB2–7400-606CN 12 mm How to use the parts lists and diagrams The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the product and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit (FRU). CAUTION: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical components, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the description column. Doing so will ensure that the part number selected is for the correct all-in-one model. NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors. ENWW Screws 519 ADF and scanner assemblies Figure 8-1 ADF/scanner assembly 2 3 4 1 520 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-9 ADF/scanner assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Control panel assembly CC519-60115 1 Not shown Control-panel cable CC519-60107 1 2 ADF feed roller kit CC519-67909 1 3 ADF assembly CC483-60103 1 4 Scanner assembly (ADF assembly and SCB PCA are not included) CC519-67914 1 Not shown Scanner controller board (SCB) CC454-60002 1 Not shown PCI express RoHS cable 5851-3141 1 ADF and scanner assemblies 521 External covers, panels, and doors Figure 8-2 External covers, panels, and doors 522 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-10 External covers, panels, and doors; ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover, right front RC2-5056-000CN 1 2 Cover, rear RC2-5048-000CN 1 3 Cover, left RC2-5052-000CN 1 4 Cover, rear right RC2-5057-000CN 1 5 Cover, right lower RC2-5059-000CN 1 6 Plate, blanking RC2-5938-000CN 1 7 Tray, paper delivery RL1-1941-000CN 1 8 Rib, Control panel RC2-5179-000CN 1 9 Cover, control panel RC2-5180-000CN 1 10 Cover, control panel, rear RC2-5181-000CN 1 11 Cover, upper right RC2-5182-000CN 1 12 Cover, rear, upper RC2-5185-000CN 1 13 Cover, left rear RC2-5188-000CN 1 14 Cover, upper rear RL1-1953-000CN 1 15 Cover, right (without stapler) RC2-5189-000CN 1 16 Holder, AC RC2-5194-000CN 1 17 Cover, right (with stapler) RC2-5192-000CN 1 18 Stapler, right cover assembly RM1-5033-000CN 1 External covers, panels, and doors 523 Right door assembly Figure 8-3 Right door assembly 1 SEE DUPLEX FEED ASSEMBLY 2 1a 524 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-11 Right door assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Right door assembly RM1-4957-000CN 1 Not shown Tray 1 pickup roller RL1-1928-000CN 1 Right door assembly 525 Internal components Internal components (1 of 5) Figure 8-4 Internal components (1 of 5) A03 A13 A15 A14 A03 A03 A03 A12 526 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-12 Internal components (1 of 5) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Lifter cable assembly RM1-5742-000CN 1 3 Cover, front inner lower RL1-1914-000CN 1 5 Cover, front inner upper RC2-5006-000CN 1 6 Cover, front inner lower RL1-1915-000CN 1 8 Cover, left lower RC2-5069-000CN 1 12 Waste toner detect assembly RM1-5696-000CN 1 13 Waste toner duct assembly (motor) RM1-4977-000CN 1 17 Spring, tension RU6-2236-000CN 4 18 Spring, ground RU6-2237-000CN 4 19 Lever, cartridge pressure front RC2-3983-000CN 4 21 Seal, waste toner box RC2-4780-000CN 1 24 Lock, door RC2-5937-000CN 1 26 Lever, box presence detect RC2-5951-000CN 1 27 Spring, compression RU6-2568-000CN 1 Internal components 527 Internal components (2 of 5) Figure 8-5 Internal components (2 of 5) 528 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-13 Internal components (2 of 5) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Fan cable assembly RM1-5746-000CN 1 5 Spring, tension RU6-2436-000CN 4 8 Spring, leaf RC2-5970-000CN 4 10 Tab RC2-5909-000CN 2 11 Shutter RC2-5910-000CN 2 12 Cover RC2-5912-000CN 3 13 Spring, torsion RC2-5958-000CN 3 14 Holder, cartridge lock lever RC2-5955-000CN 3 15 Lever, cartridge lock RC2-5954-000CN 3 18 Cover RC2-5962-000CN 3 20 Spring, compression RU6-2318-000CN 8 21 Spring, compression RU6-2316-000CN 4 22 Tab RC2-4428-000CN 2 23 Lever, shutter RU6-4415-000CN 4 24 Shutter RC2-4413-000CN 2 25 Shutter rear arm RC2-4407-000CN 4 26 Shutter front arm RC2-4406-000CN 4 27 Sensor unit, Tmp/Hum sensor RK2-2229-000CN 1 28 Base RL1-2144-000CN 2 29 Toner sensor holder assembly RM1-5700-000CN 4 30 Base RL1-1923-000CN 2 31 Base assembly RM1-4979-000CN 4 32 Lower cartridge guide assembly RM1-4984-000CN 4 33 Connecting cable assembly RM1-5749-000CN 1 34 Sensor cable assembly RM1-5740-000CN 1 35 Sensor cable assembly RM1-5741-000CN 1 36 Motor/sensor cable assembly RM1-5752-000CN 1 38 Fan RK2-2418-000CN 2 Internal components 529 Internal components (3 of 5) Figure 8-6 Internal components (3 of 5) SEE FUSER SEE REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY SEE CASSETTE PAPER PICKUP ASSEMBLY SEE SECONDARY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 530 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-14 Internal components (3 of 5) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 6 Link, door stopper right RC2-4916-000CN 1 9 Cover, right lower inner RC2-5019-000CN 1 10 Interlock link RC2-5120-000CN 1 11 Interlock switch mount RC2-5123-000CN 1 12 Interlock link switch arm RC2-5121-000CN 1 14 Interlock link RC2-5119-000CN 1 15 Interlock link RC2-5118-000CN 1 17 Switch lever RC2-5124-000CN 1 18 Shaft RC2-5913-000CN 1 19 Spring, torsion RC2-5934-000CN 1 20 Cartridge lock lever RC2-5954-000CN 1 22 Spring, torsion RC2-5958-000CN 1 28 Interlock link RC2-5122-000CN 1 31 Power supply button RL1-1947-000CN 1 32 Photo interrupter, TLP1243 WG8-5696-000CN 1 34 Front cable assembly RM1-6998-000CN 1 36 Density detect sensor assembly RM1-4953-000CN 1 37 Lower pick up guide assembly RM1-4980-000CN 1 38 ITB assembly service kit CC468-67907 1 40 Switch cable assembly RM1-5718-000CN 1 42 Front lock arm assembly RM1-5532-000CN 1 43 Power supply switch assembly RM1-5697-000CN 1 44 Door switch assembly RM1-5732-000CN 1 45 Switch WC4-5171-000CN 1 46 Transfer roller assembly service kit CC468-67914 47 Rear lock arm assembly RM1-5533-000CN 1 Internal components 531 Internal components (4 of 5) Figure 8-7 Internal components (4 of 5) SEE PCAs SEE PCAs SEE PCAs SEE PCAs 532 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams SEE PCAs ENWW Table 8-15 Internal components (4 of 5) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Fusing connecting cable assembly RM1-5714-000CN 1 2 Door stopper right link RC2-4916-000CN 2 6 Fan RK2-2416-000CN 1 11 Switch arm RC2-5943-000CN 1 16 Scanner flat cable (FFC) RK2-2506-000CN 1 17 Rear cable assembly RM1-5721-000CN 1 19 Scanner flat cable (FFC) RK2-2508-000CN 1 24 Right door rear hinge RC2-4895-000CN 1 27 Multipurpose tray sensor cable assembly RM1-5737-000CN 1 28 Cable, AC (stapler power) RK2-2501-000CN 1 Not shown Stapler mechanism CC483-60107 1 Not shown Stapler power supply Q7429-60501 1 Internal components 533 Internal components (5 of 5) Figure 8-8 Internal components (5 of 5) 534 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-16 Internal components (5 of 5) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Duplexing unit cable assembly RM1-5730-000CN 1 5 Pickup motor cable assembly RM1-5731-000CN 1 7 Lifter drive assembly RM1-4976-000CN 1 8 Drum motor assembly RM1-4988-000CN 3 13 Photo interrupter, TLP1243 WG8-5696-000CN 1 14 Cassette paper pick up drive assembly with motor RM1-4975-000CN 1 19 Rear pre-exposure PCA RM1-5705-000CN 1 22 Fusing drive assembly with motor RM1-4974-000CN 1 24 Duplexing drive assembly RM1-4973-000CN 1 27 Stepping motor, DC (developing disengagement) RK2-2415-000CN 1 Internal components 535 Fuser Figure 8-9 Fuser 1 536 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-17 Fuser ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Fuser/Fixing service kit110 v CC519-67901 1 1 Fuser/Fixing service kit 220 v CC519-67902 1 Internal components 537 250-sheet cassette Figure 8-10 250-sheet cassette 1 2 538 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-18 250-sheet cassette ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 250-sheet cassette RM1-4962-000CN 1 2 Separation roller assy RM1-4966-000CN 1 Internal components 539 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly Figure 8-11 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly 1 A01 A09 A04 A02 A10 A06 A08 A07 2 A03 A05 540 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-19 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly RM1-4967-000CN 1 2 250-sheet cassette paper pickup roller RM1-4968-000CN Internal components 541 Registration assembly Figure 8-12 Registration assembly 542 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-20 Registration assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Registration assembly RM1-4969-000CN 1 Internal components 543 Paper-delivery assembly Figure 8-13 Paper-delivery assembly 544 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-21 Paper-delivery assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper-delivery assembly RM1-4970-000CN 1 Internal components 545 PCAs Figure 8-14 PCAs 7 1 2 3 6 5 4 546 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-22 PCAs ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 High-voltage power supply lower PCA (HVPS-D) RM1-5680-000CN 1 2 High-voltage power supply upper PCA (HVPS-T) RM1-5681-000CN 1 3 DC controller PCA RM1-5678-000CN 1 4 Low-voltage power supply PCA(110 v) RM1-5689-000CN 1 4 Low-voltage power supply PCA(220 v) RM1-5690-000CN 1 5 Interconnect board (ICB) CC453-60001 1 6 Formatter PCA CC452-60001 1 7 Scanner controller board (SCB) CC454-60002 1 Internal components 547 Formatter components Figure 8-15 Formatter components 2 1 3 4 548 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-23 Formatter components ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Hard drive, 80GB 2.5-inch SATA ROHS CC519-67904 1 2 SATA hard drive cable power/data CC519-67905 1 3 Fax controller PCA CC456-60001 1 4 Fax cable CC519-67907 1 Internal components 549 Accessories 500-sheet paper feeder Figure 8-16 500-sheet paper feeder 550 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-24 500-sheet paper feeder ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 500-sheet feeder replacement CE222-67901 1 Not shown 500-sheet paper feeder right door kit CC468-67906 1 Not shown 500-sheet cassette RM1-6198-000CN 1 Accessories 551 Paper feeder main body Figure 8-17 Paper feeder main body 552 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-25 Paper feeder main body ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 13 Drawer connector (Tray 3) VS1-7257-007CN 1 14 Drawer connector holder (Tray 3) RC2-5416-000CN 1 Accessories 553 Alphabetical parts list Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list Description Part number Table and page 250-sheet cassette RM1-4962-000CN 250-sheet cassette on page 539 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly RM1-4967-000CN 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly on page 541 250-sheet cassette paper pickup roller RM1-4968-000CN 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly on page 541 500-sheet cassette RM1-6198-000CN 500-sheet paper feeder on page 551 500-sheet feeder replacement CE222-67901 500-sheet paper feeder on page 551 500-sheet paper feeder right door kit CC468-67906 500-sheet paper feeder on page 551 ADF assembly CC483-60103 ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 ADF feed roller kit CC519-67909 ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 Base RL1-2144-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Base RL1-1923-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Base assembly RM1-4979-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Cable, AC (stapler power) RK2-2501-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Cartridge lock lever RC2-5954-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Cassette paper pick up drive assembly with motor RM1-4975-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Connecting cable assembly RM1-5749-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Control panel assembly CC519-60115 ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 Control-panel cable CC519-60107 ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 Cover RC2-5912-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Cover RC2-5962-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Cover, control panel RC2-5180-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, control panel, rear RC2-5181-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 554 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Cover, front inner lower RL1-1914-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Cover, front inner lower RL1-1915-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Cover, front inner upper RC2-5006-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Cover, left RC2-5052-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, left lower RC2-5069-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Cover, left rear RC2-5188-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, rear RC2-5048-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, rear right RC2-5057-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, rear, upper RC2-5185-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, right (with stapler) RC2-5192-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, right (without stapler) RC2-5189-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, right front RC2-5056-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, right lower RC2-5059-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, right lower inner RC2-5019-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Cover, upper rear RL1-1953-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Cover, upper right RC2-5182-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 DC controller PCA RM1-5678-000CN PCAs on page 547 Density detect sensor assembly RM1-4953-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Door stopper right link RC2-4916-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Door switch assembly RM1-5732-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Drawer connector (Tray 3) VS1-7257-007CN Paper feeder main body on page 553 Drawer connector holder (Tray 3) RC2-5416-000CN Paper feeder main body on page 553 Alphabetical parts list 555 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Drum motor assembly RM1-4988-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Duplexing drive assembly RM1-4973-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Duplexing unit cable assembly RM1-5730-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Fan RK2-2418-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Fan RK2-2416-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Fan cable assembly RM1-5746-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Fax cable CC519-67907 Formatter components on page 549 Fax controller PCA CC456-60001 Formatter components on page 549 Formatter PCA CC452-60001 PCAs on page 547 Front cable assembly RM1-6998-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Front lock arm assembly RM1-5532-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Fuser/Fixing service kit 220 v CC519-67902 Fuser on page 537 Fuser/Fixing service kit110 v CC519-67901 Fuser on page 537 Fusing connecting cable assembly RM1-5714-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Fusing drive assembly with motor RM1-4974-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Hard drive, 80GB 2.5-inch SATA ROHS CC519-67904 Formatter components on page 549 High-voltage power supply lower PCA (HVPS-D) RM1-5680-000CN PCAs on page 547 High-voltage power supply upper PCA (HVPS-T) RM1-5681-000CN PCAs on page 547 Holder, AC RC2-5194-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Holder, cartridge lock lever RC2-5955-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Interconnect board (ICB) CC453-60001 PCAs on page 547 Interlock link RC2-5120-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Interlock link RC2-5119-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Interlock link RC2-5118-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 556 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Interlock link RC2-5122-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Interlock link switch arm RC2-5121-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Interlock switch mount RC2-5123-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 ITB assembly service kit CC468-67907 Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Lever, box presence detect RC2-5951-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Lever, cartridge lock RC2-5954-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Lever, cartridge pressure front RC2-3983-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Lever, shutter RU6-4415-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Lifter cable assembly RM1-5742-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Lifter drive assembly RM1-4976-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Link, door stopper right RC2-4916-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Lock, door RC2-5937-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Low-voltage power supply PCA(110 v) RM1-5689-000CN PCAs on page 547 Low-voltage power supply PCA(220 v) RM1-5690-000CN PCAs on page 547 Lower cartridge guide assembly RM1-4984-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Lower pick up guide assembly RM1-4980-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Motor/sensor cable assembly RM1-5752-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Multipurpose tray sensor cable assembly RM1-5737-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Paper-delivery assembly RM1-4970-000CN Paper-delivery assembly on page 545 PCI express RoHS cable 5851-3141 ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 Photo interrupter, TLP1243 WG8-5696-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Photo interrupter, TLP1243 WG8-5696-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Pickup motor cable assembly RM1-5731-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Alphabetical parts list 557 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Plate, blanking RC2-5938-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Power supply button RL1-1947-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Power supply switch assembly RM1-5697-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Rear cable assembly RM1-5721-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Rear lock arm assembly RM1-5533-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Rear pre-exposure PCA RM1-5705-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Registration assembly RM1-4969-000CN Registration assembly on page 543 Rib, Control panel RC2-5179-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Right door assembly RM1-4957-000CN Right door assembly on page 525 Right door rear hinge RC2-4895-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 SATA hard drive cable power/data CC519-67905 Formatter components on page 549 Scanner assembly (ADF assembly and SCB PCA are not included) CC519-67914 ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 Scanner controller board (SCB) CC454-60002 ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 Scanner controller board (SCB) CC454-60002 PCAs on page 547 Scanner flat cable (FFC) RK2-2506-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Scanner flat cable (FFC) RK2-2508-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Seal, waste toner box RC2-4780-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Sensor cable assembly RM1-5740-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Sensor cable assembly RM1-5741-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Sensor unit, Tmp/Hum sensor RK2-2229-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Separation roller assy RM1-4966-000CN 250-sheet cassette on page 539 Shaft RC2-5913-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 558 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Shutter RC2-5910-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Shutter RC2-4413-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Shutter front arm RC2-4406-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Shutter rear arm RC2-4407-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Spring, compression RU6-2568-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Spring, compression RU6-2318-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Spring, compression RU6-2316-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Spring, ground RU6-2237-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Spring, leaf RC2-5970-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Spring, tension RU6-2236-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Spring, tension RU6-2436-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Spring, torsion RC2-5958-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Spring, torsion RC2-5934-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Spring, torsion RC2-5958-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Stapler mechanism CC483-60107 Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Stapler power supply Q7429-60501 Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Stapler, right cover assembly RM1-5033-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Stepping motor, DC (developing disengagement) RK2-2415-000CN Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Switch WC4-5171-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Switch arm RC2-5943-000CN Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Switch cable assembly RM1-5718-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Switch lever RC2-5124-000CN Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Alphabetical parts list 559 Table 8-26 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Tab RC2-5909-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Tab RC2-4428-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Toner sensor holder assembly RM1-5700-000CN Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Transfer roller assembly service kit CC468-67914 Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 Tray, paper delivery RL1-1941-000CN External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 Tray 1 pickup roller RL1-1928-000CN Right door assembly on page 525 Waste toner detect assembly RM1-5696-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 Waste toner duct assembly (motor) RM1-4977-000CN Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 560 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Numerical parts list Table 8-27 Numerical parts list ENWW Part number Description Table and page 5851-3141 PCI express RoHS cable ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 CC452-60001 Formatter PCA PCAs on page 547 CC453-60001 Interconnect board (ICB) PCAs on page 547 CC454-60002 Scanner controller board (SCB) ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 CC454-60002 Scanner controller board (SCB) PCAs on page 547 CC456-60001 Fax controller PCA Formatter components on page 549 CC468-67906 500-sheet paper feeder right door kit 500-sheet paper feeder on page 551 CC468-67907 ITB assembly service kit Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 CC468-67914 Transfer roller assembly service kit Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 CC483-60103 ADF assembly ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 CC483-60107 Stapler mechanism Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 CC519-60107 Control-panel cable ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 CC519-60115 Control panel assembly ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 CC519-67901 Fuser/Fixing service kit110 v Fuser on page 537 CC519-67902 Fuser/Fixing service kit 220 v Fuser on page 537 CC519-67904 Hard drive, 80GB 2.5-inch SATA ROHS Formatter components on page 549 CC519-67905 SATA hard drive cable power/data Formatter components on page 549 CC519-67907 Fax cable Formatter components on page 549 CC519-67909 ADF feed roller kit ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 CC519-67914 Scanner assembly (ADF assembly and SCB PCA are not included) ADF/scanner assembly on page 521 CE222-67901 500-sheet feeder replacement 500-sheet paper feeder on page 551 Q7429-60501 Stapler power supply Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 Numerical parts list 561 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RC2-3983-000CN Lever, cartridge pressure front Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RC2-4406-000CN Shutter front arm Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-4407-000CN Shutter rear arm Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-4413-000CN Shutter Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-4428-000CN Tab Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-4780-000CN Seal, waste toner box Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RC2-4895-000CN Right door rear hinge Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RC2-4916-000CN Link, door stopper right Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-4916-000CN Door stopper right link Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RC2-5006-000CN Cover, front inner upper Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RC2-5019-000CN Cover, right lower inner Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5048-000CN Cover, rear External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5052-000CN Cover, left External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5056-000CN Cover, right front External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5057-000CN Cover, rear right External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5059-000CN Cover, right lower External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5069-000CN Cover, left lower Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RC2-5118-000CN Interlock link Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5119-000CN Interlock link Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5120-000CN Interlock link Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5121-000CN Interlock link switch arm Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5122-000CN Interlock link Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 562 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RC2-5123-000CN Interlock switch mount Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5124-000CN Switch lever Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5179-000CN Rib, Control panel External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5180-000CN Cover, control panel External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5181-000CN Cover, control panel, rear External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5182-000CN Cover, upper right External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5185-000CN Cover, rear, upper External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5188-000CN Cover, left rear External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5189-000CN Cover, right (without stapler) External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5192-000CN Cover, right (with stapler) External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5194-000CN Holder, AC External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5416-000CN Drawer connector holder (Tray 3) Paper feeder main body on page 553 RC2-5909-000CN Tab Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-5910-000CN Shutter Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-5912-000CN Cover Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-5913-000CN Shaft Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5934-000CN Spring, torsion Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5937-000CN Lock, door Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RC2-5938-000CN Plate, blanking External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RC2-5943-000CN Switch arm Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RC2-5951-000CN Lever, box presence detect Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RC2-5954-000CN Lever, cartridge lock Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 Numerical parts list 563 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RC2-5954-000CN Cartridge lock lever Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5955-000CN Holder, cartridge lock lever Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-5958-000CN Spring, torsion Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-5958-000CN Spring, torsion Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RC2-5962-000CN Cover Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RC2-5970-000CN Spring, leaf Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RK2-2229-000CN Sensor unit, Tmp/Hum sensor Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RK2-2415-000CN Stepping motor, DC (developing disengagement) Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 RK2-2416-000CN Fan Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RK2-2418-000CN Fan Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RK2-2501-000CN Cable, AC (stapler power) Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RK2-2506-000CN Scanner flat cable (FFC) Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RK2-2508-000CN Scanner flat cable (FFC) Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RL1-1914-000CN Cover, front inner lower Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RL1-1915-000CN Cover, front inner lower Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RL1-1923-000CN Base Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RL1-1928-000CN Tray 1 pickup roller Right door assembly on page 525 RL1-1941-000CN Tray, paper delivery External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RL1-1947-000CN Power supply button Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RL1-1953-000CN Cover, upper rear External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RL1-2144-000CN Base Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RM1-4953-000CN Density detect sensor assembly Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 564 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RM1-4957-000CN Right door assembly Right door assembly on page 525 RM1-4962-000CN 250-sheet cassette 250-sheet cassette on page 539 RM1-4966-000CN Separation roller assy 250-sheet cassette on page 539 RM1-4967-000CN 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly on page 541 RM1-4968-000CN 250-sheet cassette paper pickup roller 250-sheet cassette paper pickup assembly on page 541 RM1-4969-000CN Registration assembly Registration assembly on page 543 RM1-4970-000CN Paper-delivery assembly Paper-delivery assembly on page 545 RM1-4973-000CN Duplexing drive assembly Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 RM1-4974-000CN Fusing drive assembly with motor Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 RM1-4975-000CN Cassette paper pick up drive assembly with motor Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 RM1-4976-000CN Lifter drive assembly Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 RM1-4977-000CN Waste toner duct assembly (motor) Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RM1-4979-000CN Base assembly Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RM1-4980-000CN Lower pick up guide assembly Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RM1-4984-000CN Lower cartridge guide assembly Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RM1-4988-000CN Drum motor assembly Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 RM1-5033-000CN Stapler, right cover assembly External covers, panels, and doors; on page 523 RM1-5532-000CN Front lock arm assembly Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RM1-5533-000CN Rear lock arm assembly Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RM1-5678-000CN DC controller PCA PCAs on page 547 RM1-5680-000CN High-voltage power supply lower PCA (HVPS-D) PCAs on page 547 RM1-5681-000CN High-voltage power supply upper PCA (HVPS-T) PCAs on page 547 RM1-5689-000CN Low-voltage power supply PCA(110 v) PCAs on page 547 RM1-5690-000CN Low-voltage power supply PCA(220 v) PCAs on page 547 Numerical parts list 565 Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RM1-5696-000CN Waste toner detect assembly Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RM1-5697-000CN Power supply switch assembly Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RM1-5700-000CN Toner sensor holder assembly Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RM1-5705-000CN Rear pre-exposure PCA Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 RM1-5714-000CN Fusing connecting cable assembly Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RM1-5718-000CN Switch cable assembly Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RM1-5721-000CN Rear cable assembly Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RM1-5730-000CN Duplexing unit cable assembly Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 RM1-5731-000CN Pickup motor cable assembly Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 RM1-5732-000CN Door switch assembly Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RM1-5737-000CN Multipurpose tray sensor cable assembly Internal components (4 of 5) on page 533 RM1-5740-000CN Sensor cable assembly Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RM1-5741-000CN Sensor cable assembly Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RM1-5742-000CN Lifter cable assembly Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RM1-5746-000CN Fan cable assembly Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RM1-5749-000CN Connecting cable assembly Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RM1-5752-000CN Motor/sensor cable assembly Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RM1-6198-000CN 500-sheet cassette 500-sheet paper feeder on page 551 RM1-6998-000CN Front cable assembly Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 RU6-2236-000CN Spring, tension Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RU6-2237-000CN Spring, ground Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RU6-2316-000CN Spring, compression Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 566 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-27 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RU6-2318-000CN Spring, compression Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RU6-2436-000CN Spring, tension Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 RU6-2568-000CN Spring, compression Internal components (1 of 5) on page 527 RU6-4415-000CN Lever, shutter Internal components (2 of 5) on page 529 VS1-7257-007CN Drawer connector (Tray 3) Paper feeder main body on page 553 WC4-5171-000CN Switch Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 WG8-5696-000CN Photo interrupter, TLP1243 Internal components (3 of 5) on page 531 WG8-5696-000CN Photo interrupter, TLP1243 Internal components (5 of 5) on page 535 Numerical parts list 567 568 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW A ENWW Service and support ● Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ● Print cartridge limited warranty statement ● HP Color LaserJet Fuser Kit Limited Warranty Statement ● End User License Agreement ● Customer self-repair warranty service ● Customer support 569 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP Color LaserJet CM3530 Series MFP One-year limited warranty HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new. HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 570 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Print cartridge limited warranty statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use. To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. ENWW Print cartridge limited warranty statement 571 HP Color LaserJet Fuser Kit Limited Warranty Statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer provides a low-life indicator on the control panel. This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use. To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 572 Appendix A Service and support ENWW End User License Agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you represent) and (b) Hewlett-Packard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include (i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online” or electronic documentation (collectively “User Documentation”). RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE. IF YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, PLEASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT. 1. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software (“HP Software”), software under licenses from third parties (“Third Party Software” and “Third Party License”). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is located in a file such as license.txt; you should contact HP support if you cannot find any Third Party License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code (such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP’s website (hp.com) to learn how to obtain such source code. 2. LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA: a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. “Use” means installing, copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product (for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may only be used with such product (“HP Product”). Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use. You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software. b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Software’s proprietary notices and is used only for backup purposes. 3. UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement (collectively “Upgrade”), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the other terms will prevail. 4. TRANSFER. a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts, media, User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred ENWW End User License Agreement 573 Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated. b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA. 5. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software. 6. LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law. 7. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services. 8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. Some states or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. 9. U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. If you are a U.S. Government entity, then consistent with FAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212, Commercial Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed under the applicable HP commercial license agreement. 10. COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i) applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software, including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation. 11. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. (c) 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Rev. 11/06 574 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product. Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used. ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service 575 Customer support Get telephone support, free during your warranty period, for your country/region Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/. Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready. Get 24-hour Internet support www.hp.com/support/cljcm3530mfp Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer www.hp.com/go/macosx Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information www.hp.com/go/cljcm3530mfp_software Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www.hp.com/go/carepack 576 Appendix A Service and support ENWW B ENWW Product specifications ● Physical specifications ● Electrical specifications ● Acoustic specifications ● Environmental specifications 577 Physical specifications Table B-1 Product dimensions Product Height Depth Width Weight HP Color LaserJet CM3530n 358 mm (14.1 in) 491 mm (19.3 in) 514 mm (20.2 in) 47.6 kg (105.0 lb) HP Color LaserJet CM3530dn 358 mm (14.1 in) 491 mm (19.3 in) 514 mm (20.2 in) 47.6 kg (105.0 lb) HP Color LaserJet CM3530x 520 mm (20.5 in) 491 mm (19.3 in) 514 mm (20.2 in) 48.4 kg (106.6 lb) Table B-2 Product dimensions, with all doors and trays fully opened Product Height Depth Width HP Color LaserJet CM3530n 358 mm (14.1 in) 739 mm (29.1 in) 822 mm (32.4 in) HP Color LaserJet CM3530dn 358 mm (14.1 in) 739 mm (29.1 in) 822 mm (32.4 in) HP Color LaserJet CM3530x 520 mm (20.5 in) 739 mm (29.1 in) 822 mm (32.4 in) Electrical specifications WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This can damage the product and void the product warranty. Table B-3 Power requirements Specification 110-volt models 220-volt models Power requirements 115 to 127 volts (± 10%) 220 to 240 volts (± 10%) 50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz) 50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz) 8.5 Amps 4.5 Amps Rated current Table B-4 Power consumption (average, in watts)1246 Product model Copy/scan Printing Ready Sleep 1 Sleep 2 Off HP Color LaserJet CM3530 models 666 W 652 W 87.4 W 72.2 W 18.1 W 0.84 W 1 Values subject to change. See www.hp.com/support/cljcm3530mfp for current information. 2 Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages. 3 Default time from Ready mode to Sleep 2 = 30 minutes. 4 Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 298.3 BTU/hour. 6 HP Color LaserJet CM3530 speed is 31 ppm Letter size. Acoustic specifications Table B-5 HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series13 Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296 Printing LWAd= 6.8 Bels (A) [68 dB(A)] 578 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW Table B-5 HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series (continued) Sound power level Declared per ISO 9296 ADF copying LWAd= 7.0 Bels (A) [70 dB(A)] Ready LWAd= 4.8 Bels (A) [48 dB(A)] Sound pressure level - bystander position Declared per ISO 9296 Printing LpAm=53 dB (A) ADF copying LpAm=55 dB (A) Ready LpAm=34 dB (A) 1 Values are based on preliminary data. See www.hp.com/support/cljcm3530mfp for current information. 3 Configuration tested: HP Color LaserJet CM3530 printer printing on A4-size paper in simplex mode Environmental specifications ENWW Environmental condition Recommended Storage Temperature (product and print cartridge) 15° to 27°C (59° to 80.6°F) 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F) Relative humidity 20% to 60% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 90% RH Altitude N/A 0 meters (0 feet) to 2500 meters (8000 feet) Environmental specifications 579 580 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW C ENWW Regulatory information ● FCC regulations ● Declaration of Conformity ● Safety statements 581 FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase separation between equipment and receiver. ● Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located. ● Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician. NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules. 582 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC 17050–1 and EN 17050–1, DoC#: BOISB-0802-00-rel.1.0 Manufacturer's Name: Manufacturer's Address: Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard, Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares that the product Product Name: HP Color LaserJet CM3530 series Regulatory Model Number:2) BOISB-0802-00 Product Options: Including: CE522A — Optional 500-Sheet Paper and Heavy Media Tray ALL Print Cartridges: CE250X, CE250A, CE251A, CE252A, CE253A conforms to the following Product Specifications: Safety: IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 + A11 IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) GB4943-2001 EMC: CISPR 22:2005 / EN 55022:2006 – Class B1) EN 61000-3-2:2000 +A2 EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1 EN 55024:1998 +A1 + A2 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B/ ICES-003, Issue 4 GB9254-1998, GB17625.1–2003 Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly. This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s). Boise, Idaho , USA December 19, 2007 For regulatory topics only: European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143), http://www.hp.com/go/ certificates USA Contact: ENWW Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015, USA, (Phone: 208-396-6000) Declaration of Conformity 583 Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation. Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements. « Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». » VCCI statement (Japan) Power cord statement (Japan) EMC statement (Korea) Laser statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP Color LaserJet CM3530, CM3530fs, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti. VAROITUS ! 584 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING ! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. HUOLTO HP Color LaserJet CM3530, CM3530fs - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser. Substances Table (China) ENWW Safety statements 585 586 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Index Symbols/Numerics 500-sheet paper and heavy media tray models including 3 A AC to DC conversion 125 accessories ordering 510 part numbers 511 screws 519 accessories installed, information 440 acoustic specifications 578 activity log, fax 81 address books, e-mail clearing 53 importing 87 ADF capacity 4 clean delivery system 108 operations 174 part numbers 520 sensors 174 ADF output bin selecting 77 ADF roller assembly, removing 215 ADF separation pad, removing 215 ADF, removing 212 Administration menu, control panel 16 after service checklist 181 anticounterfeit supplies 93 AppleTalk information 439 AppleTalk settings 34 Attention light locating 12 ENWW automatic overhead transparency sensing 75 B bands, troubleshooting 496 beam-detect (BD) failure 132 bias generation high-voltage power supply 124 billing codes report, fax 81 bins locating 7 selecting 77 bins, output capacity 60 black-only printing mode developing roller state 141 primary transfer roller state 143 blank pages troubleshooting 500 blank pages, troubleshooting 495 blocked fax list, printing 81 browser requirements embedded Web server 85 buffer overflow errors 442 buttons, control panel locating 12 touchscreen 15 C cable, USB part number 514 cables USB, troubleshooting calibrate scanner 430 calibrating scanner 50 500 calibration information, printed 434 reset by NVRAM initialization 506 call report, fax 81 Canadian DOC regulations 584 capacity ADF 4 cartridges management menu 29 non-HP 93 ordering through embedded Web server 88 removing 186 replace 93 replacement intervals 93 storage 93 warranty 571 cartridges, print part numbers 513 cassette lift operation 153, 170 paper-level detection 155 paper-presence detection 155, 171 pickup assembly, removing 323 pickup drive assembly, removing 316 pickup operations 152 presence detection 153, 169 tray 2, removing 199 tray 3, removing 199 See also trays cautions 2 characters, troubleshooting 498 checklists after service 181 preservice 180 Index 587 circuit diagrams fuser temperature-control 128 general 424 high-voltage power supply 123 low-voltage power supply 125 clean about 108, 110 ADF delivery system 108 document-feeder rollers 110 fuser 111 glass 108 outside of product 108 touchscreen 108 clean page, printing 111 clock error message 441 clutches DC controller 120 cold reset 504 color calibration 145 diagnostic test 440 disengagement for black-only printing 141 misregistration control 146 page count, reset 503 primary transfer roller state 143 troubleshooting 434, 497 color usage job log, printing 81 components DC controller 119 diagnostic tests 409 diagrams of 411 duplexing unit 162 engine-control system 118 fuser 127 image formation, use during 133 intermediate transfer belt (ITB) 142 paper feeder 167 pickup, feed, and delivery 148 print cartridge 139 protection for 126, 128 Registration density (RD) sensor assembly, removing 297 588 Index residual-toner-feed motor, removing 292 toner-collection sensor, removing 290 configuration page Information menu 17 printing 80 configuration pages information 440 printing 436 configurations, models 3 configure trays 75 connectivity features 5 connectors DC controller PCA 412 product base 414 control panel Administration menu 16 buttons 12 clean touchscreen 108 E-mail Setup menu 41 Fax Setup menu 38 help 15 Home screen 14 Information menu 17 Initial Setup menu 31 layout 12 lights 12 locating 7 locking menus 91 Management menu 28 messages, listed alphabetically 441 messages, listed numerically 441 Resets menu 53 Send Setup menu 41 Service menu 54 Time/Scheduling menu 26 touchscreen buttons 15 control-panel assembly, removing 219 control-panel overlay, removing 218 controlling print jobs 76 conventions, document 2 cooling areas and fans 123 copying features 6 quality, troubleshooting 494 speed specifications 4 counterfeit supplies 93 counts ADF 503 ADF duplex 503 ADF simplex 503 color cycle 503 copy pages 503 copy scan 503 flatbed cycle 503 mono cycle 503 page, reset 503 print engine maintenance 440 refurbish cycle 503 reset after replacing formatter 503 reset by NVRAM initialization 506 send scan 503 See also pages counts covers delivery cover, removing 245 front stapler and right-side stapler covers, removing 249 front-door assembly, removing 211 front-top, removing 261 front-upper cover, removing 225 left, removing 233 left-upper cover, removing 247 rear cover, removing 238 rear-toptop, removing 262 rear-upper cover, removing 236 right-door assembly, removing 227 right-front, removing 239 right-rear, removing 231 right-top cover, removing 258 covers, locating 7 creases, troubleshooting 499 crooked pages troubleshooting 498 ENWW current-detection protection circuit 129 custom paper sizes 61 customer support embedded Web server links 88 online 576 D dark image, troubleshooting 494 Data light locating 12 date codes for firmware 440 manufacture 438 product first used 504 date, setting 26 DC controller clutches 120 components 119 fans 122 motors 122 PCA, connectors 412 sensors 121 solenoids 119 switches 120 temperature controls 129 voltage detection 126 DC controller PCA and tray, removing 270 DC motors 122 DC voltages converted from AC 125 Declaration of Conformity 583 default job options menu 19 default settings Resets menu 53 defects, repeating 428 delivery assembly removing 361 delivery cover, removing 245 demo page 378 density control 147 development process 136 Device Behavior menu 42 diagnostics component 409 engine 381 LED 378 ENWW networks 34 page, printing 434 See also tests; troubleshooting diagrams 509 digital sending embedded Web server settings 87 Setup menu 41 validating gateway addresses 507 Digital Sending tab, embedded Web server 87 DIMM memory, removing 193 DIMMs (dual inline memory modules) installing 100 part numbers 513 Disk Erase feature 90 disk initialization 505 DLC/LLC information 439 DLC/LLC settings 34 document conventions 2 document feeder jams 485 document feeder count ADF pages 503 document feeder interval 503 double-sided printing paper loading orientation 62 drawer connector drawer connector, removing 368 drive circuit power-supply frequency range 130 drivers paper types 58 duplex printing paper loading orientation 62 duplexing unit components 162 duplex-drive assembly, removing 366 motors 122 pickup operation 163 See also pickup, feed, and delivery duty cycle 4 E EIO accessory settings 31 EIO cards buffer overflow 442 errors 455 installing 105 part number 514 reset by NVRAM initialization 506 electrical specifications 578 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 178 embedded protocol page 439 embedded Web server assigning a password 90 Digital Sending tab 87 features 85 energy specifications 578 engine diagnostics 381 test page 386 engine-control system components 118 Enhanced I/O card part number 514 envelopes jams 489 loading in Tray 1 66 loading orientation 62 environment change control 147 environment, specifications 579 erasing hard disk 90 Error button, control panel touchscreen 15 error messages control panel, listed alphabetically 441 control panel, listed numerically 441 event log, listed numerically 468 See also troubleshooting ESD (electrostatic discharge) 178 Ethernet cards 5 event log clear 468, 503 information 440 Index 589 messages, listed numerically 468 reset by NVRAM initialization 506 view or print 468 EWS features 85 exhaust fans 123 Explorer, versions supported embedded Web server 85 e-mail embedded Web server settings 87 problem solving 507 validating gateway addresses 507 E-mail Setup menu 41 F faded print 494 failure detection drive circuit 130 fuser 129 lasers and scanners 132 low-voltage power supply 126 motors 122 See also jams fans cartridge, removing 285 DC controller 122 delivery, removing 285 exhaust 123 intake 123 power-supply fan and fan duct, removing 300 fax accessory printing schedule 27 solve problems 507 Fax Activity Log clearing 53 fax PCA, removing 197 fax reports, printing 17, 81 Fax Setup menu 38 features 3, 4 feed, paper. See pickup, feed, and delivery file directory, printing 81 Finnish laser safety statement 584 590 Index firmware date codes 440 version information 438 firmware, upgrading 112 fixing definition 116 flowcharts troubleshooting 375 fonts included 4 list, printing 18, 81 Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) 9 formatter operations 116 PCA, removing 192 resets after replacing 503 security 92 formatter lights 378 fraud hotline 93 front-door assembly, removing 211 front-top cover, removing 261 front-upper cover, removing 225 fuser clean 111 components 127 control-circuit function 127 discrepancy detection 130 drive assembly, removing 356 failure detection 129 jams 475 motor, removing 345 temperature control 128 See also fusing and delivery unit fusing definition 116 fusing and delivery unit operations 159 See also fuser; pickup, feed, and delivery G gateways validating addresses 507 glass clean 108 graphical display, control panel 12 H halftone control 147 hard disk erasing 90 initialization 505 part numbers 513 hard disk EIO part numbers 513 hard disks encrypted 90 hard drive, removing 195 heartbeat LED 380 heat control for fuser 128 heaters, fuser 127 Help button, control panel touchscreen 15 help, control panel 15 high-voltage power supply bias generation 124 circuits 124 operations 123 removing, lower 308 removing, upper 339 See also power supply Home button, control panel touchscreen 15 Home screen, control panel 14 HP Customer Care 576 HP Easy Printer Care opening 82 options 82 using 82 HP fraud hotline 93 HP Jetdirect print server configuration page 438 installing 105 lights 378 models including 3 settings 31 HP Jetdirect print servers installing 105 HP Web Jetadmin firmware updates 114 humidity requirements 579 I I/O configuration settings 31 ICB, removing 267 ENWW image quality issues examples and solutions 494 image stabilization controls 147 image-formation process 133 imaging drums color drums disengagement 141 diagnostic test 385 Information menu 17 information pages 80 Information tab, embedded Web server 86 initial rotation period 117 Initial Setup menu 31 initializing hard disk 505 NVRAM 506 input trays optional, operations 166 installation date calculation 504 verify for optional accessories 436 installing EIO cards 105 intake fans 123 interface ports included 5 locating 9 intermediate transfer belt (ITB) components 142 home position 143 operations 142 Internet Explorer, versions supported embedded Web server 85 IPv4 information 438 IPv6 information 438 IPX/SPX information 439 IPX/SPX setting 33 J jams common causes of 472 detection in paper feeder 173 detection sensors 164 diagnostic test for 386 document feeder 485 envelopes 489 fuser 475 ENWW lower right door 484 output bin 479 recovery 486 right door 475 Tray 1 480 Tray 2 482 Tray 3 483, 484 types detected 164 Japanese VCCI statement 584 Jetadmin firmware updates 114 Jetadmin, HP Web 89 Jetdirect print server installing 105 lights 378 models including 3 settings 31 job storage settings 28 K keys, control panel locating 12 touchscreen 15 Korean EMC statement 584 L LAN-connector 5 languages, printer 4 laser safety statements 584 laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk), removing 332 assembly (Y/M), removing 325 failure conditions 132 operations 131 last rotation period 117 latent image formation 134 LDAP servers embedded Web server settings 87 validating gateway addresses 507 LEDs. See lights left cover, removing 233 left-upper cover, removing 247 license, software 573 lifter-drive assembly removing 314 light print, troubleshooting 494 lights control panel 12 formatter 378 troubleshooting with 378 lines, troubleshooting 496 link speed settings 36 loading Tray 1 66 Tray 2 68 loading media configuring 62 locking control panel menus 91 log of events clear 468 messages, listed numerically 468 view or print 468 loop control 159 loose toner, troubleshooting 497 low-voltage power supply converted DC voltages 125 failure detection 126 operations 125 protection for components 126 safety provided by 126 stops and interruptions 125 See also power supply lower right door jams 484 LVPS, removing 273 M Macintosh AppleTalk settings 34 support 576 main-drive assembly removing 346 manage EWS 85 information pages 80 supplies 93 Management menu 28 manual print modes 492 Media 55 media supported sizes 56 Index 591 memory features 4 included 3 information 436 insufficient 442, 459 NVRAM initialization 506 part numbers 513 memory DIMM, removing 193 memory DIMMs security 92 Menu button 12 menu map Information menu 17 print 372 printing 80 menus, control panel Administration 16 E-mail Setup 41 Fax Setup 38 Information 17 Initial Setup 31 locking 91 Management 28 Resets 53 Send Setup 41 Service 54 Time/Scheduling 26 messages control panel, listed alphabetically 441 control panel, listed numerically 441 event log, listed numerically 468 model number 438 models 3 monthly duty cycle 4 motors DC controller 122 developing-disengagement, removing 311 drum motor 1, removing 343 drum motor 2 or 3, removing 344 failure detection 122 fuser, removing 345 paper feeder 167 pickup, feed, and delivery 149 pickup, removing 313 stepping 122 592 Index movement of paper through product. See pickup, feed, and delivery multiple paper feed prevention 155, 172 multipurpose tray. See trays N Netscape Navigator, versions supported embedded Web server 85 Networking tab, embedded Web server 88 networks AppleTalk settings 34 connectivity features 5 diagnostics 34 DLC/LLC settings 34 HP embedded Jetdirect configuration page 438 HP Web Jetadmin 89 installing EIO cards 105 IPX/SPX settings 33 link speed settings 36 print servers included 3 protocol configuration page, printing 37 security 34 TCP/IP settings 31 validating gateway addresses 507 noise specifications 578 non-HP supplies 93 notes 2 Novell/NetWare information 439 NVRAM (nonvolatile memory) initialization 506 O on/off switch, locating 7 online help, control panel 15 online support 576 operating environment specifications 579 operation sequence 117 operations ADF 174 scanner 174 ordering part numbers for 511 supplies and accessories 510 supplies through embedded Web server 88 orientation paper, while loading 62 output bin jams 479 locating 7 output bins selecting 77 overcurrent or overvoltage protection 126 overhead transparency (OHT) detection 158 P pages blank 500 not printing 500 printing slowly 500 skewed 498 pages count from product ADF 503 from product copy 503 from product copy scan count 503 from product flatbed 503 from product refurbish date 503 from product send scan 503 reset 503 reset by NVRAM initialization 506 since last maintenance 440 See also counts pages per minute 4 paper cassette-presence detection 153, 169 custom sizes 61 default size reset 504 jam detection 173 level detection 155 load 66 loading orientation 62 loading Tray 3 72 movement sensors 148, 164 multifeed prevention 172 presence detection 155, 171 selecting 76 ENWW size detection 169 source 76 stop in path for testing 409 supported sizes 56 supported types 58 type 76 type and size 76 type detection 158 wrinkled 499 paper feeder cassette lift operation 170 electrical components 167 feed operations 157 jam detection 173 multifeed prevention 155, 172 optional 1 x 500-sheet 166 pickup and feed operation 168 skew feed prevention 158 See also pickup, feed, and delivery paper jams. See jams paper path diagnostic test 386 stop movement for testing 409 paper-path test, sensors 408 parameters, EP, troubleshooting 434 part numbers ADF/scanner assembly 520 hard disk 513 hard disk EIO 513 memory 513 print cartridges 513 screws 519 parts 509 parts lists and diagrams covers, panels, and doors 522 internal components 526, 528, 530, 532, 534 using 519 password Service menu PIN 503 periods of the operation sequence 116 physical specifications 577 ENWW pickup, feed, and delivery components 148 multipurpose tray pickup 156 overview 148 paper-feed operations 157 paper-feeder pickup and feed 168 pickup-and-feed unit operations 151 See also paper feeder; fusing and delivery unit; duplexing unit pliers, required 179 port configuration information 438 ports included 5 locating 9 post-service tests 182 power specifications 578 power supply frequency range for drive circuit 130 troubleshooting 376 See also low-voltage power supply; high-voltage power supply power switch, locating 7 power-save mode. See sleep settings pre-troubleshooting checklist 373 preservice checklist 180 pressure-roller pressurization control 161 print cartridge managing 93 print cartridges components 139 diagnostic test 385 error conditions 141 management menu 29 non-HP 93 operations 140 ordering through embedded Web server 88 part numbers 513 removing 186 replacement intervals 93 replacing 94 storage 93 warranty 571 print media loading in Tray 1 66 print quality built-in troubleshooting pages 431 color misregistration control 146 image stabilization controls 147 manual print modes 492 menu 46 test pages 431 troubleshooting 494 Print Quality menu options 492 print server card installing 105 print-quality test 182 printer languages 4 printing modes, manual 492 output bin, selecting 77 period in operation sequence 117 process explained 133 speed specifications 4 stop for testing 409 troubleshooting 500 printing from Tray 2 68 problem-solving Error button, control panel touchscreen 15 e-mail 507 jams 472 networks 34 processor speed 4 product info 1 product status HP Easy Printer Care 82 protocol configuration page, printing 37 Q quality. See print quality R Ready light locating 12 rear cover, removing 238 Index 593 rear-top cover, removing 262 rear-upper cover, removing 236 reformat product hard disk 505 registration assembly removing 303 Registration density (RD) sensor assembly, removing 297 regulatory statements Declaration of Conformity 583 remote firmware update (RFU) 112 removing parts ADF 212 ADF roller assembly 215 ADF separation pad 215 cartridge fan 285 cassette-pickup assembly 323 cassette-pickup drive assembly 316 cautions for 178 checklists 180 control-panel assembly 219 control-panel overlay 218 DC controller PCA and tray 270 delivery assembly 361 delivery cover 245 delivery fan 285 developing-disengagement motor 311 drawer connector 368 drum motor 1 343 drum motor 2 or 3 344 duplex-drive assembly 366 environmental sensor 285 fax PCA 197 formatter PCA 192 front stapler and right-side stapler covers 249 front-door assembly 211 front-top cover 261 front-upper cover 225 fuser 200 fuser motor 345 fuser-drive assembly 356 hard drive 195 high-voltage power supply lower 308 high-voltage power supply upper 339 594 Index ICB 267 intermediate transfer belt 209 laser/scanner assembly (C/ Bk) 332 laser/scanner assembly (Y/ M) 325 left cover 233 left-upper cover 247 lifter-drive assembly 314 LVPS 273 main-drive assembly 346 memory DIMM 193 pickup motor 313 pickup roller (tray 1) 284 pickup roller (tray 2) 201 power-supply fan and fan duct 300 print cartridges 186 rear cover 238 rear-top cover 262 rear-upper cover 236 registration assembly 303 Registration density (RD) sensor assembly 297 residual-toner-feed motor 292 right-door assembly 227 right-front cover 239 right-rear cover 231 right-top cover 258 scanner assembly 242 SCB 279 secondary transfer assembly 207 secondary transfer roller 205 separation roller (tray 2) 204 stable cartridge 188 stapler assembly 264 stapler power supply 266 toner-collection sensor 290 toner-collection unit 190 tools, required 179 tray cassette 199 repeating defects, troubleshooting 428 replace memory 100 supplies 93 replacing parts 178 reset button 12 Resets menu, control panel 53 residual-toner-feed motor, removing 292 resolution specifications 4 troubleshooting quality 494 restore factory settings 505 reverse and feed control, duplexer 163 right door jams 475 right-front cover, removing 239 right-top cover, removing 258 roller pickup roller (Tray 1), removing 284 pickup roller (Tray 2), removing 201 rollers clean document-feeder 110 secondary transfer roller, removing 207 separation roller (Tray 2), removing 204 ruler, repetitive defect 428 S safety features when front door is open 126 safety statements 584 scanner operations 174 part numbers 520 scanner assembly, removing 242 scanner calibration 50, 430 scanner glass clean 108 scanner settings 504 scanner-motor failure 132 scanning speed specifications 4 scanning to e-mail embedded Web server settings 87 validating addresses 507 SCB, removing 279 screwdrivers, required 179 screws part numbers 519 replacing 178 ENWW secondary transfer roller, removing 205 Secure Disk Erase 90 security disk erase 90 encrypted hard disk 90 locking control panel menus 91 settings 34 security features 6 security settings information 438 Send Setup menu 41 sending to e-mail embedded Web server settings 87 validating gateway addresses 507 sensor tests manual developing home-position sensor 394 door (front and right) interlock switches sensor 398 duplex re-pickup sensor (E) 392 fuser delivery sensor 391 fuser pressure release sensor 395 loop sensors 390 output bin full sensor 393 primary transfer roller disengagement sensor 396 TOP sensor (A) 389 tray 1 media present sensor 400 tray 2 closed sensor 402 tray 2 paper-out sensor (M) 401 tray 2 stack surface sensor 403 tray 3 (optional) empty sensor (P) 404 tray 3 (optional) media feed sensor 405 tray 3 (optional) media size sensors 407 tray 3 (optional) stack surface sensor (R) 406 sensors ADF 174 DC controller 121 ENWW diagnostic tests 408 environmental, removing 285 jam detection 164 paper feeder 167 pickup, feed, and delivery 148 product base 421 tests, manual 387 sequence of operation 116 serial number locate 10 reset by NVRAM initialization 506 service tools, required 179 Service ID convert to date 504 restore 504 Service menu options 503 Service menu, control panel 54 settings restore factory 505 Settings tab, embedded Web server 86 skew-feed prevention 158 skewed pages troubleshooting 498 Sleep button 12 Sleep mode power specifications 578 settings 26, 28 sleep settings voltage for 126 voltage too high during 126 smeared toner, troubleshooting 498 SMTP servers validating gateway addresses 507 software HP Easy Printer Care 82 software license agreement 573 solenoids DC controller 119 paper feeder 167 pickup, feed, and delivery 149 solve problems 369 solving direct-connect problems 501 network problems 501 space requirements 577 specifications acoustic 578 electrical 578 features 4 operating environment 579 physical 577 speed dial list, printing 81 speed specifications 4 stable cartridge, removing 188 standard output bin locating 7 selecting 77 standby period 117 stapler assembly, removing 264 stapler power supply, removing 266 Start button 12 Start button, control panel touchscreen 15 static precautions 178 status embedded Web server 86 Home screen, control panel 14 HP Easy Printer Care 82 Status button 12 status page 378 stepping motors 122 Stop button 12 Stop button, control panel touchscreen 15 stop printing for test 409 storage, job settings 28 storing print cartridges 93 streaks, troubleshooting 496 subvoltage low-voltage power supply circuit 125 supplies counterfeit 93 locating 94 management menu 29 non-HP 93 ordering 510 ordering through embedded Web server 88 part numbers 511, 513 Index 595 replace 93 replacement intervals 93 replacing 94 Resets menu 53 status page, printing 80 status, viewing with embedded Web server 86 supplies 93 supplies, status HP Easy Printer Care 82 support embedded Web server links 88 online 576 supported media 56 switches DC controller 120 paper feeder 167, 169 pickup, feed, and delivery 148 system requirements embedded Web server 85 T TCP/IP information 438 TCP/IP settings 31 technical support online 576 temperature control for fuser 128 thresholds for fuser components 129 temperature requirements 579 tests color band 440 component tests list and descriptions 409 disable cartridge check 385 engine 386 manual sensor 387 networks 34 paper path 386 paper-path sensors 408 post-service 182 print-quality 182 print/stop 409 text, troubleshooting 498 thermistors fuser 127, 129 open detection 130 596 Index thermopiles fuser 129 thermoswitches fuser 127, 129 thresholds power-supply frequency, drive circuit 130 temperature, fuser components 129 time, setting 26 Time/Scheduling menu, control panel 26 timeout settings 31 timing chart 423 tips 2 toner image formation, use during 134 loose, troubleshooting 497 patterns for calibration 146 smeared, troubleshooting 498 toner cartridges. See print cartridges toner collection unit removing 190 replacing 98 toner-collection sensor, removing 290 tools, required 179 touchscreen, clean 108 transfer processes 136 Tray 1 capacity 60 jams 480 Tray 2 capacity 60 jams 482 Tray 3 jams 483, 484 trays automatic overhead transparency sensing 75 capacity 60 configure 75 included 3 load 62 multipurpose, pickup operation 156 paper orientation 62 removing 199 select paper 76 See also cassette trays, status HP Easy Printer Care 82 triac-drive circuit deactivation 129 troubleshooting blank pages 500 checklist 370, 373 color 434 configuration page 378 configuration pages for 436 control-panel messages, alphabetical list 441 control-panel messages, numerical list 441 demo page 378 direct-connect problems 501 duplexing 490 EP parameters 434 event log 378 event log, use for 468 event-log messages, numerical list 468 flowchart 375 gateway addresses 507 jams 472 lights, using 378 lines, printed pages 496 menu 50 messages, alphabetical list of 441 network problems 501 pages not printing 500 pages printing slowly 500 paper handling problems 487 power 376 print quality issues 494 process 373 repeating defects 428 reports and tools 378 skewed pages 498 status page 378 text 498 toner smear 498 transparencies 489 USB cables 500 wrinkles 499 ENWW See also diagnostics; error messages Troubleshooting menu options 381 TrueType fonts included 4 typefaces included 4 U upgrading firmware 112 usage page, printing 80 USB port troubleshooting 500 V validating gateway addresses 507 version, hardware firmware 438 vertical lines, troubleshooting 496 voltage detection DC controller 126 voltage specifications 578 W waiting period 117 wake time, setting 27 Warning button, control panel touchscreen 15 warnings 2 warranty customer self repair 575 license 573 print cartridges 571 product 570 warranty date information 504 Web browser requirements embedded Web server 85 Web Jetadmin firmware updates 114 Web sites customer support 576 fraud reports 93 HP Web Jetadmin, downloading 89 Macintosh customer support 576 ordering supplies 510 white spots, troubleshooting 495 wrinkles, troubleshooting 499 ENWW Index 597 598 Index ENWW © 2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com *CC519-91013* *CC519-91013* CC519-91013
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Page Mode : UseOutlines Signing Date : 2008:11:18 08:05:36-07:00 Signing Authority : ARE Acrobat Product v8.0 P23 0002337 Annotation Usage Rights : Create, Delete, Modify, Copy, Import, Export XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Keywords : Edition 2, 10/2008 Modify Date : 2008:11:18 08:05:37-07:00 Create Date : 2008:11:06 14:27:39-07:00 Creator Tool : XSL Formatter V3.4 MR5a (3,4,2006,0718) for Windows Metadata Date : 2008:11:18 08:05:37-07:00 Format : application/pdf Creator : HP Information Engineering Title : HP Color LaserJet CM3530 MFP Series Service Manual - ENWW Subject : Edition 2, 10/2008 Document ID : uuid:f80d4a2b-21ba-4382-b45e-9aecb1e9efe4 Instance ID : uuid:e0ed4824-1d0f-4a3e-8f94-fbadaeb99359 Has XFA : No Page Count : 630 Page Layout : SinglePage Author : HP Information EngineeringEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools